No Section Description - RHD...

268
A INTRODUCTION 2 This manual consists of the foll owing 11 sections: A B C D E F G H I J K No. GROUND POINTS OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM SYSTEM CIRCUITS INDEX POWER SOURCE (Current Flow Chart) ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING RELAY LOCA TIONS GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND SYMBOLS ABBREVIATIONS TROUBLE- SHOOTING HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL INTRODUCTION INDEX Secti on Description Index of the contents of this manual. Brief explanation of each section. Instructions on how to use this manual. Describes the basic inspection procedures for electrical circuits. Defines the abbreviat ions used in this manual. Defines the symbols and functions of major parts. Shows position of the Electronic Control Unit, Relays, Relay Block, etc. This section is closely related to the system circuit. Describes position of Parts Connectors, Splice points, Ground points, etc. This section is closely related to the system circuit. Describes power distribution from the power supply to various electrical loads. Index of the system circuits. El e ct ri cal cir cui t s of eac h system ar e shown f r om the power suppl y thr ough ground points. Wiring connections and their positions are shown and classified by code according to the connection method. (Refer to the section, “How to use this manual”). The System Outlineand Service Hintsuseful for troubleshooting are also contained in this section. Shows ground positions of all the parts described in this manual. Provides circuit diagrams showing the circuit connections.

Transcript of No Section Description - RHD...

Page 1: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

A INTRODUCTION

2

This manual consists of the following 11 sections:

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

No.

GROUND POINTS

OVERALLELECTRICALWIRING DIAGRAM

SYSTEM CIRCUITS

INDEX

POWER SOURCE(Current Flow Chart)

ELECTRICALWIRING ROUTING

RELAY LOCATIONS

GLOSSARY OFTERMS ANDSYMBOLS

ABBREVIATIONS

TROUBLE-SHOOTING

HOW TO USETHIS MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

INDEX

Section Description

Index of the contents of this manual.

Brief explanation of each section.

Instructions on how to use this manual.

Describes the basic inspection procedures for electrical circuits.

Defines the abbreviations used in this manual.

Defines the symbols and functions of major parts.

Shows position of the Electronic Control Unit, Relays, Relay Block, etc.This section is closely related to the system circuit.

Describes position of Parts Connectors, Splice points, Ground points, etc.This section is closely related to the system circuit.

Describes power distribution from the power supply to various electricalloads.

Index of the system circuits.

Electrical circuits of each system are shown from the power supply throughground points. Wiring connections and their positions are shown andclassified by code according to the connection method. (Refer to the section, “How to use this manual”). The “System Outline” and “Service Hints” useful for troubleshooting are also contained in this section.

Shows ground positions of all the parts described in this manual.

Provides circuit diagrams showing the circuit connections.

Page 2: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

3

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B

This manual provides information on the electrical circuits installed on vehiclesby dividing them into a circuit for each system.

The actual wiring of each system circuit is shown from the point where the powersource is received from the battery as far as each ground point. (All circuitdiagrams are shown with the switches in the OFF position.)

When troubleshooting any problem, first understand the operation of the circuitwhere the problem was detected (see System Circuit section), the power sourcesupplying power to that circuit (see Power Source section), and the groundpoints (see Ground Points section). See the System Outline to understand thecircuit operation.

When the circuit operation is understood, begin troubleshooting of the problemcircuit to isolate the cause. Use Relay Location and Electrical Wiring Routingsections to find each part, junction block and wiring harness connectors, wiringharness and wiring harness connectors, splice points, and ground points of eachsystem circuit. Internal wiring for each junction block is also provided for betterunderstanding of connection within a junction block.Wiring related to each system is indicated in each system circuit by arrows(from ,to ). When overall connections are required, see the Overall ElectricalWiring Diagram at the end of this manual.

Page 3: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

* The system shown here is an EXAMPLE ONLY. It is different to the actual

circuit shown in the SYSTEM CIRCUITS SECTION.

4

B HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Page 4: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

5

B

I : Junction Block (The number in the circle is the J/B No. and the connector code is shown besideit). Junction Blocks are shaded to clearlyseparate them from other parts .

A : System Title

B : Indicates a Relay Block. No shading is used and only theRelay Block No. is shown to distinguish it from the J/B.

Example: 1 Indicates Relay Block No. 1.

C : Indicates the connector to be connected to a part (the numeral indicates the pin No.)Explanation of pin use.

J : Indicates the wiring color.Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code.

B = BlackBR = BrownG = GreenGR = Gray

L = BlackLG = Light GreenO = OrangeP = Pink

R = RedV = VioletW = WhiteY = Yellow

The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the secondletter indicates the color of the stripe.

D : Connector Color Connectors not indicated are milky white in color:

E : ( ) is used to indicate different wiring and connector, etc.when the vehicle model, engine type, or specification isdifferent.

F : Indicates related system.

G : Indicates the wiring harness and wiring harness connector. The wiring harness with male terminal is shown with arrows ( ).

Example: L - Y

K : Indicates a wiring Splice Point (Codes are “E” forthe Engine Room, “I” for the Instrument Panel,

The Location of Splice Point I 5 is indicated by the shadedsection.

L : Page No.

M : Indicates a shielded cable.

Example:

N : Indicates a ground point.

The first letter of the code for each ground point(s) indicatesthe component’s location, e.g. “E” for the Engine Compartment, “I” for the Instrument Panel and Surrounding area, and “B” for the Body and Surrounding area.

The first letter of the code for each wiring harness and wiringharness connector(s) indicates thecomponent’s location, e.g,“E” for the Engine Compartment, “I” for the Instrument Panel and Surrounding area, and “B” for the Body and Surroundingarea.

When more than one code has the first and second letters incommon, followed by numbers (e.g, IH1, IH2), this indicates the same type of wiring harness and wiring harness connector.

P : When 2 parts both use one connector in common, the partsconnector name used in the wire routing section is shown insquare brackets [ ].

O : Indicates the pin number of the connector.The numbering system is different for female and male connectors.

H : Represents a part (all parts are shown in skyblue). The code is the same as the code used inparts position.

3B indicatesthat it is insideJunction BlockNo. 3.

vv

The pins shown are only for the highest grade, or onlyinclude those in the specification.

lower right lower left

(blue) (yellow)

Page 5: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

6

B HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW, TERMINAL 2 OF THE POWER WINDOW CONTROLRELAY AND TERMINAL 8 OF THE POWER WINDOW SW THROUGH THE DOOR FUSE.

1. DRIVER’S WINDOW “ MANUAL UP” OPERATION BY MASTER SW

HOLDING MANUAL SW (DRIVER’S) ON “UP” POSITION LOCATED IN POWER WINDOW MASTER SW, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE POWER WINDOW CON-TROL RELAY THROUGH TERMINAL 3 OF THE MASTER SW TERMINAL 2 TO OPERATE A POWER WINDOW CONTROL RELAY. THUS THE CURRENT INSIDE THE RELAYFLOWS FROM TERMINAL 2 OF THE RELAY TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 2 OF THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 4 OF THE RELAY TERMI-NAL 3 TO GROUND. THE MOTOR TURNS TO ASCENT THE WINDOW. RELEASING THIS SW, THE ROTATION OF MOTOR IS STOPPED AND THE WINDOWS CAN STOP ATWILL POINT.

(FOR THE “MANUAL DOWN” OPERATION, CURRENT FLOWS IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION BECAUSE THE TERMINALS WHERE IT FLOW ARE CHANGED).

2. DRIVER’S WINDOW “ AUTO DOWN” OPERATION BY MASTER SW

ONCE THE “AUTO DOWN” BUTTON OF THE MASTER SW IS PUSHED, THE CURRENT FLOW TERMINAL 9 OF THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL RELAY THROUGH TERMINAL 3OF THE MASTER SW TERMINALS 8 AND 9 TO OPERATE THE RELAY. THUS THE CURRENT INSIDE THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL RELAY FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 2 OFTHE RELAY TERMINAL 4 TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR TERMINAL 2 TERMINAL 1 OF THE RELAY TERMINAL 3 TO GROUND. THEMOTOR CONTINUES THE ROTATION ENABLING TO DESCENT THE WINDOW.

THE WINDOW DESCENDS TO THE END POSITION. THE CURRENT WILL BE CUT OFF TO RELEASE THE AUTO DOWN FUNCTION BASED ON THE INCREASING CURRENTBETWEEN TERMINAL 2 OF THE RELAY AND TERMINAL 1 IN RELAY.

3. DRIVER’S WINDOW AUTO DOWN RELEASE OPERATION BY MASTER SW

HOLDING THE MANUAL SW (DRIVER’S) ON “UP” POSITION IN OPERATING AUTO DOWN. THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE MASTER SW PASSING TERMINAL 2FLOWS TERMINAL 5 OF THE RELAY AND RELEASES THE AUTO DOWN FUNCTION IN THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL RELAY. RELEASING THE HAND FROM SW, WINDOWSTOPS AND CONTINUING ON TOUCHING SW. THE FUNCTION SWITCHES TO MANUAL UP OPERATION.

4. PASSENGER’S WINDOW UP OPERATION (MASTER SW) AND WINDOW LOCK SW OPERATION

HOLDING PASSENGER’S WINDOW SW (MASTER SW) ON “UP”, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE MASTER SW PASSING TERMINAL 6 TO TERMINAL 3 OF THEPOWER WINDOW SW (PASSENGER’S) TERMINAL 4 TERMINAL 2 OF THE MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 9 OF THE POWER WINDOW SW TERMINAL 7 TERMINAL 1 OF THE MASTER SW TERMINAL 4 TO GROUND. THE MOTOR RUNS TO ASCENT THE WINDOW. RELEASING THIS SW, THE ROTATION OF MOTOR ISSTOPPED AND WINDOW CAN STOP AT WILL PLACE. SWITCHING THE WINDOW LOCK SW IN “LOCK” POSITION, THE CIRCUIT IS OPENED AND STOPPED THE MOTOR ROTA-TION.(FOR THE DOWN OPERATION, CURRENT FLOWS IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION BECAUSE THE TERMINALS WHERE IT FLOWS ARE CHANGED).

P 2 POWER WINDOW CONTROL RELAY

3-GROUND: ALWAYS CONTINUITY

2-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION

5-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE MASTER SW AT UP POSITION

8-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE MASTER SW AT AUTO DOWN POSITION

9-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE MASTER SW AT DOWN OR AUTO DOWN POSITION

P 4 POWER WINDOW MASTER SW

4-GROUND: ALWAYS CONTINUITY

3-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION

WINDOW LOCK SW

OPEN WITH THE WINDOW LOCK SW AT LOCK POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

P2 21 P4 21 P6 21

P3 21 P5 21

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCK (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

1 16 R/B NO. 1 (INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

38 14 J/B NO. 3 AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT SIDE)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

ID1 26 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IH1 26 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINT LOCATION

IC 24 COWL LEFT

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I 5 24 COWL WIRE

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

SERVICE HINTS

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Page 6: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

7

B

Q : Explains the system outline.

R : Indicates values or explain the function for reference during troubleshooting.

S : Indicates the reference page showing the position on the vehicle of the parts in the system circuit.

Example: Part “P 4” (Power Window Master SW) is on page 21 of the manual.* The letter in the code is from the first letter of the part, and the number indicates its order in

parts starting with the letter.Example: P 4

HINTS:

Part is 4th in orderPower Window Master SW

Junction connector (code: J1 to J19) in this manualinclude a short terminal which is connected to anumber of wire harnesses. Always perform inspec-tion with the short terminal installed. (When instal-ling the wire harnesses, the harnesses can be con-nected to any position within the short terminalgrouping. Accordingly, in other vehicles, the sameposition in the short terminal may be connected toa wire harness from a different part.)Wire harness sharing the same short terminalgrouping have the same color.

T : Indicates the reference page showing the position on the vehicle of Relay Block Connectors in the systemcircuit.

Example: Connector “1” is described on page 16 on this manual and is installed on the left side of the instrument panel.

U : Indicates the reference page showing the position on the vehicle of J/B and Wire Harness in the systemcircuit.

Example: Connector “3B”connects the Cowl Wire and J/B No. 3. It is described on page 14 of this manual,and is installed on the instrument panel left side.

V : Indicates the reference page describing the wiring harness and wiring harness connector (the female wiringharness is shown first, followed by the male wiring harness).

Example: Connector “ID1”connects the front door RH wire (female) and cowl wire (male). It is describedon page 26 of this manual, and is installed on the right side kick panel.

W : Indicates the reference page showing the position of the ground points on the vehicle.

Example: Ground point “IC” is described on page 24 of this manual and is installed on the cowl left side.

X : Indicates the reference page showing the position of the splice points on the vehicle.

Example: Splice point “I 5” is on the Cowl Wire Harness and is described on page 24 of this manual.

Page 7: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

8

B HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

The “Current Flow Chart” section, describes which parts each power source (fuses, fusible links, and circuitbreakers) transmits current to. In the Power Source circuit diagram, the conditions when battery power issupplied to each system are explained. Since all System Circuit diagrams start from the power source, the powersource system must be fully understood.

* The system shown here is an EXAMPLE ONLY. It is different to the actual circuit shown in the SYSTEM CIRCUITS SECTION.

H POWER SOURCE (CURRENT FLOW CHART)

The chart below shows the route by which current flows from the battery to each electrical source (Fusible Link, Circuit Breaker, Fuse,

etc.) and other parts.

The next page and following pages shown the parts to which each electrical source outputs current.

POWER SOURCE

Page 8: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

9

B

The ground points circuit diagram shows the connections from all major parts to the respective ground points.When troubleshooting a faulty ground point, checking the system circuits which use a common ground mayhelp you identify the problem ground quickly. The relationship between ground points ( , and shown below) can also be checked this way.

EA IB IC

* The system shown here is an EXAMPLE ONLY. It is different to the actual circuit shown in the SYSTEM CIRCUITS SECTION.

J GROUND POINT

Page 9: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

10

C TROUBLESHOOTING

(a) Disconnect the battery terminal or wire so there is novoltage between the check points.

(b) Contact the two leads of an ohmmeter to each of thecheck point.

If the circuit has diodes, reverse the two leads and checkagain.When contacting the negative lead to the diode positive sideand the positive lead to the negative side, there should becontinuity.When contacting the two leads in reverse, there should be no continuity.

(c) Use the volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/Vminimum) for troubleshooting of the electrical circuit.

CONTINUITY AND RESISTANCE CHECK

VOLTAGE CHECK

(a) Establish conditions in which voltage is present at thecheck point.

Example: A - Ignition SW on B - Ignition SW and SW 1 on C - Ignition SW, SW 1 and Relay on (SW2 off)

(b) Using a voltmeter, connect the negative lead to a goodground point or negative battery terminal, and thepositive lead to the connector or component terminal.This check can be done with a test light instead of a voltmeter.

Page 10: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

11

C

(a) Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads of the fuse.

(b) Connect a test light in place of the fuse.(c) Establish conditions in which the test light comes on.

Example:A - Ignition SW onB - Ignition SW and SW 1 onC - Ignition SW, SW 1 and Relay on (Connect the Relay) and SW 2 off (or Disconnect SW 2)

(d) Disconnect and reconnect the connectors while watchingthe test light.The short lies between the connector where the testlight stays lit and the connector where the light goesout.

(e) Find the exact location of the short by lightly shaking the problem wire along the body.

(a) Do not open the cover or the case of the ECU unlessabsolutely necessary. (If the IC terminals are tou ched,the IC may be destroyed by s tatic elec trici ty.)

(b) When replaci ng the internal mec hanism (ECU part) ofthe digital meter, be care fu l that no part of your bod yor cl oth ing comes i n cont act wi th the termi nals of leads from the IC, etc. of the replaceme nt part (sparepart).

CAUTION:

FINDING A SHORT CIRCUIT

DISCONNECTION OF MALE AND FEMALECONNECTORSTo pull apart the connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wire harness.

HINT: Check to see what kind of connector you aredisconnecting before pulling apart.

Page 11: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

C TROUBLESHOOTING

HOW TO REPLACE TERMINAL(wi th terminal re tainer or sec ond ary l ocki ng device )

1. PREPARE THE SPECIAL TOOL

HINT: To remove the terminal from the connector, pleaseconstruct and use the special tool or like object shown on the left.

2. DISCONNECT CONNECTOR

3. DISENGAGE THE SECONDARY LOCKING DEVICE ORTERMINAL RETAINER

(a) Locking device must be disengaged before the terminallocking clip can be released and the terminal removed from the connector.

(b) Use a special tool or the terminal pick to unlock thesecondary locking device or terminal retainer.

NOTICE:Do not remove the termi nal re tainer from conn ecto r bod y.

A For Non-Waterproof Type Connector

HINT: The needle insertion position varies according tothe connector’s shape (number of terminalsetc.), so check the position before inserting it.

“Case 1”Raise the terminal retainer up to the temporarylock position.

“Case 2”Open the secondary locking device.

Page 12: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

13

C

For Waterproof Type Connector

HINT: Terminal retainer color is differentaccording to connector body.

“Case 1”Type where terminal retainer is pulled up to the temporary lock position (Pull Type).

Insert the special tool into theterminal retainer access hole ( Mark)and pull the terminal retainer up tothe temporary lock position.

HINT: The needle insertion position variesaccording to the connector’s shape(number of terminals etc.), so checkthe position before inserting it.

“Case 2”Type which cannot be pulled as far asPower Lock insert the tool straightinto the access hole of terminal retainer as shown.

B

Example:Terminal Retainer :Connector BodyBlack or White :GrayBlack or White :Dark GrayGray or White :Black

Page 13: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

14

C TROUBLESHOOTING

(a) Insert the terminal.

HINT:1. Make sure the terminal is positioned correctly.2. Insert the terminal until the locking lug locks firmly.3. Insert the terminal with terminal retainer in the

temporary lock position.

(c) Release the locking lug from terminal and pull the terminal out from rear.

4. INSTALL TERMINAL TO CONNECTOR

5. CONNECT CONNECTOR

Push the terminal retainer down to the temporary lockposition.

(b) Push the secondary locking device or terminal retainerinto the full lock position.

Page 14: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

15

C TROUBLESHOOTING

DISCONNECTION AND CONNECTION OF BOLTTYPE CONNECTORS

For engine control module in this vehicle, connections are usedwhich require a bolt built into the connector to be screwed downto securely connect the connector.

1. Disconnect the connector

After completely loosening the bolt, the two parts of theconnector can be separated.

NOTICE:Do not pu ll the wire harness w hen disc onn ecting theconn ector.

2. Connect the connector

NOTICE:Before conn ecting the conn ector, always c heck thatthe terminals are not bent or damaged.

(a) Match the guide section of the male connectorcorrectly with the female connector, then press them together.

(b) Tighten the bolt.Make sure the connectors are completely connected, by tightening the bolt until there is a clearance of less than 1 mm (0.04 in.) between thebottom of male connector and the end of female connector.

Page 15: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

16

ABBR EVIATIONS DABBR EVIATIONS

The follow abbreviations are used in this manual.

ABS = Anti-Lock Brake Systerm O/D = Overdrive

A/C = Air Conditioning PPS = Progressive Power Steering

ACIS = Acoustic Control Induction System R/B = Relay Block

A/T = Automatic Transmission RH = Right-Hand

COMB. = Combination SFI = Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection

ECU. = Electronic Control Unit SRS = Supplemental Restraint System

EGR = Exhaust Gas Recirculation SW = Switch

ESA = Electronic Spark Advance TEMP. = Temperature

EVAP = Evaporative Emission TRAC = Traction Control

J/B = Junction Block VSV = Vacuum Switching Valve

LH = Left-Hand w/ = With

M/T = Manual Transmission w/o = Without

* The titles given inside the components are the names of the terminals (terminal codes) and are not treatedas being abbreviations.

Page 16: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

17

E GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND SYMBOLS

METER, ANAL OGCurrent flow activates a magneticcoil which causes a needle tomove, thereby providing a relativedisplay against a backgroundcalibration.

LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)Upon current flow, these diodesemit light without producing theheat of a comparable light.

IGNITION COILConvert low-voltage DC currentinto high-voltage ingition currentfor firing the spark plugs.

1. SINGLEFILAMENT

GROUNDThe point at which wiring attachesto the Body, thereby providing areturn path for an electrical circuit;without a ground, current cannotflow.

Current flow causes a headlightfilament to heat up and emit light.A headlight may have either a single (1) filament or a double (2) filament.

BATTERYStores chemical energy and converts it into electrical energy.Provides DC current for the auto’s various electrical circuits.

CAPACITOR (Cond enser )A small holding unit for temporarystorage of electrical voltage.

CIRCUIT BREAKERBasically a reusable fuse, a circuitbreaker will heat and open if toomuch current flows through it.Some units automatically reset whencool, others must be manually reset.

DIODEA semiconductor which allowscurrent flow in only one direction.

DIODE, ZENERA diode which allows current flow in one direction but blocksreverse flow only up to a specificvoltage. Above that potential, itpasses the excess voltage. This acts as a simple voltage regulator.

PHOTODIODEThe photodiode is a semiconductor which controls thecurrent flow according to theamount of light.

FUSEA thin metal strip which burnsthrough when too much currentflows through it, thereby stop-ping current flow and protecting a circuit from damage.

FUSIBLE LINKA heavy-gauge wire placed inhigh amperage circuits whichburns through on overloads,thereby protecting the circuit.The numbers indicate the cross-section surface area of the wires.

HORNAn electric device which sounds a loud audible signal.

LIGHTCurrent flow through a filamentcauses the filament to heat up and emit light.

METER, DIGITALCurrent flow activates one ormany LED’s, LCD’s, or fluoresentdisplays, which provide a relativeor digital display.

MOTORA power unit which convertselectrical energy into mechanicalenergy, especially rotary motion.

CIGARETTE LIGHTERAn electric resistance heatingelement.

DISTRIBUTOR, IIAChannels high-voltage currentfrom the ignition coil to theindividual spark plugs.

2. DOUBLEFILAMENT

HEADLIGHTS

FUEL

M

(for High Current Fuse or

Fusible Link.)

(for Medium Current Fuse)

Page 17: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

18

E

1. NORMALLYOPEN

Open andcloses circuits,therebystopping (1) orallowing (2)current flow.

RESISTORAn electrical component with afixed resistance, placed in a circuitto reduce voltage to a specificvalue.

RESISTOR, TAPPEDA resistor which supplies two ormore different non adjustableresistance values.

SENSOR (Thermis to r)A resistor which varies itsresistance with temperature.

SHORT PINUsed to provide an unbrokenconnection within a juction block.

SOLENOIDAn electromagnetic coil whichforms a magnetic field whencurrent flows, to move a plunger,etc.

SWITCH, DOUBLE THROWA switch which continuouslypasses cureent through one set ofcontacts or the other.

SWITCH,IGNITION

A key operated switch with severalpositions which allows variouscircuits, particularly the primaryignition circuit, to becomeoperational.

Wires are always drawn as straight lineson wiring diagrams.Crossed wires (1)without a black dot atthe junction are notjoined;crossed wires (2) anda black dot oroctagonal ( ) mark at the juction as spliced(joined) connections.

RELAY, DOUBLE THROWA relay which passes currentthrough one set of contacts or theother.

SENSOR, SPEEDUses magnetic impulses to openand close a switch to create a signal for activation of othercomponents.

TRANSISTORA solid state device typically usedas an electronic relay; stops orpasses current depending on thevoltage applied at “base.”

SWITCH, WIPER PARKAutomatically returns wipers tothe stop position when the wiperswitch is turned off.

SWITCH, MANUAL

SPEAKERAn electromechanical devicewhich creates sound waves fromcurrent flow.

2. NORMALLYCLOSED

RESISTOR, VARIABL E orRHEOSTAT

A controllable resistor with a variable rate of resistance.Also called a potentiometer orrheostat.

2. NORMALLYOPEN

RELAY

1. NORMALLYCLOSED

Basically, an electricallyoperated switch whichmay be normally closed(1) or open (2). Currentflow through a smallcoil creates a magneticfield which either opensor closes an attachedswitch.

(2) SPLICED

WIRES

(1) NOTCONNECTED

Page 18: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

19

+

F RELAY LOCATIONS

[Engine Compartment]

[Instrument Panel]

Page 19: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

20

+

F

[Bod y]

[Seat]

Page 20: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

21

F RELAY LOCATIONS

: J/B No. 1 Left Kick Panel (See Page 18)

Page 21: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

22

F

[J/B No. 1 Inner Circ uit]

Page 22: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

23

F RELAY LOCATIONS

2 : R/B No. 2Engine Compartment Left (See Page 18)

: J/B No. 2Engine Compartment Left (See Page 18)

Page 23: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

24

F

4 : R/B No. 4 Left Kick Panel (See Page 18)

5 : R/B No. 5 Eng ine Compartment Right (See Page 18)

Page 24: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

Position of Parts in Engine Compartment

E 4 Engine Coolant Temp. SenderE 5 Engine Coolant Temp. SWE 6 Engine Hood Courtesy SWE 7 Engine Oil Level Sensor

F 3 Front Fog Light LHF 4 Front Fog Light RHF 5 Front Side Marker Light LHF 6 Front Side Marker Light RHF 7 Front Turn Signal Light LHF 8 Front Turn Signal Light RH and Parking Light RHF 9 Front Wiper Motor

G 1 GeneratorG 2 Generator

H 1 Headlight Hi LHH 2 Headlight Hi RHH 3 Headlight Lo LHH 4 Headlight Lo RHH 5 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1)H 8 Horn LHH 9 Horn RH

A 1 A/C Ambient Temp SensorA 2 A/C Condensor Fan MotorA 3 A/C Triple Pressure SW

(A/C Dual and Single Pressure SW)A 4 A/C Magnetic Clutch and Lock SensorA 5 A/T Fluid Temp. SensorA 6 ABS ActuatorA 7 ABS ActuatorA10 ABS Speed Sensor Front LHA11 ABS Speed Sensor Front RH

B 1 Back-Up Light SW (M/T)B 2 Brake Fluid Level Warning SW

C 1 Camshaft Position Sensor No.1C 2 Camshaft Position Sensor No.2C 3 Crankshaft Position SensorC 4 Cruise Control Actuator

D 1 Data Link Connector 1D 2 Daytime Running Light Relay No.3D 3 Daytime Running Light Relay No.3

E 1 EGR Gas Temp. SensorE 2 Electronically Controlled Transmission SolenoidE 3 Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor

[2JZ-GTE]

24

2 6

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

Page 25: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

Posi tion of Parts in Engine Compartment

[2JZ

R 1 Radiator Fan Motor No.1R 2 Radiator Fan Relay No.1R 3 Radiator Fan Relay No.2R20 Radiator Fan Motor No.2

S 1 SFI ResistorS 2 StarterS 3 StarterS 5 Sub Throttle Position SensorS18 Sub Throttle Valve Motor

T 1 Theft Deterrent HornT 2 Throttle Position SensorT14 Turbo Pressure Sensor

V 2 VSV (EGR)V 3 VSV (EVAP)V 4 VSV (Exhaust Bypass Valve)V 5 VSV (Exhaust Gas Control Valve)V 6 VSV (Fuel Pressure Up)V 7 VSV (Intake Air Control Valve)V 8 VSV (Waste Gate Valve)V10 Vehicle Speed Sensor No.1 (Combination Meter)V11 Vehicle Speed Sensor No.2 (Electronically

Controlled Transmission)

W 1Washer Motor

I 1 Idle AIr Control ValveI 2 IgniterI 3 IgniterI 6 Ignition Coil No.1I 7 Ignition Coil No.2I 8 Ignition Coil No.3I 9 Ignition Coil No.4I10 Ignition Coil No.5I11 Ignition Coil No.6I12 Injector No.1I13 Injector No.2I14 Injector No.3I15 Injector No.4I16 Injector No.5I17 Injector No.6

K 1 Knock Sensor (on Front Side)K 2 Knock Sensor (on Rear Side)

M 1 Mass Air Flow Meter

N 1 Noise Filter

O 1 O/D Direct Clutch Speed SensorO 2 Oil Pressure SW

P 1 PPS SolenoidP 2 Park/Neutral Position SW, Back-Up Light SW and

A/T Indicator Light SW (A/T)P13 Parking Light LH

25

G

Page 26: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

26

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

Posi tion of Parts in Engine Compartment

[2J

E 1 EGR Gas Temp. SensorE 2 Electronically Controlled Transmission SolenoidE 3 Engine Coolant Temp. SensorE 4 Engine Coolant Temp. SenderE 6 Engine Hood Courtesy SWE 7 Engine Oil Level Sensor

F 3 Front Fog Light LHF 4 Front Fog Light RHF 5 Front Side Marker Light LHF 6 Front Side Marker Light RHF 7 Front Turn Signal Light LHF 8 Front Turn Signal Light RH and Parking Light RHF 9 Front Wiper Motor

G 1 GeneratorG 2 Generator

A 1 A/C Ambient Temp. SensorA 3 A/C Dual Pressure SWA 4 A/C Magnetic Clutch and Lock SensorA 5 A/T Fluid Temp. SensorA 6 ABS ActuatorA 7 ABS ActuatorA 8 ABS RelayA 9 ABS RelayA10 ABS Speed Sensor Front LHA11 ABS Speed Sensor Front RH

B 1 Back-Up Light SW (M/T)B 2 Brake Fluid Level Warning SW

C 3 Crankshaft Position SensorC 4 Cruise Control Actuator

D 1 Data Link Connector 1D 4 Distributor

Page 27: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

27

G

Posi tion of Parts in Engine Compartment

[2JZ-

O 2 Oil Pressure SW

P 1 PPS SolenoidP 2 Park/Neutral Position SW, Back-Up Light SW and

A/T Indicator Light SW (A/T)P 3 Power Steering Pressure SWP13 Parking Light LH

S 2 StarterS 3 Starter

T 1 Theft Deterrent HornT 2 Throttle Position Sensor

V 1 VSV (ACIS)V 2 VSV (EGR)V 3 VSV (EVAP)V 6 VSV (Fuel Pressure Up)V10 Vehicle Speed Sensor No.1 (Combination Meter)V11 Vehicle Speed Sensor No.2 (Electronically

Controlled Transmission)

W 1 Washer Motor

H 1 Headlight Hi LHH 2 Headlight Hi RHH 3 Headlight Lo LHH 4 Headlight Lo RHH 8 Horn LHH 9 Horn RH

I 1 Idle Air Control ValveI 4 IgniterI 5 Ignition CoilI 12 Injector No.1I 13 Injector No.2I 14 Injector No.3I 15 Injector No.4I 16 Injector No.5I 17 Injector No.6

K 1 Knock Sensor (on Front Side)K 2 Knock Sensor (on Rear Side)

M 1 Mass Air Flow MeterM 2 Main Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1)M 3 Main Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 1)

N 1 Noise Filter

Page 28: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

28

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

Position of Parts in Instrument Panel

B 5 Blower Motor Control RelayB 6 Buckle SW LHB 7 Buckle SW RH

C 6 Cigarette LighterC 7 Cigarette Lighter IlluminationC 8 ClockC 9 Clutch Start SWC10 Combination MeterC11 Combination MeterC12 Combination MeterC13 Combination SWC14 Combination SWC15 Cruise Control Clutch SWC16 Cruise Control ECU

D 5 Data Link Connector 2D 6 Daytime Running Light Relay (Main)D 7 Diode (Interior Light)D 8 Diode (Idle-Up)D17 Data Link Connector 3

A12 A/C AmplifierA13 A/C AmplifierA14 A/C AmplifierA15 A/C Evaporator Temp. SensorA16 A/C Room Temp. SensorA17 A/C Solar SensorA18 ABS ECUA19 ABS ECUA20 ABS ECUA21 ABS ECUA23 ABS Deceleration SensorA24 Air Inlet Control Servo MotorA25 Air Mix Control Servo MotorA26 Air Vent Mode Control Servo MotorA27 Airbag Squib (Steering Wheel Pad)A28 Airbag Squib (Front Passenger Airbag Assembly)A29 Ashtray IlluminationA30 Auto Antenna Control RelayA34 Airbag Sensor

B 3 Blower MotorB 4 Blower Motor Control Relay

Page 29: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

29

G

Posi tion of Parts in Instrument Panel

O 5 O/D Main SW and A/T Indicator Illumination

P 4 PPS ECUP 5 Parking Brake SW

R 4 Radio and Player (w/o Stereo Power Amplifier)R 5 Radio and Player (w/o Stereo Power Amplifier)R 6 Radio and Player (w/ Stereo Power Amplifier)R 7 Remote Control Mirror SWR 8 Rheostat

S 6 Seat Heater SWS 7 Shift Lock ECUS 8 Stereo Power AmplifierS 9 Stereo Power AmplifierS10 Stereo Power AmplifierS11 Stop Light SWS16 Sub Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

T 5 Telltale Light LHT 6 Telltale Light RHT 7 Theft Deterrent and Door Lock Control ECUT 8 Traction Control SWT13 Theft Deterrent and Door Lock Control ECUT15 Throttle ECUT16 Throttle ECU

U 1 Unlock Warning SW

E 8 Electronically Controlled Transmission Pattern Select SW

E 9 Engine Control ModuleE10 Engine Control ModuleE11 Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor (A/C System)

F10 Front Tweeter (Speaker) LHF11 Front Tweeter (Speaker) RH

G 3 Glove Box LightG 4 Glove Box Light SW

H10 Hazard SWH11 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2)H12 Heater Control SWH13 Heater Control SW

I18 Ignition Key Cylinder LightI19 Ignition SWI20 Integration Relay

J 1 Junction ConnectorJ 2 Junction Connector

K 4 Kick Down SW

N 2 Noise Filter

Page 30: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

30

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

Posi tion of Parts in Bod y

N 3 Noise Filter

P 6 Personal LightP 7 Power Window Control SW RHP 8 Power Window Master SW and Door Lock Control

SW LHP 9 Power Window Motor LHP10 Power Window Motor RH

R 9 Rear Combination Light LHR10 Rear Combination Light RHR11 Rear Side Marker Light LHR12 Rear Side Marker Light RHR13 Rear Speaker LHR14 Rear Speaker RHR15 Rear Wiper Motor and RelayR16 Remote Control Mirror and Mirror Heater LHR17 Remote Control Mirror and Mirror Heater RHR18 Rear Window Defogger (+)R19 Rear Window Defogger (-)

T11 Tension Reducer Solenoid LHT12 Tension Reducer Solenoid RH

W2 Woofer (Speaker)

A31 ABS Speed Sensor Rear LHA32 ABS Speed Sensor Rear RHA33 Auto Antenna Motor

D10 Door Courtesy SW LHD11 Door Courtesy SW RHD12 Door Key Lock and Unlock SW LHD13 Door Key Lock and Unlock SW RHD14 Door Lock Control SW RHD15 Door Lock Motor and Door Unlock Detection SW LHD16 Door Lock Motor and Door Unlock Detection SW RH

F12 Front Door Speaker LHF13 Front Door Speaker RHF14 Fuel Pump and SenderF15 Fuel Pump ECU

H14 High Mounted Stop Light

L 1 License Plate LightL 2 Light Failure SensorL 3 Luggage Compartment Key Unlock SWL 4 Luggage Compartment LightL 5 Luggage Compartment Light SW

Page 31: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

31

G

Posi tion of Parts in Seat

S13 Seat Heater (Front Passenger’s Seat)S14 Seat Heater Relay (Driver’s Seat)S15 Seat Heater Relay (Front Passenger’s Seat)

P11 Power Seat Control SW (Driver’s Seat)P12 Power Seat Motor (Driver’s Seat Slide Control)

S12 Seat Heater (Driver’s Seat)

Page 32: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

32

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

: Lo cation of Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness: Lo cation of Ground Points

[2JZ

:Lo cation of Splice P oints

Page 33: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

33

C o n n e c t o r

G

Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness

CODE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA1ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)

EA2ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO.2)

Page 34: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

34

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

: Lo cation of Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness: Lo cation of Ground Points

[2JZ-

:Lo cation of Splice P oints

Page 35: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

35

G

Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness

CODE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA1ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)

EA3ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO.2)

Page 36: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

36

I I 2

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

: Lo cation of Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness

: Lo cation of Ground Points

Page 37: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

37

G

Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness

CODE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB1ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB2ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB4

IB5 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IB6( )

IC1FLOOR NO 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IC2FLOOR NO.2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

ID1 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IE1 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO.2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF1INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF2INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF3 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

Page 38: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

38

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

: Lo cation of Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness

:Lo cation of Splice P oints

Page 39: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

39

G

Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness

CODE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)IG1 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL NO.3 WIRE (BEHIND HEATER CONTROL SW)

IH1IH2 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND CONSOLE BOX WIRE (UNDER THE INSTRUMENT PANEL BRACE RH)IH3

( )

II1 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ1ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ2ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IK1 COWL NO.4 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IL1 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

Page 40: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

40

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

: Lo cation of Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness: Lo cation of Ground Points

:Lo cation of Splice P oints

Page 41: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

41

G

Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness

CODE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

BM1 BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND FLOOR NO.2 WIRE (LEFT SIDE OF PACKAGE TRAY TRIM)

BO1 BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE (BACK DOOR UPPER LEFT)

BP1 FUEL GAUGE WIRE AND FLOOR NO.2 WIRE (LUGGAGE ROOM FRONT LH)

Page 42: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

42

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

: Lo cation of Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness

:Lo cation of Splice P oints

Page 43: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

43

G

Conn ector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness

CODE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

BQ1 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND SEAT WIRE (UNDER THE FRONT LH SEAT)

Page 44: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

FRONT TURN SIGNALLIGHT RH ANDPARKING LIGHT RH

EFI NO. 2 RELAY

EFI MAIN RELAY

HEATER RELAY

FRONT WIPER MOTOR

A/C CONDENSER FANMOTOR

BRAKE FLUID LEVELWARNING SW

COMBINATION METER

ENGINE OILLEVEL SENSOR

NOISE FILTER

IGNITER

PARKING LIGHT LH

FRONT SIDE MARKERLIGHT LH

DAYTIMERUNNINGLIGHT RELAYNO. 3

FRONT FOG LIGHT RH

ENGINE HOODCOURTESY SW

FRONT TURN SIGNALLIGHT LH

FRONT SIDE MARKERLIGHT RH

HEADLIGHT LO RH

HEADLIGHT LO LH

ABS RELAY

A/C DUAL PRESSURESW

ABS SOLENOIDRELAY

ABS ACTUATOR

E 2

E 5

E 2 E 2

2

2

2

5

EB EA

HEATED OXYGENSENSOR(BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

HEATED OXYGENSENSOR(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

EDEC

II1

24

I17

E14

I 2

IJ118

(E1)

(E01)

(E02)

IC1

8

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

W- B

W- B

W- B

(* 3)

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*4)

W- B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

BR BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

W- B

(*3)

W- B

W-B

(*3)

E 7 : *3E20 : * 4

E 2 : *3E18 : *4

E 2 : *3E18 : *4

E 2 : *3E18 : *4

E 5 : *3E19 : *4

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHT RELAYNO. 3

RADIATOR FAN MOTORNO. 1

E11 : *3E24 : *4

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

(*1)

E 2 : *3E18 : * 4

W- B

(*3)

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 2

RADIATOR FANRELAY NO. 2

(E)

ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SW

(- S)E 2

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- BW- B

W- B

W-B

BR

E 2 : *3E18 : *4

E 2

W- B

(*1)

(*3) (*3)(*3)

(*3)

(*3)

(*3)

(*3)

ENGINE CONTROLMODULE

W- B

BR DATA LINKCONNECTOR 1

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 3

IJ1

5BR

(*4)

BR

( *4)

E 9 : * 3E21 : * 4

RADIATOR FAN MOTORNO. 2

W- B

(*3)

FRONT FOG LIGHT LH

W-B

THROTTLEECU

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 3

BR

BR

BR

BR

(E03)

BR (* 3)

W- B (* 3)

(E1)

(E01)

W- B

W- B

(*2)

E 2

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*1)

IJ15

(*3)

BR

BR

240

J GROUND POINT

Page 45: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

POWER STEERINGPRESSURE SW

DOOR LOCK MOTOR ANDDOOR UNLOCKDETECTION SW LH

DOOR KEY LOCK ANDUNLOCK SW LH

REMOTE CONTROLMIRROR AND MIRRORHEATER LH

POWER WINDOW MASTERSW

PERSONAL LIGHT

AIRBAGSENSORASSEMBLY

POWER MAIN RELAY

INTEGRATION RELAY

LIGHT CONTROL SW[COMB. SW]

DIMMER SW[COMB. SW]

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHT RELAY NO. 3

MAIN HEATEDOXYGEN SENSOR(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

MAIN HEATEDOXYGEN SENSOR(BANK 2 SENSOR 1)

(E1)

CRUISE CONTROLECU

KICK DOWN SW

CRUISE CONTROL SW[COMB. SW]

UNLOCK WARNING SW

KEY INTERLOCKSOLENOID[UNLOCK WARNING SW]

WIPER AND WASHER SW[COMB. SW]

RHEOSTAT

REMOTE CONTROLMIRROR SW

TELLTALE LIGHT LH

TURN SIGNALFLASHER

I17 E27

E28

I17

I 9

I 2

I 2

I 3

I 3

I 1

B 1

B 1

B 1

IJ1

18

ED

E28

4

IE

(E01)

(E02)

W- B

W- B

IB513 W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*1)

(*4)

BR BR BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- BW- B

W- B

W-

B

W-

B

BR

BR

BR

BR

W-B

W-B

(E1)

(E2)

W- B

W-B

W- B

W- B

W- B

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 2

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 1

ENGINE CONTROLMODULE

(A/T)

BR(E03)

I 2

W- B

W- B

W- B

(*2)

(* 1)

(* 1)

(* 1)

(*2)

SUB HEATED OXYGENSENSOR(BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

E28

BR A A BR

J 2JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

BR

CRUISE CONTROLACTUATOR

W- BIB6

17W- B

I 9 :

*3

I 4 :

*4

1H13

1K

12

1E

18

1J

1

1K

6

1D10

1F

6

1G

3

IG4

1K

5

241

* 4 : 2JZ- GE*2 : USA*1 : CANADA * 3 : 2JZ- GTE

Page 46: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

STEREO POWERAMPLIFIER

RADIO AND PLAYER

BLOWER MOTORCONTROL RELAY

SEAT HEATER RELAY(PASSENGER’ S SEAT)

SEAT HEATER(PASSENGER’ S SEAT)

BUCKLE SW RH

DOOR COURTESY SW RH

HIGH BEAM INDICATORLIGHT [COMB. METER]

TRACTION CONTROL SW

SHIFT LOCK ECU

ELECTRONICALLYCONTROLLEDTRANSMISSIONPATTERN SELECT SW

O/D MAIN SW

SEAT HEATER SW

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHT RELAY (MAIN)

(EP)

(GND)

HEATER CONTROL SW

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

CLOCK

AUTO ANTENNACONTROL RELAY

GLOVE BOX LIGHT SW

THEFT DETERRENTAND DOOR LOCKCONTROL ECU

PPS ECU

DOOR LOCK CONTROLSW RH

REMOTE CONTROLMIRROR AND MIRRORHEATER RH

DOOR LOCK MOTOR ANDDOOR UNLOCKDETECTION SW RH

DOOR KEY LOCK ANDUNLOCK SW RH

IG

IH

I24 I24 I23

I23

I 2

I11

I10

I21

B 2

B 2

I25

B 2IL1

16

IF3

11

IK1

1

IF1

14

I18

I18

IF

I14

(E2)

(VER1)

COMBINATIONMETER

A/CAMPLIFIER

W- B

(* 2)

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(* 2)W- B

(*1)

W- B

(* 3)

W- B

(A/T)

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*1)

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

R- L W- B

W- B W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- BW- BW- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

BR

BR BR

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-

B

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

J 1

I11 : *3I 4 : *4

(*1) (*1)

(*6)

(GND)

(GND)

ABS ECU

W-

B

W- B

(A/T)

(A/T)

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 3

W- B

I 3

I14

BR

W- B

W- B

W- B

(*5)

COMBINATION METER

TELLTALE LIGHT RH

FUEL SENDER

I 8

I 3

IE13

BP11 BRBR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

W- B

I10

: *3

I 9 :

*4

I18 : *3I 4 : *4

I18 : * 3I 4 : *4

I11 : * 3I 1 : *4

242

J GROUND POINT

Page 47: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

SEAT HEATER RELAY(DRIVER’ S SEAT)

SEAT HETER(DRIVER’ S SEAT)

HIGH MOUNTED STOPLIGHT

REAR COMBINATIONLIGHT LH

DOOR COURTESY SW LH

LICENSE PLATELIGHT

BUCKLE SW LH

FUEL PUMP

REAR SIDE MARKERLIGHT RH

REAR COMBINATIONLIGHT RH

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTKEY UNLOCK SW

REAR SIDE MARKERLIGHT LH

LIGHT FAILURESENSOR

FUEL PUMP ECU

B 9

B 9

B 3

B 3

B 3

I 7

B 5

B 4

B 5

B 4

B 7

B 7

BI BJ

BQ12

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

(*1)

W- B

(*1)

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-

B

W-B

W-

BW

-BW

-BW

-B W

-B

W-B

BP1

2

*1 : CANADA*2 : USA

*6 : W/O STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER*5 : W/ STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER

*3 : 2JZ- GTE*4 : 2JZ- GE

POWER SEAT CONTROLSW(DRIVER’ S SEAT)

W-B

BK

W-B

B10BO1

3W- B W- B W- B

W-B

B 6

BM12

W- B

W-

B

243

Page 48: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

244

J GROUND POINT

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGEJ1 29 J2 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

4 23 R/B NO. 4 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

5 23 R/B NO. 5 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT RIGHT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1D 20 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1F 20 ROOF WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1G1H

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1J

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB5 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IC1 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IK1 38 COWL NO. 4 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IL1 38 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

BM1 40 BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT SIDE OF PACKAGE TRAY TRIM)

BO1 40 BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE

BP1 40 FUEL GAUGE WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LUGGAGE ROOM FRONT LH)

BQ1 42 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND SEAT WIRE (UNDER THE FRONT LH SEAT)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EA32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDEREA 34 (2JZ-GE)FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER

EB32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDEREB 34 (2JZ-GE)FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

EC32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLDEC 34 (2JZ-GE)FRONT SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLD

ED32 (2JZ-GTE)

REAR SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLDED 34 (2JZ-GE)REAR SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLD

IE36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IF36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IG36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

IH36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

BJ 40 LOWER BACK PANEL CENTER

BK 40 RIGHT SIDE OF HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT

Page 49: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

245

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E2 I1038 COWL WIRE

E532 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

I1138 COWL WIRE

E732 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

I14 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E9 I17 38 ENGINE WIRE

E14 32 ENGINE WIRE I18 38 COWL WIRE

E18 I21 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E1934 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

I2338 COWL WIRE

E2034 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

I2438 COWL WIRE

E21 I25 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E24 B1 40 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE

E27 34 ENGINE WIRE B2 40 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE

E28 B3

I138 COWL WIRE

B4

I238 COWL WIRE

B5 40 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE

I3 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE B6

I4 38 COWL WIRE B7

I7 38 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE B9 42 SEAT WIRE

I8 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE B10 40 BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE

I9 38 COWL WIRE

AA A A

A A A A

( H I N T : S E E P A G E 7 )

J 1

A A A A

A A A A A A A

(H IN T : S E E P A G E 7 )

J 2

Page 50: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

44

H POWER SOURCE (Current Flow Chart)

The chart below shows the route by which current flows from the battery to each electrical source(Fusible Link, Circuit Breaker, Fuse, etc.) and other parts.

The next page and following pages show the parts to which each electrical source outputs current.

[LOCATION] 1 : J/B No. 1 (See page 20) 2 : R/B No.2 (See page 22)

Page 51: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

45

H

3 : R/B No. 4 (See page 23)

Page 52: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

46

H POWER SOURCE (Current Flow Chart)*1: (CANADA)*2: (USA

[LOCATION] 1 :J/B No. 1 (See page 20) 2 :R/B No.2 (See page 22) 3 :R/B No.4 (See page 23)

Page 53: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

47

H

4 :R/B No. 5 (See page 23)

Page 54: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

48

H POWER SOURCE (Current Flow Chart)

[LOCATION] 1 :J/B No. 1 (See page 20) 2 : R/B No.2 (See page 22) 3 : R/B No. 4 (See page 23)

Page 55: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

49

H

4 : R/B No. 5 (See page 23)

Page 56: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

50

H POWER SOURCE (Current Flow Chart)

[LOCATION] 1 : J/B No. 1 (See page 20) 2 : R/B No. 2 (See page 22) 3 : R/B No.4 (See page 23)

Page 57: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

51

H

4 : R/B No. 5 (See page 23)

Page 58: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

52

H POWER SOURCE (Current Flow Chart)*1: (CANADA)*2: (USA

[LOCATION] 1 : J/B No. 1 (See page 20) 2 : R/B No.2 (See page 22) 3 : R/B No.4 (See page 23)

Page 59: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

53

H

4 : R/B No. 5 (See page 23)

Page 60: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

54

MEMO

Page 61: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

2

7

3

4

8

6

E 7

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

22

2

2

IB14

1

3

2

3

4

2 1

3

5

1

4

2

W- R W- R

W

W- R

R

B

W- R

W

W- L

G

B- Y

B- R

B- W

R

R

R- W

R- Y

B

B

R- LW

W

L- Y

Y

B- O

B- W

G- R

W

W

R

L- Y

B

W ( *1)

( *2)

( *2)

( *2)

(USA)

120A ALT

20A RAD NO. 1

7. 5A DOME

7. 5A ALT- S

15A HAZ- HORN

60A POWER

60A ABS NO. 1

50A HTR

30A FAN(* 2)

30A EFI NO. 1

30A EFI NO. 2(* 2)

30A ABS NO. 2(*2)

7. 5A TRAC(*2)

R- W

TO DIMMER SW[COMB. SW]

TO STARTER

FROM PARK/NEUTRALPOSITION SW(A/T)CLUTCH START SW(M/T)

TO DAYTIMERUNNING LIGHTRELAY (MAIN)

TO GENERATOR” B”

IGNITION SWI19

HEADLIGHTRELAY

STARTER RELAY

DIMMER RELAY(DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 2)(*1)

2

1 2

50A AM1 (USA)60A AM1 (*1)

22W

2

W TO GENERATOR” B”

W

W

W

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

W

L- O

L-O

TO THEFTDETERRENT ANDDOOR LOCKCONTROL ECU

7. 5A OBD-

E 7 : *2E20 : *3

E 7 : *2E20 : *3

AM2

AM1

ACC

IG1

ST1

IG2

1J4

1B4

1 2

30A AM2

2A1

1 2

50A MAIN

15A FOG 2B1

BA

TTE

RY

56

POWER SOURCE

Page 62: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

2 1

2 1

2 1

2 1

2 1E 7

E 7

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 5

1 3

4 4

IC25

4 4

W- L

G

B- Y

B- R

B- W

R

R- W

R- W

R- W R- Y

R

R- B

R- W

R- B

B B

O

R

(USA)

R

(*1)

W-LY

15A HEAD (LH)(USA)15A HEAD (LH- LWR)(*1)

15A HEAD (RH)(USA)15A HEAD (RH- LWR)(* 1)

7. 5A DRL (* 1)

15A HEAD (LH- UPR)(* 1)

15A HEAD (RH- UPR)(*1)

TO A/CAMPLIFIER

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERRELAY

E 7

(*1) (*1)

(*1) (*1)

(*1)

(*1)

R ( *1)

(USA)

R- G

(*1)

R

(*1)

R

1C710A MIR- HTR

1H12

1K

7

1J

3

1J

8

1J6

1B2

1J5

30A DOOR

30A DEFOG

5

1

3

2

7. 5A RAD NO. 2

15A CIG

7. 5A ST

7. 5A IGN

TAILLIGHTRELAY

10A TAIL

10A PANEL

15A STOP

10A ECU- B

20A WIPER

7. 5A TURN

10A ECU- IG

7. 5A HTR

10A GAUGE

15A SEAT- HTR(*1)

1

3

2

4

TO LIGHT CONTROL SW[COMB. SW]

57

*1 : CANADA*2 : 2JZ- GTE*3 : 2JZ- GE

Page 63: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

58

POWER SOURCE

HEADLIGHT RELAY (USA)2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION OR THE DIMMER SW AT FLASH POSITION

HEADLIGHT RELAY (CANADA)2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION OR THE DIMMER SW AT FLASH POSITION

: CLOSED WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AND THE PARKING BRAKE LEVER RELEASED (PARKING BRAKE SWOFF)

TAILL IGHT RELAY5-3 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION

I19 IGNITION SW2-3 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION KEY AT ACC OR ON POSITION2-4 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION KEY AT ON OR ST POSITION7-6 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION KEY AT ON OR ST POSITION7-8 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION KEY AT ST POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

I19 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO.2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

4 23 R/B NO.4 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1C 20 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H

1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K( )

2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

2B 22 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB1 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E7 32 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE E20 34 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

I1 9

X 2 3 4

X 6 7 8

SERVICE HINTS

Page 64: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

59

MEMO

Page 65: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

6

30AAM2

2 2

2 2

2

1

M

B1

A1

5 2

3 1

IB212

EA13

IJ2

13

I 4

E16

E16

IF213

IF210

EA21

IJ1

1

IGNITION SW

50AMAIN

BATTERY

STARTER

THEFT DETERRENTAND DOOR LOCKCONTROL ECU

STARTERRELAY

TO BULB CHECK RELAY[COMB. METER]

PARK/NEUTRAPOSITION SW(A/T)

CLUTCHSTART SW(M/T)

BS 2 , S 3A

I19

T13

C 9 P 2

B- R

B- W

B- O

B- W

B

B- W

B

B

L- O

IJ12

B

(A/T)

B

( M/T

)

B- W

B

(A/T)

B- W

(A/T)B

( M/T

)

B-

WB

-W

B

B-

W

L-OB

B

L -O

B B

B

( A/T

)

25

5

W-R

W-

R

IB14

2 2

B

(A/T)

B

E17 : A/TE16 : M/T

I 4

B

B

(A/T)

( M/T

)( M

/T)

(A/T)

( A/T

)

( A/T

)

I20 IJ2

9

B-W

8 1J6

1K4

7. 5AST

1 1

2A1

SRLY

7 AM2 IG2

ST2

LP

N

6

60

STARTING AND IGNITION (2JZ-GTE)

Page 66: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

A2 B5 B4 B10 B11 B12 B6

B77 B76 B57 B56 B55 B54 B53 B52 B58

B26 B6 B25 B27 B7 A16

A4A3B7B8B9B3B2B1

G1 G- G2 NE NE- TACO

GNDIGFIGT6IGT5IGT4IGT3IGT2IGT1

+B IGC2 IGC3 IGC4 IGC5 IGC6 IGC1

STA NSW IGT1 IGT2 IGT3 IGT4 IGT5 IGT6 IGF

E16 E11 E11 E11 E11 E11 E16

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

21 21 21

EC

2

1

ED

II129

B- O

B- W

B

B- O B- O B- O B- O B- O B- O B- O

B-O

B-O

B-O

B-O

B-O

B-O

B-O

G

Y-

R

Y-

G

Y-BYL-Y

B-

W

R-W

W-R LG B-R L R

R-Y BR

B-O

BR

B-W

B-W

BR

BR

A

A

A

( SH

IELD

ED

)

( SH

IELD

ED

)

IGN

ITIO

N C

OIL

NO

. 2

NO

ISE

FIL

TER

IGNITER

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

CAMSHAFT POSITIONSENSOR NO. 1

CAMSHAFT POSITIONSENSOR NO. 2

CRANKSHAFT POSITIONSENSOR TO TACHOMETER

[COMB. METER]

BR

AE 9 , E10B

BI 2 , I 3A

I 7

N 1

C 3C 2C 1

IGN

ITIO

N C

OIL

NO

. 3

I 8

IGN

ITIO

N C

OIL

NO

. 4

I 9

IGN

ITIO

N C

OIL

NO

. 5

I10

IGN

ITIO

N C

OIL

NO

. 6

I11

IGN

ITIO

N C

OIL

NO

. 1

I 6

(A/T)

( A/T

)

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

J 2

B-R

B-WW

( SH

IELD

ED

)

L

BR

O

I17

BR

A

61

Page 67: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

62

TARTING AND IGNITION (2JZ-GTE)

I19 IGNITION SW7-8 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ST POSITION7-6 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON OR ST POSITION

P2 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW (A/T)6-5 : CLOSED WITH THE A/T SHIFT LEVER IN P OR N POSITION

C9 CLUTCH START SW (M/T)1-2 : CLOSED WITH THE CLUTCH PEDAL FULLY DEPRESSED

S2 (A), S3 (B) STARTERPOINTS CLOSED WITH THE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW ON AND THE IGNITION SW AT ST POSITION (A/T)POINTS CLOSED WITH THE CLUTCH START SW ON AND THE IGNITION SW AT ST POSITION (M/T)

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGEC1 24 I3 B 25 J2 29C2 24 I6 25 N1 25 (2JZ-GTE)C3 24 (2JZ-GTE) I7 25 P2 25 (2JZ-GTE)C9 28 I8 25 S2 A 25 (2JZ-GTE)D1 24 (2JZ-GTE) I9 25 S3 B 25 (2JZ-GTE)

E9 B 29 I10 25 T13 29E10 A 29 I11 25I2 A 25 I19 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)2 22 R/B NO. 2 ( ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)1J

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)IK

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)EA1 32(2JZ-GTE)

ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)EA2 32

ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

IB136 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB236 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF2 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ138 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ238 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EC 32 (2JZ-GTE) FRONT SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLD

ED 32 (2JZ-GTE) REAR SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLD

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E11 I4

E16 32 ENGINE WIRE I17 38 COWL WIRE

E17 I20

SERVICE HINTS

Page 68: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

63

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

X

XX

X

X

X

25

6

26

7

27

X

X

X

X5857

77

X

56

76

55545352 X

X

X

16

X X

X

X

X 23 4

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 11 1210

1 2

A A A A

A A A A A A A 1 2 5 6

1

1

B BLACKS 3AS 2

B DARK GRAYE 9 A DARK GRAYE10

B BLACKI 3A BLACKI 2

C 1 C 2 C 3 C 9

I 6, I 7, I 8I 9, I10, I11 I19

J 2 N 1 P 2

T13

BLACK BLACK DARK GRAY

BLACK

(HINT : SEE PAGE 7)

GRAY GRAY

ORANGE

X

X

X

X

X X

XX X 25

X

X 6 7 8

X

Page 69: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

3

L IG S B

IC REGULATOR

BW W

B-O

Y-G

Y-G Y W

Y

W

BATTERY

GENERATOR

A A A B1 2 3 1

II134 II123

W

W

AG 1 , G 2B

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

EA24EA32

(*1)(*2)

W

W W

I14

Y-G

Y-G

Y-G

FR

OM

CO

MB

INA

TIO

NM

ET

ER

CH

AR

GE

WA

RN

ING

LIG

HT

[TE

LLTA

LE L

IGH

T R

H]

T 6

Y-G

TO D

AY

TIM

E R

UN

NIN

GLI

GH

T R

ELA

Y( M

AIN

)1E8 1E12

10AGAUGE

7. 5AIGN

2 2

7. 5AALT- S

2 2

1 1

120AALT

2A1

68

CHARGING *1 : 2JZ- GTE*2 : 2JZ- GE

Page 70: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

69

G2 (A) GENERATOR(A) 3-GROUND : 13.9-15.1 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AT 2000 RPM AND 25 C (77 F)

13.5-14.3 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AT 5000 RPM AND 115 C (239 F)(A) 1-GROUND ; 0-4 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE ENGINE NOT RUNNING

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

G1 B24 (2JZ-GTE)

G2 A24 (2JZ-GTE) T6 29

G1 B26 (2JZ-GE)

G2 A26 (2JZ-GE)

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA2 32ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)

EA3 34ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I14 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

1

1 2 3

BG 1 A B LA C K

12 X XX

3

T 6G 2

SERVICE HINTS

Page 71: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

70

ENGINE CONTROL (2JZ-GTE)

THE ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM UTILIZES A MICROCOMPUTER AND MAINTAINS OVERALL CONTROL OF THEENGINE, TRANSMISSION ETC. AN OUTLINE OF THE ENGINE CONTROL IS GIVEN HERE.

1. INPUT SIGNALS

(1) ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SIGNAL CIRCUITTHE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR DETECTS THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. WHICH IS INPUT INTOTERMINAL THW OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.

(2) INTAKE AIR TEMP. SIGNAL CIRCUITTHE INTAKE AIR TEMP. SENSOR IS INSTALLED IN THE MASS AIR FLOW METER AND DETECTS THE INTAKE AIRTEMP. WHICH IS INPUT AS A CONTROL SIGNAL TO TERMINAL THA OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.

(3) OXYGEN DENSITY SIGNAL CIRCUITTHE OXYGEN DENSITY IN THE EXHAUST EMISSION IS DETECTED BY THE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR SIDE ANDINPUT AS A CONTROL SIGNAL TO TERMINAL OX1, OXS OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.

(4) RPM SIGNAL CIRCUITCRANKSHAFT POSITION IS DETECTED BY THE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. CRANKSHAFT POSITION ISINPUT AS A CONTROL SIGNAL TO TERMINAL NE OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.

(5) THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUITTHE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DETECTS THE THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL,WHICH IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL VTA1 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. WHEN THE VALVE IS COMPLETELYCLOSED, THE CONTROL SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL IDL1.

(6) VEHICLE SPEED CIRCUITTHE VEHICLE SPEED IS DETECTED BY VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 1 INSTALLED IN THE TRANSMISSION ANDTHE SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL SP1 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE VIA THE COMBINATION METER.

(7) NEUTRAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUITTHE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW DETECTS WHETHER THE SHIFT POSITION IS IN “N” AND “ P” OR NOT, ANDTHE SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL NSW OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.

(8) A/C SW SIGNAL CIRCUITTHE OPERATING VOLTAGE OF THE A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH IS DETECTED AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUT INTOTERMINAL ACMG OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.

(9) BATTERY SIGNAL CIRCUITVOLTAGE IS CONSTANTLY APPLIED TO TERMINAL BATT OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. WITH THEIGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE VOLTAGE FOR ENGINE CONTROL MODULE START-UP POWER SUPPLY ISAPPLIED TO TERMINAL +B OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE VIA EFI MAIN RELAY.THE CURRENT FLOWING THROUGH THE IGN FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL IGSW OF THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE.

(10) INTAKE AIR VOLUME SIGNAL CIRCUITINTAKE AIR VOLUME IS DETECTED BY THE MASS AIR FLOW METER AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINALVG OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.

(11) STOP LIGHT SW SIGNAL CIRCUITTHE STOP LIGHT SW IS USED TO DETECT WHETHER THE VEHICLE IS BRAKING OR NOT AND THE SIGNAL ISINPUT INTO TERMINAL STP OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.

(12)STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUITTO CONFIRM WHETHER THE ENGINE IS CRANKING THE VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE STARTER MOTOR DURINGCRANKING IS DETECTED AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUT IN TERMINAL STA OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE ASA CONTROL SIGNAL.

(13)ENGINE KNOCK SIGNAL CIRCUITENGINE KNOCKING IS DETECTED BY KNOCK SENSOR FRONT AND REAR SIDE AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUTTERMINALS KNK1 AND KNK2 AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Page 72: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

71

2. CONTROL SYSTEM∗ SEQUENTIAL MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM

THE SEQUENTIAL MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM MONITORS THE ENGINE CONDITION THROUGH THESIGNALS INPUT FROM EACH SENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS FROM (1) TO (13) ETC.) TO THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE. THE BEST FUEL INJECTION TIMING IS DECIDED BASED ON THIS DATA AND THE PROGRAMMEMORIZED BY THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE, AND THE CONTROL SIGNAL IS OUTPUT TO TERMINALS #10,#20, #30, #40, #50 AND #60 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE TO OPERATE THE INJECTOR (INJECT THE FUEL).THE SEQUENTIAL MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM PRODUCES CONTROLS OF FUEL INJECTIONOPERATION BY THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE IN RESPONSE TO THE DRIVING CONDITIONS.

∗ ESA SYSTEMTHE ESA SYSTEM MONITORS THE ENGINE CONDITION THROUGH THE SIGNALS INPUT TO THE ENGINECONTROL MODULE FROM EACH SENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS FROM (1), (2), (4) TO (13) ETC.). THE BEST IGNITIONTIMING IS DECIDED ACCORDING TO THIS DATA AND THE MEMORIZED DATA IN THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULEAND THE CONTROL SIGNAL IS OUTPUT TO TERMINALS IGT1, IGT2, IGT3, IGT4, IGT5 AND IGT6 THESE SIGNALSCONTROL THE IGNITER TO PROVIDE THE BEST IGNITION TIMING FOR THE DRIVING CONDITIONS.

∗ HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL SYSTEMTHE MAIN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR, SUB HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL SYSTEM TURNS THEHEATER ON WHEN THE INTAKE AIR VOLUME IS LOW (TEMP. OF EXHAUST EMISSIONS IS LOW) AND WARMS UPTHE OXYGEN SENSOR TO IMPROVE DETECTION PERFORMANCE OF THE SENSOR. THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE EVALUATES THE SIGNALS FROM EACH SENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS FROM (1), (2), (4), (9) TO (11) ETC.),AND OUTPUTS CURRENT TO TERMINALS HT1, HTS TO CONTROL THE HEATER

∗ IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEMTHE IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (STEP MOTOR TYPE) INCREASES THE ENGINE SPEED AND PROVIDES IDLINGSTABILITY FOR FAST IDLE-UP WHEN THE ENGINE IS COLD, AND WHEN THE IDLE SPEED HAS DROPPED DUE TOELECTRICAL LOAD AND SO ON. THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE EVALUATES THE SIGNALS FROM EACHSENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS FROM (1), (4), (5), (8), (9), (11) ETC.), OUTPUTS CURRENT TO TERMINALS ISC1, ISC2,ISC3 AND ISC4 TO CONTROL THE IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE.

∗ EGR CONTROL SYSTEMTHE EGR CONTROL SYSTEM DETECTS THE SIGNAL FROM EACH SENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS FROM (1), (4), (9), (10)ETC.), AND OUTPUTS CURRENT TO TERMINAL EGR TO CONTROL THE EGR VALVE.

∗ FUEL PUMP CONTROL SYSTEMTHE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OUTPUTS CURRENT TO TERMINAL FPC AND CONTROLS THE FUEL PUMP ECUAND FUEL PUMP DRIVE SPEED IN RESPONSE TO THE DRIVING CONDITIONS

3. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEMWITH THE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM, WHEN THERE IS A MALFUNCTION IN THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE SIGNALSYSTEM, THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM IS RECORDED IN THE MEMORY. THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM CAN BEFOUND BY READING THE CODE DISPLAYED BY THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP.

4. FAIL-SAFE SYSTEMWHEN A MALFUNCTION HAS OCCURRED IN ANY SYSTEM, IF THERE IS A POSSIBILITY OF ENGINE TROUBLE BEINGCAUSED BY CONTINUED CONTROL BASED ON THE SIGNALS FROM THAT SYSTEM, THE FAIL-SAFE SYSTEMEITHER CONTROLS THE SYSTEM BY USING DATA (STANDARD VALUES) RECORDED IN THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE MEMORY OR ELSE STOPS THE ENGINE.

Page 73: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

7

8

6

30AEFINO. 2

30AEFINO. 1

5 2

3 1

5 2

3 1

6

5

M

4

BI EB

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

IC211

IB15

IB14

BP16

IC210 IC212

IJ2

13

BP1

2

EA1

4

E16

1 6

B

V- W

G

B- R

B- Y

B- R

B- Y

B- W

W- B

G

W- B

B- W

B- W

GL

L-R

V-W

W-B

W-B

W-

BW

-B

LB

-W

B-

WB

-W

LL

B-R

B-

W

W-

RW

-RB

B-Y

IGNITION SW

PAR

K/N

EU

TR

AL

PO

SIT

ION

SW

(A

/T)

I19

P 2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

EFI

NO

. 2

RE

LAY

EF

I MA

INR

ELA

Y

BATTERY

FUEL PUMPECU

FUEL PUMPF14

F15

B

2 2

1 1

E 7

B-W

E 7

B-R

B- RB- R

B- R

BTO STARTERRELAY

E16 : M/TE17 : A/T

( A/T

)

B- W

I 4B

(A/T) (A/T)

2

1

IJ12

BB

-WB

-W

B

( M/T

)( M

/T)

( M/T

)

( A/T

)

( A/T

)

(A/T)

CLU

TC

H S

TAR

T S

W (

M/T

)C

9

P

N

8 5 2

E FPC FP

+B DI

AM2 IG2

ST2

7. 5AST

1K4

1J6

2

30A

AM

2

2A1

1

2

5

W-

B

72

ENGINE CONTROL (2JZ-GTE)

Page 74: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

II113

EA2

2

EA2

5

EA1

8

E12 E14 E14

I20

IJ14

IJ1

12

IJ1

9

1

2

1

2

1

2

1 1

2

1

2

1

2

A24 B76 A33 A1 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15

A21 A22 B77 B74 B35 B33 B34 B32

2 3 4 8 7 6

5 2

4 6 1 3

1

DI FPC STA ISC1 ISC3 ISC2 ISC4

B- R

B- R

B- R

B- R

B- RB- R

V- W

G

B

B- R

B- Y

B- R

B- W

B- Y

B- W

B- R

GR

B- R

B- WB- W B- O

G

V- W

B- R

B-R

B-R

B-R

B-W

B-

WB

-OB

-O

B-

Y

B-

W

GR

R-L

R-

Y

R-

G

R-

W R

R-

B

L BR R G B-Y W

B-O

G

V-

W B V

V-Y

G-O

G-W

R-G

B-

R

B-

R

B-

R

B-

R

B

#10 #20 #30 #40 #50 #60

# 60#50#40# 30#20#10IGSWBATTNSWM- REL

+B

SFI RESISTOR

INJE

CTO

R N

O.

1

S 1

I12

INJE

CTO

R N

O.

2I1

3

INJE

CTO

R N

O.

3I1

4

I NJE

CTO

R N

O.

4I1

5

I NJE

CTO

R N

O.

5I1

6

INJE

CTO

R N

O.

6I1

7

V 3

I 1

VS

V (

EV

AP

)

IDL

E A

IR C

ON

TR

OL

VA

LVE

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

AE 9 , E10B

( A/T

)

A31

E12

B-

R

+B

B75

1

V 2

VS

V (

EG

R)

B-

R

EGR

B- R

P

EVAP

(A/T)

2

7. 5AIGN

1E8

1J3

2

73

Page 75: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

2

1

2

1

E16

E11

B40 B38 B45 B66 B28 B62

3 2 5

1 2 3

1

E2 PIM VC

B- RB- R

W- B

L- RW- B

BR

BR

B- R

B- R

B-

Y

BR

Y-

R

P-L

G-R

G-B

B-R

B-R

W-B

B-Y

L-R

VSV1 VSV3 THA VG E2G PM1

2

1

B46

BR

-Y

THG

TURBO PRESSURE SENSOR

MASS AIR FLOW METERM 1

T14

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

V 4

VS

V (

EX

HA

US

TB

YP

AS

S V

ALV

E)

E 1

EG

R G

AS

TE

MP

. S

EN

SO

R

AE 9 , E10B

V 7

VS

V (

INTA

KE

AIR

CO

NT

RO

L V

ALV

E)

E10

E10

B- R

4

THA VG E2E2G

B- R

B-R

B-R

+B

B47 B72 B71 B48 B73 B60 B39

1

2

1

2

1

2

E11E13E10

E14

IJ120

IC112 IC19 IC110

IC14

IJ25 IJ214 IJ24

2 4

4

B- R

B- R

B- R

R- L

BR

B- R B- R B- R

BR

G-Y

L-W

W-LWB-

L

BR

-W

R-

LR

-L

BR

-W

R-L

BR

-W

B-R

B-R

B-R

B-

R

B-

R

B-

R

B-R

B-R

B-R

W

2 1 3

1 3

OXS HTS HT1 OX1 FPU VSV4 VSV2

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

( SH

IELD

ED

)

( SH

IELD

ED

)( S

HIE

LDE

D)

(SHIELDED)

HEATED OXYGENSENSOR (BANK 1SENSOR 2)

HE

ATE

D O

XY

GE

N S

EN

SO

R( B

AN

K 1

SE

NS

OR

1)

H11

H 5

( SH

IELD

ED

)V

SV

(F

UE

LP

RE

SS

UR

E U

P)

VS

V (

WA

STE

GA

TE V

ALV

E)

VS

V (

EX

HA

US

TG

AS

CO

NT

RO

L V

ALV

E)

V 6

V 8

V 5

1 1

B50 B49

KNK1 KNK2

WW

( SH

IELD

ED

)

KN

OC

K S

EN

SO

R( O

N R

EA

R S

IDE

)

KN

OC

K S

EN

SO

R( O

N F

RO

NT

SID

E)

K 2

( SH

IELD

ED

)

K 1

(SHIELDED)

E14

W-B

W- B

+B E

HT OX

E1

+B HT OX

74

ENGINE CONTROL (2JZ-GTE)

Page 76: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

B65

W-B

E2

2

1

2

1

E14

E16E16E16E16

E16

B24B44B63B42B41 B43 B64

B27B7B25B6B26

1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1

12 3

A

A

A

A

A

8

A

A

A

+B E1

G1 G- G2 NE- NE

L- R

W- B W- BW- BW- BW- B

L- R

B- R

B- R

BR

BR

BR

L-R Y R Y

-L

GR

-R

L-Y

OW

-B

W-

B

W-B

GR

-R

Y-L

W-BRY

TE1

VCC VTA1 IDL1 VTA2 IDL2 THW OIL

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

( SH

IELD

ED

)

( SH

IELD

ED

)

A 5

E 3

A/ T

FLU

ID T

EM

P.

SE

NS

OR

EN

GIN

E C

OO

LAN

T TE

MP

. S

EN

SO

R

D 1DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1

ENGINE CONTROL MODULEAE 9 , E10B

L-R

THROTTLE POSITIONSENSOR

T 2SUB THROTTLEPOSITION SENSOR

S 5

BR

E13

B-

R

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

J 2

BR

21

21 12

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

BR

B-W

W B-R

B-RBR

L

CAMSHAFT POSITIONSENSOR NO. 1

CAMSHAFT POSITIONSENSOR NO. 2

CRANKSHAFT POSITIONSENSOR

C 1

C 2 C 3

BR

BR

BR

(A/T

)( A

/T)

A16

II129

B-W

B-

W

TACO

TO T

AC

HO

ME

TER

[CO

MB

. M

ET

ER

]

O

I17L

A

(SHIELDED)(SHIELDED)

II1 EA1 IJ1

A34 A23 A11

A/C ACMG ABS

L-R

W-G

Y-R

Y-R

W-G

L-R

TO A

BS

EC

U

FR

OM

A/C

MA

GN

ETI

CC

LUTC

HR

ELA

Y

FR

OM

A/C

AM

PLI

FIE

R

31 2 14

A20

TE1

L

75

Page 77: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1

2

IF13

II132IJ111

A15A38 A27 A26 A14 A13 A4

B78 B57 B56 B55 B54 B53 B52 B58 A6 A2

E03 IGT1 IGT2 IGT3 IGT4 IGT5 IGT6 IGF W SP1

ELSNEO EFI+ EFI- ETC+ ETC- STP

A1 A2 A3 A9 A8 A7 B3

IGT1 IGT2 IGT3 IGT4 IGT5 IGT6 IGF

L- B

P

BR

BR

R-W

W-R LG B-R L R

R- Y

L-B P

L- R

B W Y BR

R-

YR

-Y

G-O

L-R

G-

WG

-W

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

W

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

AE 9 , E10B

DIODE(IDLE- UP)

D 8

1 3

IGNITER

2

S11

STO

P L

IGH

T S

W

AI 2 , I 3B

I 2

BR

BR

BR

I17

E16

IC18

IJ118

B69 B80 B79

E1 E01 E02

ED

I17

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

P-L

B67

P

A40

V-Y

A39G

-O

16 7 20 8 21 17 6 19

A8

SDL

G

IJ16

IJ17

(SHIELDED)

G

( SH

IELD

ED

)

(SHIELDED)

EFIF VTO1 VTO2

15 14

( SH

IELD

ED

)

( SH

IELD

ED

)

B51

W-L

9

FAIL

THROTTLE ECUT15

BR

10AMIR- HTR

10APANEL

15ASTOP

1H4 1E6 1I10

GE11 GE12 VTA2VTA1EFIFETC-ETC+FAILEFI-EFI+NE

76

ENGINE CONTROL (2JZ-GTE)

Page 78: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

I14

I 5

II12 II123 II18

II115 II111

IF1

7

3

2

13

IF

2

1 5

6 7

3

8

L- B

L- R

Y

P

BR

L- B

BR

P

L-B P BR

L-R Y R

Y

YY

Y

L-B

V10VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 1(COMBINATION METER)

TE

LLTA

LE L

IGH

T R

H

MA

LFU

NC

TIO

N I

ND

ICA

TO

R L

AM

P[T

ELL

TA

LE

LIG

HT

LH

]

T 5

T 6

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

L-B

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 2

D 5

I14

I14

A11 A10 B11

A9

L-R

YY

R

BR

Y

L- R

SP

EE

DO

ME

TE

R[C

OM

B.

ME

TE

R]B

C10

, C

12A

L-

B

BR

I 8

IC214

B-

WB

-W

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 3

D17

IE IG

I11

4

W-

B

W-

B

W-

BW

-B

ED

IJ15

5

BR

BR

2

G

I14

10AGAUGE

1E12

7. 5AOBD-

1C14

ODO ANDTRIP

E1

W

16

BAT

SG CGSDL

77

Page 79: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

78

ENGINE CONTROL (2JZ-GTE)

EFI MAIN RELAY

3- 5 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITIONEFI NO. 2 RELAY

3- 5 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITIONE3 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR

1-2 : 10-20 KΩ (-20 C, -4 F)4-7 KΩ (0 C, 32 F)2-3 KΩ (20 C, 68 F)0.9-1.3 KΩ (40 C, 104 F)0.4-0.7 KΩ (60 C, 140 F)0.2-0.4 KΩ (80 C, 176 F)

I1 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE1, 3-2 : APPROX. 10-30Ω4, 6-5 : APPROX. 10-30 Ω

I12, I13, I14, I15, I16, I17 INJECTOR1-2 : APPROX. 13.8 Ω

T2 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR1-4 : APPROX. 4-9 KΩ1-3 : 3.3-10.0 KΩ WITH THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPENED POSITION

0.2-0.8 KΩ WITH CLEARANCE BETWEEN LEVER AND STOP SCREW 0 MM (0 IN.)1-2 : 0-2.3 KΩ WITH CLEARANCE BETWEEN LEVER AND STOP SCREW 0.45 MM (0.0177 IN.)

INFINITY WITH CLEARANCE BETWEEN LEVER AND STOP SCREW 0.55 MM (0.0216 IN.)E9 (B), E10 (A) ENGINE CONTROL MODULE(VOLTAGE AT ENGINE CONTROL MODULE WIRING CONNECTORS)

BATT-E1 : ALWAYS 9-14 VOLTSIGSW-E1 : 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ONM-REL-E : 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON

+B-E1 : 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ONIDL1-E2 : 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN

0-1.5 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSEDVTA1-E2 : 0.3-0.8 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED

3.2-4.9 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE OPENTHA-E2 : 0.5-3.4 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE INTAKE AIR TEMP. 20 C (68 F)THW-E2 : 0.2-1.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE COOLANT TEMP. 80 C (176 F)STA-E1 : 6-14 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE CRANKING

W-E1 : 9-14 VOLTS WITH ENGINE IDLINGIGF-E1 : PULSE GENERATION (ENGINE IDLING)

NSW-E1 : 0-3 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE SHIFT LEVER P OR N POSITION9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE SHIFT LEVER EXCEPT P OR N POSITION

SP1 : PULSE GENERATIONTE1-E1 : 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ONA/C-E1 : 0-1.5 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE A/C OFF

7.5-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE A/C ONELS-E1 : 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE TAILLIGHT ON, DEFOGGER ON

0-1.5 VOLTS WITH THE TAILLIGHT OFF, DEFOGGER OFFSTP-E1 : 7.5-14 VOLTS WITH THE STOP LIGHT SW ON (BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED)

0-1.5 VOLTS WITH THE STOP LIGHT SW OFFISC1, ISC2, ISC3, ISC4-E1 : PULSE GENERATION (ENGINE IDLING)

#10, #20, #30, #40, #50, #60-E01, E02 : PULSE GENERATION (ENGINE IDLING)(RESISTANCE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE WIRING CONNECTORS)

IDL1-E2 : INFINITY WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE OPEN0-2.3 KΩ WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED

VTA1-E2 : 3.3 KΩ- 10.0 KΩ WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN200 Ω -800 Ω WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED

VCC-E2 : 4 KΩ -9 KΩTHA-E2 : 2 KΩ -3 KΩ WITH THE INTAKE AIR TEMP. 20 C (68 F)THW-E2 : 200 Ω -400 Ω WITH THE COOLANT TEMP. 80 C (176 F)ISC1, ISC2, ISC3, ISC4- +B : 10-30 Ω

#10, #20, #30, #40, #50, #60- +B : 13.2-14.2 Ω

SERVICE HINTS

Page 80: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

79

: PARTS LOCATIONCODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A5 24 (2JZ-GTE) H5 24 S1 25C1 24 H11 29 S5 25C2 24 I1 25 (2JZ-GTE) S11 29C3 24 (2JZ-GTE) I2 B 25 T2 25 (2JZ-GTE)C9 28 I3 A 25 T5 29

C10 A 28 I12 25 (2JZ-GTE) T6 29C12 B 28 I13 25 (2JZ-GTE) T14 25

D1 24 (2JZ-GTE) I14 25 (2JZ-GTE) T15 29D5 28 I15 25 (2JZ-GTE) V2 25 (2JZ-GTE)D8 28 I16 25 (2JZ-GTE) V3 25 (2JZ-GTE)

D17 28 I17 25 (2JZ-GTE) V4 25E1 24 (2JZ-GTE) I19 29 V5 25E3 24 (2JZ-GTE) J2 29 V6 25 (2JZ-GTE)

E9 B 29 K1 25 (2JZ-GTE) V7 25E10 A 29 K2 25 (2JZ-GTE) V8 25

F14 30 M1 25 V10 25 (2JZ-GTE)F15 30 P2 25 (2JZ-GTE)

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTORCODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1C 20 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1H1I

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1J

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K

2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESSCODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)EA1 32 (2JZ-GTE)

ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)EA2 32

ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

IB1 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IC136 FLOOR NO 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IC236 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ138 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ238 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

BP1 40 FUEL GAUGE WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LUGGAGE ROOM FRONT LH)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATIONEB 32 (2JZ-GTE) FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDERED 32 (2JZ-GTE) REAR SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLDIE

36 LEFT KICK PANELIF

36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IG 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

: SPLICE POINTSCODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E7 32 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE I2 38 COWL WIREE10 I4 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIREE11 I5

38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIREE12 I8

38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E13 32 ENGINE WIRE I11 38 COWL WIREE14

32 ENGINE WIREI14 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E16 I17 38 ENGINE WIREE17 I20 38 COWL WIRE

Page 81: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

80

ENGINE CONTROL (2JZ-GTE)

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

9X 10 11 11X X

XX3XX

X8X

XXX

1 2 3

16 X X X X X X X

X X X 5 4 X 2 X

1 2

21

X X 3 X X

X 8 X X

12 X X X X X

X

XX

X

50

X

41

X

X

X

42

62

43

63

X

24

44

64

X

25

45

65

6

26

46

66

7

27

47

67

X

28

48

X

X

49

69

X

51

71

20

40

60

80

19

39

X

79

18

38

58

78

17

X

57

77

16

X

56

76

15

35

55

75

34

54

74

33

53

73

32

52

72

20

X

40

1

11

21

31

2

22

X

13

23

33

4

14

24

34

X

15

X

6

16

26

X

X

27

X

8

38

X

X

39

4 5 X 5 6 X

1 2

X 8

21

3 4

21

3 41 2 3

4 5 6

A 5 GRAY C 1 BLACK C 2 BLACK C 3 DARK GRAY C 9

D 1 BLACK

D 5 DARK GRAY D 8 ORANGE D17 E 1 DARK GRAY

E 3 DARK GRAY

F14 DARK GRAY F15 BLACK H 5 DARK GRAY H11 GRAY I 1 BLACK

A BLUEC10 BC12

B DARK GRAYE 9 A DARK GRAYE10

Page 82: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

81

X3

1 2 3

7 8 9

1 2 1 2

X

X 6 7 8

A A A A

A A A A A A A1

54321 X5 6

1 2 3 4

X 6 7 8

1 2 3 41 2

1 2 3 4X

32

1 5 6 7

X X X1 2 3

X X 6 7 8 9 X

14 15 16 17 X 19 20 21 X1 2

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

1 21 2 3

I19

J 2 M 1 BLACK P 2 GRAY

S 1 DARK GRAY S 5 BLACK S11 BLUE T 2 BLACK T 5

T 6 T14 BLACK T15 V 2 BLACK

V 3 BROWN V 4 BLUE V 5 BLACK V 6 BLUE V 7 BLACK

V 8 BLUE V10 BLACK

I13, I15, I17 BROWNI12, I14, I16 DARK GRAY

K 1, K 2 DARK GRAY

B BLACKI 2 A BLACKI 3

(HINT : SEE PAGE 7)

Page 83: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

2 2

2 2

2 2

IE EA

2

3

2 2

11 9 12

3

1 1

4

COMBINATIONSW

BATTERY

INTE

GR

AT

ION

RE

LAY

HIG

H B

EA

MIN

DIC

ATO

R L

IGH

T[C

OM

B.

ME

TE

R]

HE

AD

LIG

HT

HI

RH

HE

AD

LIG

HT

LO

RH

HE

AD

LIG

HT

HI

LH

HE

AD

LIG

HT

LO

LH

15AHEAD (LH)

15AHEAD (RH)

C13

C12

H 2

H 4

H 1

H 3

I20

W-B

W-B

R-L

R-L

R-L

R-L

W-B

B

R

R-

L

W-B

W-B

R-

L

R-

W

R-Y

R-Y

R-

Y

R-YR R

R-Y

R

R

W- B

I 2

IB213

IF114 IB17

I 2

IB12

IF16

R-

WR

-WR

-W

R-

W

R-

W

R-

B

R-

B

R-L

E 2 : *1E18 : *2

E 9 : *1E21 : *2

E 2 : *1E18 : *2

HEADLIGHTRELAY

1K5

1J1

1

2A1

50AMAIN

1 3

2

42

13 14

LIG

HT

CO

NT

RO

LS

W

DIM

ME

RS

W

OFF

TAIL

HEAD

LOW

HIGH

FLASH

94

HEADLIGHT (USA) *2 : 2JZ- GE*1 : 2JZ- GTE

Page 84: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

95

HEADLIGHT RELAY2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION OR THE DIMMER SW AT FLASH POSITION

C13 LIGHT CONTROL SW [COMB. SW]13-11 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION

C13 LIGHT CONTROL SW [COMB. SW]14-9 : CLOSED WITH THE DIMMER SW AT FLASH POSITION12-9 : CLOSED WITH THE DIMMER SW AT HIGH OR FLASH POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C12 28H2

24 (2JZ-GTE)H4

24 (2JZ-GTE)

C13 28H2

27 (2JZ-GE)H4

27 (2JZ-GE)

H124 (2JZ-GTE)

H324 (2JZ-GTE) I20 29

H127 (2JZ-GE)

H327 (2JZ-GE)

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO.2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1J20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB136 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB236 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EA32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDEREA34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E232

E21 34 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

E932

ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE I2 38 COWL WIRE

E18 34

X32 XX

9 11 12 13 14

1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2

C12 C13 H 1 H 2

H 3 H 4 I20

BLACK BLACK BLACK

BROWN BROWN

3 4

SERVICE HINTS

Page 85: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

2

11

ENERATOR PARKINGBRAKE SW

BATTERY

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHT RELAY (MAIN)

7. 5ADOME

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

D 6

P 52

Y

Y-G

B

Y-G

BR

-W

11 8

2 15

2

R

R- Y

W

R

R-

Y

W

1

IF27

Y-G

II134

1B5

1H9

RR

CHG PKB

IG +B

1H12

10AGAUGE

2 2

1 3

2

1

2 4

50A

MA

IN

HE

AD

LIG

HT

RE

LAY

2B1

2A1

L

GG

96

HEADLIGHT (CANADA)

Page 86: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

2

1

175

3

14 13

12 9 11

4

13 1618

COMBINATIONSW

C13

R

R- W

W-B

G-W

W-B

G-W

R

R-Y

R-Y

R-Y

R- Y

R

R- Y

W

R-Y

E 7

IB210

2

1

EB

I 4

I 2

I 2

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHT RELAY (MAIN)

D 6

TO T

HE

FT

DE

TE

RR

EN

T A

ND

DO

OR

LO

CK

CO

NT

RO

L E

CU

R-Y

B-W

R- W

W-

B

IG IE

W-

B

W-

B

R-

L

W

W

R- Y

B 2

DIODE

BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL WARNINGSW

IB213

R-Y

4

4

2 4

1 3

2 2

2 2

R-L

DIMMER RELAY(DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 2)

INTEGRATIONRELAY

I20

IB2

14R- W

I 2

W-

B

W- B

1K5

1J1

OFF

TAIL

HEAD

LOW

FLASHDIM

ME

R S

WL

IGH

TC

ON

TR

OL

SW

HIGH

OIL E HI

H DRL

97

Page 87: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2

1 1

2

E 2

EA

15AHEAD(LH- UPR)

7. 5ADRL

15AHEAD(RH- UPR)

15AHEAD(RH- LWR)

15AHEAD(LH- LWR)

HEADLIGHLO RH

HEADLIGHTLO LH

H 4 H 3

R

R- W

R

R R

R-

W

R-B

R-Y

R-B

W-

B

W-

B

W-B

1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2

E 7

E 7

E 2

E 2

1

2

1

2

B1 B3

B2 B4 A1 A5

A2

A3

3

2

IB12

IF16

E 2IF114

EA EB IE

TO F

OG

LIG

HT

RE

LAY

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

R-W

R-

L

R-B

R-

LR

W-

B

IB513

W-

B

R-L

R-W

R-

WR

-W

R-

L

R-B

R-Y

R-

W

R- Y

W- B

W- B

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR LIGHT[COMB. METER]

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHT RELAY NO. 3

HEADLIGHTHI LH

HEADLIGHTHI RH

C12

H 1 H 2

R- W

R-

WR- W

BD 2 , D 3A

R-B

E 2

2

T

98

HEADLIGHT (CANADA)

Page 88: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

99

VOLTAGE IS ALWAYS APPLIED FROM THE MAIN FUSE, THROUGH THE HEADLIGHT RELAY (COIL SIDE) TOTERMINAL 5 OF THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (MAIN), TERMINAL 6 OF THE INTEGRATION RELAY,TERMINAL 14 OF THE DIMMER SW, DIMMER RELAY (DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 2) (COIL SIDE), TOTERMINAL 17 OF THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (MAIN). WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON, VOLTAGEFROM THE GAUGE FUSE IS APPLIED TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (MAIN).

1. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT OPERATIONWHEN THE ENGINE STARTS, VOLTAGE FROM TERMINAL ‘L’ OF THE GENERATOR IS APPLIED TO TERMINAL 11 OFTHE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (MAIN). IF THE PARKING BRAKE LEVER IS PULLED UP (PARKING BRAKE SWON) AT THIS TIME, THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE. WHEN THE PARKING BRAKE ISRELEASED (PARKING BRAKE SW OFF), A SIGNAL IS OUTPUT FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE PARKING BRAKE SW TOTERMINAL 8 OF THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (MAIN). THIS ACTIVATES THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTRELAY (MAIN), TURNING ON THE DIMMER RELAY (DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 2). CURRENT ALSO FLOWSFROM THE MAIN FUSE TO THE DIMMER RELAY (DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 2) (POINT SIDE) → HEAD(LH-UPR) FUSE → HEADLIGHT HI LH → HEADLIGHT HI RH → TERMINAL (A)5 OF THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTRELAY NO. 3 → TERMINAL (A)3 → GROUND, CAUSING THE HEADLIGHTS TO LIGHT UP AT APPROX. 20% OF THEIRNORMAL BRIGHTNESS.ONCE THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (MAIN) HAS BEEN ACTIVATED AND THE HEADLIGHTS LIGHT UP, THEHEADLIGHTS REMAIN ON EVEN IF THE PARKING BRAKE LEVER IS ENGAGED AGAIN (PARKING BRAKE SW ON).

2. HEADLIGHT OPERATIONWHEN THE LIGHT CONTROL SW IS AT HEAD POSITION AND THE DIMMER SW AT LOW POSITION, CURRENT FLOWSFROM THE HEADLIGHT RELAY (COIL SIDE) TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE INTEGRATION RELAY → TERMINAL 4 →TERMINAL 13 OF THE LIGHT CONTROL SW → TERMINAL 11 → GROUND, ACTIVATING THE HEADLIGHT RELAY.THIS CAUSES THE CURRENT TO FLOW FROM THE HEADLIGHT RELAY (POINT SIDE) TO THE HEAD LWR FUSE →HEADLIGHT LO → GROUND, CAUSING THE HEADLIGHTS TO LIGHT UP AT NORMAL BRIGHTNESS. SIMUTANEOUSLY,CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE DRL FUSE → DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 3 (COIL SIDE) → GROUND,ACTIVATING RELAY NO. 3.WHEN THE DIMMER SW IS AT HIGH POSITION, TERMINAL 12 OF THE DIMMER SW OUTPUTS A SIGNAL TOTERMINAL 16 OF THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (MAIN) TO ACTIVATE IT. THIS TURNS ON DIMMER RELAY(DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 2). SO CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE DIMMER RELAY (DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHT RELAY NO. 2) (POINT SIDE) TO THE HEAD (LH-UPR) FUSE → HEADLIGHT HI LH → DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTNO. 3 (POINT SIDE) → GROUND, AND FROM THE HEAD (RH-UPR) FUSE → DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 3(POINT SIDE) → HEADLIGHT HI RH → DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 3 (POINT SIDE) → GROUND, CAUSINGTHE HEADLIGHTS TO OPERATE AT HI.WHEN THE DIMMER SW IS AT FLASH POSITION, CURRENT FROM THE HEADLIGHT RELAY (COIL SIDE) FLOWS TOTERMINAL 14 OF THE DIMMER SW → TERMINAL 9 → GROUND, ACTIVATING THE RELAY. SIMULTANEOUSLY,CURRENT FROM THE HEADLIGHT RELAY (POINT SIDE) FLOWS TO HEADLIGHT LO, LIGHTING UP HEADLIGHT LOAND ACTIVATING DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY NO. 3. THEN TERMINAL 12 OF THE DIMMER SW OUTPUTS ASIGNAL TO TERMINAL 16 OF THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (MAIN), ACTIVATING THE DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHT RELAY (MAIN) SO THAT CURRNET FLOWS TO HEADLIGHT HI LIKE IT DOES FOR HIGH POSITION. THISCAUSES ALL HEADLIGHTS TO LIGHT UP.

D6 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (MAIN)15-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS

2-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH TEH IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION13-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

5-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEMDOES NOT OPERATE OR THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT OFF OR TAIL POSITION(WHEN THE CONNECTOR IS DISCONNECTED, ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS)

8-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE PARKING BRAKE LEVER RELEASED

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 89: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

100

HEADLIGHT (CANADA)

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

B2 24 (2JZ-GTE) D6 28 H4 24 (2JZ-GTE)

C12 28 G2 24 (2JZ-GTE) I20 29

C13 28 H1 24 (2JZ-GTE) P5 29

D2 A 24 H2 24 (2JZ-GTE)

D3 B 24 H3 24 (2JZ-GTE)

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

4 23 R/B NO. 4 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H

1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K( )

2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

2B 22 ENGINE ROOM MAIN AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB136 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB236 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB5 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IF136 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF236 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EA 32 (2JZ-GTE) FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER

EB 32 (2JZ-GTE) FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IG 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E232 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

I238 COWL WIRE

E732 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

I438 COWL WIRE

Page 90: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

101

X32 XX

9 11 12 13 141

X 5

2 3

X

1 2

3 4

X 2 X X 5 X X 8

X X 11 X 13 X 15 16 17 181

1 2

1 2 1 2 1 2 1

A GRAYD 2

B GRAYD 3

C12 C13

D 6 G 2 H 1

H 2 H 3 H 4 I20 P 5

GRAY BLACK BLACK

BLACK BROWN BROWN

BLACK

1 2

B 2 GRAY

3 4

Page 91: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

B 5

1

2

2

3

1

2

1

2

OFF

TAIL

HEAD

2

EB EAIE

W-L

G G G G G

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-

BW

-B

B

G-W

G

G

W- B

G

11

2

1

2

2

1

G

INTEGRATIONRELAY

LIGHT CONTROL SW[COMB. SW]

C13

BATTERY

LIC

EN

SE

PL

AT

ELI

GH

T

L 1

60A

PO

WE

R1

20A

ALT

PA

RIG

HT

FR

OD

EM

ALI

GH

T

RHLH

1

1

2

2

2A1

E 2

: 2

JZ-G

TEE

18

: 2J

Z-G

E

P13 F 6

E 2 : 2JZ- GTEE18 : 2JZ- GE

W-B

I20

2

2

W

E 2 : 2JZ- GTEE18 : 2JZ- GE

W-B

W- B

2 3

1 5 10ATAIL

1

2

1A3 1C161K11

1B

2

TAILLIGHTRELAY

DIO

DE

KIN

G L

NT

SI

RK

ER

RH LHF 8 F 5

1J1

1K5

102

TAILLIGHT

Page 92: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

B 4

B 8

B 6

B 4

B 7

B 3

BI BJ

18

IE15

1

2

1

2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

GG G

W-B

W-B

G

Y

VV

LGLG LG

W-B

W-B

W-

B

W-

B

G

W- B

W- B

W-B

5 5

1 1

L 2

RE

AR

LIG

HT

WA

RN

ING

LIG

HT

[TE

LLT

ALE

LIG

HT

RH

]

T 6

TA

[R

RE

AR

SID

EM

AR

KE

R L

IGH

T

LHR11

W- B

Y

G

B 4

B 5

W-B

W- B

W-

B

W-

B

W- B

10AGAUGE

1C2 1E12

ILLI

GH

TE

AR

CO

MB

. L

IGH

T]

RHLHR 9 R10

DE

LAY

CIR

CU

IT-+

9 11

3 8 4LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR

1

RHR12

103

Page 93: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

104

TAILL IGHT

WHEN THE LIGHT CONTROL SW IS TURNED TO TAIL OR HEAD POSITION. THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 3OF THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR THROUGH THE TAIL FUSE.WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL 8 OF THELIGHT FAILURE SENSOR, AND ALSO FLOWS THROUGH THE REAR LIGHT WARNING LIGHT TO TERMINAL 4 OF THELIGHT FAILURE SENSOR.

TAILLIGHT DISCONNECTION WARNINGWITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE LIGHT CONTROL SW TURNED TO TAIL OR HEAD POSITION, IF THE TAILLIGHTCIRCUIT IS OPEN, THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR DETECTS THE FAILURE BY THE CHANGE IN CURRENT FLOWINGFROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR TO TERMINAL 9, AND THE WARNING CIRCUIT OF THE LIGHTFAILURE SENSOR IS ACTIVATED.AS A RESULT, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR → TERMINAL 11 →GROUND AND TURNS THE REAR LIGHT WARNING LIGHT ON, WHICH REMAINS ON UNTIL THE LIGHT CONTROL SWIS TURNED OFF.

TAILLIGHT RELAY5-3 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION

L2 LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR4,8-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION

3-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION11-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C13 28 F8 26 (2JZ-GE) R9 30

F524 (2JZ-GTE) I20 29 R10 30

F526 (2JZ-GE) L1 30 R11 30

F624 (2JZ-GTE) L2 30 R12 30

F626 (2JZ-GE)

P1324 (2JZ-GTE) T6 29

F8 24 (2JZ-GTE)P13

26 (2JZ-GE)

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1A20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1B20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1C 20 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1

1J20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 94: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

105

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EA32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDEREA34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER

EB32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDEREB34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

BJ 40 LOWER BACK PANEL CENTER

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E2 32ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

B5

E18 34ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

B640 FLOOR NO 2 WIRE

B340 FLOOR NO 2 WIRE

B740 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE

B440 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE

B8

2 X

11

1 2 1 2

12

1X

5

1X

5

1 2

1 2 1

X X X 18

C13 F 5 F 6

L 1 R 9 R10 R11

R12 T 6

BLACK GRAY GRAY

GRAY GRAY

GRAY

X43X

X 8 9 X 11 X

L 2

23 1 2

F 8 GRAY I20

1 2

P13 GRAY

Page 95: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

15AHEAD(LH- LWR)(CANADA)

15AHEAD (LH)(USA) 15A

FOG

2 5

1 3

IB215

IE EB EA

1

2

1

2

2 2

2 2

2 2

9

1 2

376

2 1

G- W

G- R

BR

W-B

W-B

W-B

G-W

G-W

OO

R-

B

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

FOG LIGHTRELAY

FOG LIGHT SW[COMB. SW]

C13

FRONT FOGLIGHT RH

FRONT FOGLIGHT LH

F 3 F 4

E 2 : 2JZ- GTEE18 : 2JZ- GE

W- B

W-B

W-B

E 2 : 2JZ- GTEE18 : 2JZ- GE

E 2 : 2JZ- GTEE18 : 2JZ- GE

W-B

W-B

( CA

NA

DA

)( C

AN

AD

A)

( US

A)

OFF

FOG

LOW

1K5

1J1

106

FOG LIGHT

Page 96: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

107

FOG LIGHT RELAY(2)3-(2)5 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION, DIMMER SW AT LOW POSITION AND THE

FOG LIGHT SW ON POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C13 28 F3 26 (2JZ-GE) F4 26 (2JZ-GE)

F3 24 (2JZ-GTE) F4 24 (2JZ-GTE)

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1J20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB2 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EA32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDEREA34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER

EB32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDEREB34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E2 32 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE E18 34 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

3 X 6

7 9

B L A C K G R A Y GR A YC 1 3 F 3 F 4

1 2 1 2

SERVICE HINTS

Page 97: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

2

A3A2

A4 A1

IE BI

2

3

BATTERY

LIGHT CONTROL SW[COMB. SW]

DOOR COURTESYSW LH

7. 5ADOME

10AGAUGE

13 2

11

7

2

I20 A

INTEGRATION RELAY

C13

D10

W-B

R-B

R-

B

W-

B

B

R G

G-W

R

W-L

R-Y

W-B

R-Y

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

2

1

IB213

2

A P

OW

ER

R-Y R

IC215

1B2

1K11

TAILLIGHTRELAY

5 1

3 2

2 2

50A

MA

IN

120A

ALT

HE

AD

LIG

HT

RE

LAY

3 1

22

1 1

24

1

60

2A1

2

2

W

OFF

TAIL

HEAD

1J1

1K5

1I16

6

1B5

1

108

LIGHT AUTO TURN OFF

Page 98: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

109

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 7 OF THE INTEGRATION RELAYTHROUGH GAUGE FUSE. VOLTAGE IS APPLIED AT ALL TIMES TO TERMINAL (A) 2 OF THE INTEGRATION RELAYTHROUGH THE TAILLIGHT RELAY COIL SIDE, AND TO TERMINAL (A) 3 THROUGH THE HEADLIGHT RELAY COILSIDE.

1. NORMAL LIGHTING OPERATION<TURN TAILLIGHT ON>WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW TURNED TO TAIL POSITION, A SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL (A) 1 OF THEINTEGRATION RELAY. DUE TO THIS SIGNAL, THE CURRENT FLOWING TO TERMINAL (A) 2 OF THE RELAY FLOWS TOTERMINAL (A) 1 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE LIGHT CONTROL SW → TERMINAL 11 → TO GROUND, AND TAILLIGHTRELAY CAUSES TAILLIGHTS TO TURN ON.

<TURN HEADLIGHT ON>WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW TURNED TO HEAD POSITION, A SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINALS (A) 1 AND (A) 4OF THE INTEGRATION RELAY. DUE TO THIS SIGNAL, THE CURRENT FLOWING TO TERMINAL (A) 3 OF THE RELAYFLOWS TO TERMINAL (A) 4 → TERMINAL 13 OF THE LIGHT CONTROL SW → TERMINAL 11 → TO GROUND IN THEHEADLIGHT CIRCUIT, AND CAUSES TAILLIGHT AND HEADLIGHT RELAY TO TURN THE LIGHTS ON. THE TAILLIGHTCIRCUIT IS SAME AS ABOVE.

2. LIGHT AUTO TURN OFF OPERATIONWITH LIGHT ON AND IGNITION SW TURNED OFF (INPUT SIGNAL GOES TO TERMINAL 7 OF THE RELAY), WHEN THEDRIVER’S DOOR IS OPENED (INPUT SIGNAL GOES TO TERMINAL 6 OF THE RELAY), THE RELAY OPERATES ANDTHE CURRENT IS CUT OFF WHICH FLOWS FROM TERMINAL (A) 2 OF THE RELAY TO TERMINAL (A) 1 IN TAILLIGHTCIRCUIT AND FROM TERMINAL (A) 3 TO TERMINAL (A) 4 IN HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT.AS A RESULT, ALL LIGHTS ARE TURNED OFF AUTOMATICALLY.

HEADLIGHT RELAY2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION OR THE DIMMER SW AT FLASH POSITION (USA)

: CLOSED WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AND THE PARKING BRAKE LEVER RELEASED (CANADA)

TAILLIGHT RELAY3-5 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION

D10 DOOR COURTESY SW LH3-2 : CLOSED WITH THE LH DOOR OPEN

I20 (A) INTEGRATION RELAY7-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION6-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE LH DOOR OPEN1-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS

(A)2-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS(A)3-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS(A)4-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION(A)1-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C13 28 D10 30 I20 A 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 99: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

110

LIGHT AUTO TURN OFF

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1I

1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K( )

2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB2 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

2 X

11 13

2 3

D 10C 1 3 B LA C K AI2 0

1 2 3 4

Page 100: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

111

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LIGHT

Page 101: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

15AHAZ- HORN

5

6

51

2

2

1

I 3

I 3

I 2

B 4

IE EB BI EA BJ IH

A

A

2

4

4 4

IF112IF117

B6A

B7

IF14

IB13

WW

W

G-R

W-

R

R-B

G-B

G-Y

R-B

G-B

G-B

W-B

G-B

W-B

W-B

W-

B

W-

BW

-B

W-B

W-

B

R-B

G-B

G-Y

G-Y

G- Y

G- B

R- B

G- Y

G- B

G- Y

G- B

W-B

G-Y

G-Y

W- B

W- B

R- B

W- R

W-B

97 5 6 1 5 8

3

2 1

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

8 10

2

15

HAZARD SWH10 C13

TURN SIGNALFLASHER

FR

ON

T T

UR

N S

IGN

AL

LIG

HT

LH

F 7

FR

ON

T T

UR

N S

IGN

AL

LIG

HT

RH

F 8

RE

AR

TU

RN

SIG

NA

LLI

GH

T L

H[R

EA

R C

OM

B.

LIG

HT

LH

]

R 9

RE

AR

TU

RN

SIG

NA

LLI

GH

T R

H[R

EA

R C

OM

B.

LIG

HT

RH

]

R10

TURN SIGNALINDICATOR LIGHT[COMB. METER]

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

J 1

LH TURN RH

B L

E

E 2 : 2JZ- GTEE18 : 2JZ- GE

E 2 : 2JZ- GTEE18 : 2JZ- GE

AC10 , C12B

1

1C4

1H

11

1A

7

1E19

1C3

1H

7

1A

4

1E14

7. 5ATURN

1E7

6

TURN LH

RH

TB TL TR

TURN SIGNAL SW [COMB. SW]

HAZARD OFF

ON

F TB B2 TL B1 TR

112

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LIGHT

Page 102: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

113

TURN SIGNAL FLASHER(4) 1-GROUND : CHANGES FROM APPROX. 12 VOLTS TO 0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE TURN SIGNAL

SW LEFT OR RIGHT, OR WITH THE HAZARD WARNING SW ON.(4) 2-GROUND : 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON OR THE HAZARD SW ON(4) 3-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C10 B 28 F 7 26 (2JZ-GE) J 1 29

C12 A 28F 8

26 (2JZ-GTE) R 9 30

C13 28F 8

26 (2JZ-GE) R10 30

F 7 24 (2JZ-GTE) H10 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

4 23 R/B NO. 4 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1A 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1C 20 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB1 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EA32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDEREA34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER

EB32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDEREB34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IH 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

BJ 40 LOWER BACK PANEL CENTER

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E 2 32ENGINE ROOM WIRE

I 3 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E18 34ENGINE ROOM WIRE

B 4 40 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE

I 2 38 COWL WIRE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 103: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1

2

18

B 4

B 6

BM11

BO16

BI BJ

BO13

BM12

STEM (SEE PAGE

IE15

WG

-W

G-

WG

-W

Y

VV

R-W

R-W

R-W

W- B

W-B

W-

BW

-BG

-W

G-

WG

-W

R- W

G- W

W- B

W-B

Y

5 5

2 11 1

487

2

3 3

W- B

STOP LIGHT SWS11

REAR LIGHT WARNING LIGHT[TELLTALE LIGHT RH]

T 6

LIGHT FAILURE SENSORL 2

STOP LIGHT LH[REAR COMB. LIGHT LH]

R 9STOP LIGHT RH[REAR COMBLIGHT RH]

R10

HIGH MOUNTEDSTOP LIGHT

H14

B 4 B 6W- B

W-

BY

W-B

B10

BK

W- B

W-B

W-B

10AGAUGE

1C2

56)

1E12

15ASTOP

1I10

FROM POWER SOURCE SY

1C10

1H1

+-

HO

LDC

IRC

UIT

1

114

STOP LIGHT

Page 104: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

115

CURRENT IS APPLIED AT ALL TIMES THROUGH THE STOP FUSE TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE STOP LIGHT SW.WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON, CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE LIGHT FAILURESENSOR, AND ALSO FLOWS THROUGH THE REAR LIGHT WARNING LIGHT TO TERMINAL 4 OF THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR.

STOP LIGHT DISCONNECTION WARNINGWHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON AND THE BRAKE PEDAL IS PRESSED (STOP LIGHT SW ON), IF THE STOP LIGHT CIRCUIT IS OPEN, THE CURRENT FLOWING FROM TERMINAL 7 OF THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR TO TERMINAL 2 CHANGES, SO THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR DETECTS THE DISCONNECTION AND THE WARNING CIRCUIT OF THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR IS ACTIVATED.AS A RESULT, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR → TERMINAL 11 → GROUND AND TURNS THE REAR LIGHT WARNING LIGHT ON. BY PRESSING THE BRAKE PEDAL, THE CURRENT FLOWING TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR KEEPS THE WARNING CIRCUIT ON HOLDING AND THE WARNING LIGHT ON UNTIL THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED OFF.

S11 STOP LIGHT SW 2-1 :CLOSED WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED

L 2 LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR 2, 7 GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE STOP LIGHT SW ON

4, 8 GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION 11 GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGEH14 30 R 9 30 S11 29L 2 30 R10 30 T 6 29

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1C 20 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1H

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1I

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

BM1 40 BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT SIDE OF PACKAGE TRAY TRIM)BO1 40 BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE (BACK DOOR UPPER LEFT)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATIONBI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

BJ 40 LOWER BACK PANEL CENTER

BK 40 RIGHT SIDE OF HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTSB 4

40 FLOOR NO 2 WIREB10 40 BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE

B 640 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE

12

X42X

X 7 8 X 11 XX

3

5

X

3

5

1 2

1

X X X

H14 L 2 R 9 R10 S11

T 6

BLUE

18

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 105: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

II123

C2

II136

IE112

5

4

5

4

BI BJ

B2

A8B1

C1

A4 (A/T)

(M/T 2JZ- GTE)

(M/T 2JZ- GE)

(A/T)

(M/T 2JZ- GTE)

(M/T 2JZ- GE)

W-

B

W-

B

R-B

R-B

R-B

R-B

R-B

YY

BT

[L

IGH

T]

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

RH

B 6

R10

BACK- UP LIGHT SW[PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW](A/T)

P 2 A

BACK- UP LIGHT SW (M/T)

CB 1 , B

B 4

W-B

W-

B

10AGAUGE

1E12

LH

AC

K-U

P L

IGH

RE

AR

CO

MB

.

R 9

116

BACK -UP LIGHT

Page 106: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

117

B 1 (B), (C) BACK-U P LIGHT SW (M/T)

P 2 (A) BACK-U P LIGHT SW [PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW] (A/T)

(B), (C) 2-1, (A) 4-8 : CLOSED WITH THE SHIFT LEVER IN R POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

B 1B 24 (2JZ-GTE)

P 2 A25 (2JZ-GTE) R 9 30

B 1C 26 (2JZ-GE)

P 2 A27 (2JZ-GE) R10 30

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

BJ 40 LOWER BACK PANEL CENTER

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

B 4 40 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE B 6 40 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE

1 2

1 2 X 4

8

X

4

5

X

4

5

B G R AYB 1 C GRAYB 1 A G RAYP 2 R 9 R 10

SERVICE HINTS

Page 107: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

7. 5ARADNO. 2

10AGAUGE

7. 5ADOME

2

1

2

1

IG BI IE

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

R

R

R

R

W- G

G

W- B

R- B

LG

RRRR

R-W

R-W

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

1

3

2

2

DIO

DE

( IN

TE

RIO

R L

IGH

T)

D 7

DO

OR

CO

UR

TE

SY

SW

RH

D1

1

DO

OR

CO

UR

TE

SY

SW

LH

D1

0

1

IC2

2

W-B

W-B

R-W

R-W

LG

R- B

R- WI11

1B5 1C1 1E11 1F8 1H9

1E9 1J1 1F6 1F10 1K1

10 2

1711

INTEGRATIONRELAY

1I6

4

2

118

INTERIOR LIGHT

Page 108: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

2

1

1

B 6IE1

8

R

R

R

R

W- G

G

W- B

R- B

LG

R R R R

W-G

G

W-B

R-B LG

LG

LG

3 2

14

I18

IGN

ITIO

N K

EY

CY

LIN

DE

R L

IGH

T

P 6

OPEN DDORWARNING LIGHT[TELLTALELIGHT RH]

T 6

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENTLIGHT

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENTLIGHT SW

L 5

2

LG

L 4

18

1 PERSONAL LIGHT

119

Page 109: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

120

INTERIOR LIGHT

INTERGRATION RELAY (J/B NO. 1)1-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS4-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE RH DOOR OPEN OR THE LH DOOR OPEN

D10, D11 DOOR COURTESY SW LH, RH1-2 : CLOSED WITH THE DOOR OPEN

L 5 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT SW1-GROUND : CLOSED WITH THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPEN

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

D 7 28 I18 29 P 6 30

D10 30 L 4 30 T 6 29

D11 30 L 5 30

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1C 20 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1D 20 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1F 20 ROOF WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H

1I20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1J20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IG 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I11 38 COWL WIRE B 6 40 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 110: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1 2 3

1 2 1 21 2

1

12

3X

X X 14 X

D 7 D10 D11 I18 L 4 L 5

P 6 T 6

BLUE GRAY

8

1

2

121

Page 111: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

2

I10 I10 I 4

I10 I10 I10

1

2

1

2

3

1

2

1

IE

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

G-

W

G-O

G-O

G-O

G- OG- O G- O

W- L

W- G

W- B

G

W-

BW

-B

W-B

W-G

W-G

W-G

W-G

W-G

11

2

2

G-O

W- G W- G

60APOWER

INTEGRATIONRELAY

LIGHT CONTROL SW[COMB. SW]

C13

SEA

T H

EA

TER

SW

S 6

TR

AC

TIO

N C

ON

TR

OL

SW

T 8

1

I10

IF116

I20

I10G- O

3

5

W- G

A/T

IN

DIC

AT

OR

ILLU

MIN

AT

ION

[O/D

MA

IN S

W]

O 5

ELE

CTR

ON

ICA

LLY

CO

NT

RO

LLE

DTR

AN

SM

ISS

ION

PA

TT

ER

NS

ELE

CT

SW

E 8

A29

AS

HT

RA

YIL

LU

MIN

AT

ION

G-O

G-O

( CA

NA

DA

)

(2JZ

-GTE

)

( CA

NA

DA

)

(2JZ

-GTE

)

1

2

W- G

OFF

TAIL

HEAD

10APANEL

2 3

1 5

1B2

1K11 1I3

TAILLIGHTRELAY

1J1 1E18

1K5

122

ILLUMINATION

Page 112: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

I19 I14 I14

I12

I12

2

1

3

2

1

2

8

20

9

2

10

4

13

12

A

A

2

1

IH25

I14

IF310

IH

IH110

G- O

G- O G- O G- O G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O G- O

W- B

G- O

W- G

W- B

G-O

G-O

G-O

G-O

G-O

G-O

G-O

G-O

G-O

W-G

W-G

W-G

W-G

W-G

W-G

W-G

W-G

W-B

W-

BW

G-O

G-O

G

3

2 1

B B

W- G

(*1)

( *2)

A10

B5

B

GLO

VE

BO

X L

IGH

TG

3

HA

ZAR

D S

WH

10

CIG

AR

ETT

E L

IGH

TER

ILLU

MIN

ATI

ON

C 7

HE

ATE

R C

ON

TR

OL

SW

H12

RA

DIO

AN

D P

LAY

ER

(*2

)

RA

DIO

AN

D P

LAY

ER

(*1

)R

6

OD

O A

ND

TR

IP IL

LUM

INA

TIO

N[T

ELL

TALE

LIG

HT

RH

]

T 6

C10

ME

TER

ILL

UM

INA

TIO

N[C

OM

B.

ME

TER

]

J 1JUNCTION CONNECTOR

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

J 1

( *2)

( *1)

GLOVE BOXLIGHT SW

G 4

BR

4, R

5A

( *1)

( *1)

I14

B B B B B

ILL- T

E

RHEOSTATR 8

123

*2 : W/O STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER*1 : W/ STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER

Page 113: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

124

ILLUMINATION

TAILL IGHT RELAY5-3 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION

C13 LIGHT CONTROL SW [COMB. SW]2-1 1 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A29 28 H10 29 R 6 29

C 7 28 H12 29 R 8 29

C10 28 I20 29 S 6 29

C13 28 J 1 29 T 6 29

E 8 29 O 5 29 T 8 29

G 3 29 R 4 A 29

G 4 29 R 5 B 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1I

1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K( )

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IH138 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE BOX WIRE (UNDER THE INSTRUMENT PANEL BRACE RH)

IH238 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE BOX WIRE (UNDER THE INSTRUMENT PANEL BRACE RH)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IH 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I 4 38 COWL WIRE I1438 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

I10 38 COWL WIRE I1938 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

I12 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 114: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1 2

1 213X 12

2 X

11

1 2

1 21 2

A29 C 7 C10 C13

E 8 G 3 G 4

X 2 3 X

8

X 20

AA A A B B B

A A A A B B B B B

(HINT : SEE PAGE 7)

3

1 10 X 5

2

9 X

1 32 3 54

X 10 X X

H10 H12

I20 J 1 O 5

R 6 R 8 S 6 T 6

T 8

BLUE BLACK

BLACK ORANGE

BLUE

BLACK

BLACK

AR 4 BR 5

BLACK

BLACK

1 2

1 2 X

X X X

125

Page 115: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

IB2

7M

1 2

IB29 IB28 IB22

IE EB

6

3

8

2 3 6 5

1F 9

W 1

FRONT WIPER MOTOR

WASHER MOTOR

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

L- O L

L- W

L- R

G- W

L- O

L

L

L

L-WL

L-R

G-W

LW

-BW

-B

W-B

E 9 : 2JZ- GTEE21 : 2JZ- GE

L

W- B

G-W

L-R

L-W

20AWIPER

1H5 1A1

M

1J1

1K12

8

1

4

7

1

1

OFF

MIS

T

INT

LOW

HIG

H

WA

SH

ER

C14FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW[COMB. SW]

126

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER

Page 116: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

127

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW,TERMINAL 2 OF THE WASHER MOTOR AND TERMINAL 6 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR FROM THE WIPER FUSE.

1. LOW SPEED POSITIONWITH THE WIPER SW TURNED TO LOW POSITION, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER ANDWASHER SW TO TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL 1 → TO GROUND AND CAUSES THEWIPER MOTOR TO RUN AT LOW SPEED.

2. HIGH SPEED POSITIONWITH THE WIPER SW TURNED TO HIGH POSITION, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER ANDWASHER SW → TERMINAL 13 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR→ TERMINAL 1 → TO GROUND AND CAUSES TO THEWIPER MOTOR TO RUN AT HIGH SPEED.

3. INT POSITIONWITH THE WIPER SW TURNED TO INT POSITION, THE RELAY OPERATES AND THE CURRENT WHICH IS CONNECTED BY RELAYFUNCTION FLOWS FROM THE TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW → TERMINAL 16→ TO GROUND. THISFLOWS OF THE CURRENT OPERATES THE INTERMITTENT CIRCUIT AND THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 18 OF THEFRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW → TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL 1 → TO GROUNDAND FUNCTIONS.THE INTERMITTENT OPERATION IS CONTROLLED BY A CONDENSER’S CHARGED AND DISCHARGED FUNCTION INSTALLED INRELAY AND INTERMITTENT TIME IS CONTROLLED BY A TIME CONTROL SW TO CHARGE THE CHARGING TIME OF THECONDENSER.

4. MIST POSITIONWITH THE WIPER SW TURNED TO MIST POSITION, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER ANDWASHER SW → TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL 1 → TO GROUND AND CAUSES THEWIPER MOTOR TO RUN AT LOW SPEED.

5. WASHER CONTINUOUS OPERATIONWITH THE WASHER SW TURNED TO ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH TERMINAL 2 OF THE WASHER MOTOR → TERMINAL1→ TERMINAL 8 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW → TERMINAL 16 → TO GROUND AND CAUSES TO THE WASHER MOTORTO RUN, AND WINDOW WASHER IS JET. THIS CAUSES THE CURRENT TO FLOW WASHER CONTINUOUS OPERATION CIRCUIT INTERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW → TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR→ TERMINAL1 → TO GROUND AND FUNCTION.

C14 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW [COMB. SW]

16-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY18-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION

7-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE WIPER AND WASHER SW AT LOW POSITION: APPROX. 12 VOLTS EVERY APPROX. 1 TO 10 SECONDS INTERMITTENTLY WITH THE WIPER SW AT INT POSITION

4-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON UNLESS THE WIPER MOTOR AT STOP POSITION13-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE WIPER AND WASHER SW AT HIGH POSITIONF 9 FRONT WIPER MOTOR5-6 : CLOSED UNLESS WIPER MOTOR AT STOP POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C14 28 F 9 26 (2JZ-GE) W 2 27 (2JZ-GTE)

F 9 24 (2JZ-GTE) W 1 25 (2JZ-GTE)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1A 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB2 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 117: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

128

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EB32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDEREB34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E 9 32 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE E21 34 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

Page 118: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

129

HORN

1 3

2

2

2

2

6 1 1

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

WL

-RL-

RL-

R

2

15AHAZ- HORN

HORNRELAY

HORN SW[COMB. SW]

C13H 8 H 9HORN LH HORN RH

1

IB216

L- R

L-B

L-B

L- B

E 2 : 2JZ- GTEE18 : 2JZ- GE

2

I 2

TO T

HE

FT

DE

TE

RR

EN

T A

ND

DO

OR

LO

CK

CO

NT

RO

LE

CU

HORN RELAY(2) 2- (2) 3 : CLOSED WITH THE HORN SW ON

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C13 28 H 8 27 (2JZ-GE) H 9 27 (2JZ-GE)

H 8 24 (2JZ-GTE) H 9 24 (2JZ-GTE)

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB2 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E 2 32ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

I 2 38 COWL WIRE

E18 34ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 119: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1

50A

MA

IN

1

60A

PO

WE

R

5 2

3 1

1 3

2 4

2

2

2 2 2

IJ12

IB213

IF215

IF216 IF210 IJ213

EA1

3

1

2

IF211

1

2

5

6

ID116ID16

ID13ID113

ID15

3

I21

B 1

IE

TAIL HEAD SRLY

KSW IND UL3 L2 LSWD

3 2

10

L-O

R-Y

G-W

R-Y

L-O

B

B-W

B

L-OB

R-Y

G-W

W- L

B

Y

W-

L

G

G-Y

B

YW

-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

L-R

L-W L-

Y

W G-Y

L-W

L-Y

L- R

W- B

L- Y

G- Y

W- BW- B

G- Y

B

B

B- W

22

9

P 2

U 1

DO

OR

LO

CK

MO

TOR

AN

DD

OO

R U

NLO

CK

DE

TE

CTI

ON

SW

LHD

OO

R K

EY

LO

CK

AN

DU

NLO

CK

SW

LH

D15

D12

UNLOCKWARNINSW

T 5

TH

EFT

DE

TE

RR

EN

T I

ND

ICA

TOR

LIG

HT

[TE

LLT

ALE

LIG

HT

LH

]

PARK/NEUTRALPOSITION SW

THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECU

(A/T)

(M/T)

STA

RT

ER

RE

LAY

HE

AD

LIG

HT

RE

LA

Y

( A/T

)

(M/T)

( M/T

)

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

CLUTCHSTART SW

C 9

G-Y

BATTERY

I 4

B

( A/T

)

B 1

2

2

W

B23 B10 B25

B20 B12 B6 B22 B15

BT 7 , T13A

IB212

P

N

G

1 2

UN

LOC

K

LOC

K

M

1 4

1J1 1D10

1K12 1E18

1B2

1K11

TA

ILLI

GH

TR

EL

AY

3 2

5 1

7. 5AST

1K4

1

120A

ALT

2A

2

1

130

THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL

Page 120: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

15AHAZ- HORN

2 2 2 2

IB216

IB619

IF214

EA1

7

I 2

IF26

I21

I21

ID17 ID11 IL19 IL110 IL17 IL12 IL18 IL112

I21

I21

B 2

8

2 1

4

2 3

3

2 1

HORN SH

L1 UL1 UL12 LSWP ACT- ACT+ E

3

1 2

4

IH

IL116

IL111

W-B

L-R

L-Y

G-BWG-Y

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

G-R

R-W

G- R

R- W

G- Y

L- Y L- Y

P-B

L-R

L-R

L-R

L-RL-B

W

W

W

P- B

P- B

L- R

W

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

1

23 1

2

D16

D13

D14

P 8

L- RL- R

W- BW- B W- B W- B W

-B

L-Y

G-BWG-Y

R-W

G-R

R-W

G-R

G-

R

R-W

DO

OR

LO

CK

CO

NT

RO

L S

W L

H[P

OW

ER

WIN

DO

W M

AS

TE

R S

W]

DO

OR

LO

CK

CO

NT

RO

L S

W R

H

DO

OR

KE

Y L

OC

K A

ND

UN

LOC

K S

W R

H

DO

OR

LO

CK

MO

TOR

AN

DD

OO

R U

NLO

CK

DE

TE

CTI

ON

SW

RH

THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECU

L-Y

G-B

TO HORN SW[COMB. SW]

(*2)

(*1 M/T)

(*2)

(*1)

HORNRELAY

P-

B

P-B

( *2

)

( *1)

( *3)

L-R

THEFT DETERRENTHORN

T 1

2

1

B 2W- B

I21

L-R

L- R

II122

B24 B11

B5 B8 B16 B21 A2 A3 A4

BT 7 , T13A

I19P- B

P- B (*1 A/T)

(*2)

M

UN

LOC

K

LOC

K

LOC

K

UN

LOC

K

UN

LOC

K

LOC

K

131

*2 : 2JZ- GTE*1 : 2JZ- GE

*3 : EXCEPT 2JZ- GE M/T

Page 121: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

7. 5ADOME

2

IF23 IF39

IE18IE14IF34IC215 IB64

BI IG EA BJ

2

3

2

3

2

1

2

1 1

DSWLLUGDSWHDSWPDSWD

+B1ACCIG

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

RR

B-R

L-R

LGL

GR

R-

L

R-B

GR

R- B

LGLGR

R-L

R-B

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

1

2

THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECU

L 5L 3LUGGAGECOMPARTMLIGHT SW

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENTKEY UNLOCK SW

A7 A8 B1 A9

IF113

A6

IF312

IE

B4B9B14B19B7

PRLY

+B2

YY

W-

B

L L

L-W

L-W

BT 7 , T13A

E 6D11D10ENGINE HOODCOURTESY SW

DOOR COURTESYSW RH

DOOR COURTESYSW LH

1E11

1B5

10AECU- IG

15ACIG

1E17 1E2

30ADOOR

1H15

2

1

ENT

1I7

1J1 1D9 1J2

PO

WE

R M

AIN

RE

LAY

2 3

1 5

132

THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL

Page 122: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

133

CURRENT ALWAYS FLOWS TO TERMINAL (A) 9 OF THE THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECU THROUGH THEDOOR FUSE, AND TO TERMINAL (B) 1 THROUGH THE DOME FUSE.WHEN THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWING THROUGH THE ECU-IG FUSE ” TERMINAL (A) 7 OF THE ECU ”TERMINAL (A) 6 FLOWS THROUGH THE COIL SIDE OF THE POWER MAIN RELAY TO GROUND, CAUSING THE RELAY TO OPERATE.THE CURRENT FLOWING THROUGH THE DOOR FUSE FLOWS TO THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCHES, CAUSING THEINDICATOR LIGHT TO LIGHT UP.

1. MANUAL LOCK OPERATIONWHEN THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW OR KEY SW ARE PUSHED TO LOCK POSITION, A LOCK SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (B)5, (B) 22 (FOR KEY SW) OF THE THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECU AND CAUSES THE ECU TO FUNCTION.CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL (A) 9 OF THE ECU ” TERMINAL (A) 3 ” TERMINAL 2 (LH), TERMINAL 4 (RH) OF THE DOOR LOCKMOTORS ” TERMINAL 4 (LH), TERMINAL 2 (RH) ” TERMINAL (A) 2 OF THE ECU ” TERMINAL (A) 4 ” GROUND AND THE DOOR LOCKMOTOR CAUSES THE DOOR TO LOCK.

2. MANUAL LOCK OPERATIONWHEN THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW OR KEY SW ARE PUSHED TO UNLOCK POSITION, AN UNLOCK SIGNAL IS INPUT TOTERMINAL (B) 8, (B) 6 (FOR KEY SW LH) OR (B) 16 (FOR KEY SW RH) OF THE THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECUAND CAUSES TO FUNCTION.CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL (A) 9 OF THE ECU ” TERMINAL (A) 2 ” TERMINAL 4 (LH), TERMINAL 2 (RH) OF THE DOOR LOCKMOTORS ” TERMINAL 2 (LH), TERMINAL 4 (RH) ” TERMINAL (A) 3 OF THE ECU ” TERMINAL (A) 4 ” GROUND AND THE DOOR LOCKMOTOR CAUSES THE DOOR TO UNLOCK.WHEN UNLOCK OPERATION OCCURS USING THE LH DOOR KEY SW, DOING THE UNLOCK OPERATION ONCE UNLOCKS ONLY THEDRIVER’S DOOR. TO UNLOCK ALL OTHER DOORS TOGETHER, UNLOCK OPERATION MUST BE DONE AGAIN WITHIN 3 SECONDSOF THE FIRST OPERATION.

3. IGNITION KEY REMINDER OPERATION OPERATION OF DOOR LOCK BUTTON (OPERATION OF DOOR LOCK MOTORS)

WHEN THE IGNITION KEY IS IN THE CYLINDER (UNLOCK WARNING SW ON) AND THE DOOR IS OPENED AND LOCKED USING DOOR LOCK BUTTON (DOOR LOCK MOTOR). THE DOOR IS LOCKED ONCE BUT EACH DOOR IS UNLOCKED SOON BY THE OPERATION OF THE ECU. AS A RESULT OF ECU ACTIVATION, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL (A) 9 OF THE ECU ” TERMINAL (A) 2 ” TERMINAL 4 (LH),TERMINAL 2 (RH)OF THE DOOR LOCK MOTORS ” TERMINAL 2 (LH), TERMINAL 4 (RH) ” TERMINAL (A) 3 OF THE ECU ” TERMINAL (A) 4 ” GROUND AND CAUSES ALL THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW AND DOOR LOCK KEY SW.

KEY LESS LOCK OPERATIONWHEN THE IGNITION KEY IS STILL INSERTED IN THE CYLINDER (UNLOCK WARNING SW ON), THE DOOR IS OPEN AND UNLOCK OPERATION IS PREVENTED BY KEEPING THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON PRESSED TO THE LOCK SIDE, THE DOOR IS KEPT IN THE LOCK CONDITION. IF THE DOOR IS THEN CLOSED, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO THE ECU FROM THE DOOR COURTESY SW. THIS ACTIVATES THE ECU AND EACH DOOR IS UNLOCKED.

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Page 123: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

134

THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL

D10, D11 DOOR COURTESY SW LH, RH3-2 : CLOSED WITH THE DOOR OPEN

D12, D13 DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SW LH, RH1-3 : CLOSED WITH THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER UNLOCKED WITH KEY

2-3 : CLOSED WITH THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER LOCKED WITH KEYD15, D16 DOOR LOCK MOTOR AND DOOR UNLOCK DETECTION SW LH, RH

1-3 : CLOSED WITH UNLOCK POSITION.E 6 ENGINE HOOD COURTESY SW1-2 : CLOSED WITH THE ENGINE HOOD OPEN

U 1 UNLOCK WARNING SW2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER

L 3 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT KEY UNLOCK SW2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER UNLOCKED WITH KEY

L 5 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT SW1-GROUND : CLOSED WITH THE DOOR OPEN

T 7 (A), T13 (B) THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECU(B) 9-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR TO UNLOCK POSITION

(B) 14-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE ENGINE HOOD OPEN(B) 4-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPEN

(B) 8-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW TO UNLOCK POSITION

(B) 5-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW TO LOCK POSITION

(B) 25-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER IN N OR P POSITION AND THE IGNITION SW AT ST POSITION (A/T)

: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE CLUTCH PEDAL FULLY DEPRESSED (M/T)(A) 7-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION

(B) 20-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER(B) 15-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE LH DOOR TO UNLOCK POSITION

(B) 21-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE RH DOOR TO UNLOCK POSITION

(B) 6-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SW LH TO UNLOCK POSITION(B) 16-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SW RH TO UNLOCK POSITION

(B) 22-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SW TO LOCK POSITION(A) 4-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

(B) 1-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C 9 28 D16 30 P 8 30

D10 30E 6

24 (2JZ-GTE)T 1

25 (2JZ-GTE)

D11 30E 6

26 (2JZ-GE)T 1

27 (2JZ-GE)

D12 30 L 3 30 T 5 29

D13 30 L 5 30 T 7 A 29

D14 30P 2

25 (2JZ-GTE) T13 B 29

D15 30P 2

27 (2JZ-GE) U 1 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1D 20 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H1I

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1J

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO.2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

SERVICE HINTS

Page 124: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1 22 3 2 3 1 2 3

X 2 3 4

1 2

3 4 1 22 1 1

X5 6

1 2 XX 8 1 2

109X

C 9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

D16 E 6 L 3 L 5 P 2

P 8 BLACKT 1 T 5

109XX

T 5

U 1

BLACK GRAY GRAY

ORANGE BLACK

(2JZ- GTE) (2JZ-GE)

GRAY

1 2

3 4

D15 GRAY

X 2 3

4 X 6 7 8 9

19 20

1 X X 4 6 7 8 9 10 11

2524232221X1514X12 X

5

16

ORANGEAT 7 BT13

1 2 3

21

135

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA132 (2JZ-GTE)

ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)EA134 (2JZ-GE)

ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

IB2 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB6 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

ID1 36 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF136 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF236 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ138 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ238 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IL1 38 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EA32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDEREA34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IG36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

IH36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

BJ 40 LOWER BACK PANEL CENTER

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I 238 COWL WIRE

I21 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

I 438 COWL WIRE

B 1 40 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE

I19 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE B 2 40 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE

Page 125: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

IE

PO

WE

R W

IND

OW

MA

STE

R S

WP

8

8

4

L

L

W- B

L

L

W-B

FROM POWER SOUCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

B1 A7 A6 A9

B19 A4

THEFT DETERRENT ANDDOOR LOCK CONTROL ECU

BT 7 , T13A

KEY OFF POWER CIRCUIT

B7

IHIGBI

2

3

2

3

IF34

IF23

IC215

7. 5ADOME

2

IF1

13

IF3

12Y

L- W

RR

B-R

R-

BR

-B

R-B

W-B

W-B

R-L

R-L

W-B

Y

L-W

DO

OR

CO

UR

TE

SY

SW

LH

DO

OR

CO

UR

TE

SY

SW

RH

D10

D11

2

1

10AECU- IG

1E17

1B5

1E11

30ADOOR

2

1

1H15

1J21D91D101J1

2 3

1I7

POWERMAINRELAY

1 5

136

POWER WINDOW

Page 126: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

M2 1

M2 1

1 3

4

IL14 IL117 IL13

ID114 ID115

9 10 5 7

PO

WE

R W

IND

OW

CO

NTR

OL

SW

RH

POWER WINDOW MOTOR RHPOWER WINDOW MOTOR LH

P 7

P 8

R-L

G-W L

R-W

G-Y

R-L

G-W L

R-

L

G-W L

G-

Y

R

L

P 9 P10

IF35

LOCK

NORMAL

UP

DO

WN

UP

DO

WN

AU

TO

PASSENGER’ SDRIVER’ S

POWER WINDOW MASTER SW

S

RQ

-+

+-

DO

WN

UP

2 5

UP

DO

WN

137

Page 127: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

138

POWER WINDOW

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH THE ECU-IG FUSE TO TERMINAL (A)7OF THE THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECU TERMINAL (A)6 TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWERMAIN RELAY TERMINAL 2 GROUND, THIS ACTIVATES THE RELAY AND THE CURRENT FLOWING TOTERMINAL 5 OF THE RELAY FROM DOOR FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE RELAY TERMINAL 4 OF THEPOWER WINDOW MASTER SW AND TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL SW RH.

1. MANUAL OPERATION (DRIVER’S WINDOW)WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND WITH THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW (DRIVER’S) AT UP POSITION,THE CURRENT FLOWING TO TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW FLOWS TO TERMINAL 10 OFTHE MASTER SW TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR TERMINAL 2 TERMINAL 9 OF THEMASTER SW TERMINAL 8 GROUND AND CAUSES THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR TO ROTATE IN THE UPDIRECTION. THE WINDOW ASCENDS ONLY WHILE THE SW IS BEING PUSHED.IN DOWN OPERATION, THE FLOW OF CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW TOTERMINAL 9 OF THE MASTER SW CAUSES THE FLOW OF CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 2 OF THE POWERWINDOW MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 10 OF THE MASTER SW TERMINAL 8 GROUND, FLOWING INTHE OPPOSITE DIRECTION TO MANUAL UP OPERATION AND CAUSING THE MOTOR TO ROTATE IN REVERSE,LOWERING THE WINDOW.

2. DRIVER’S WINDOW AUTO DOWN OPERATIONWHEN THE DRIVER’S WINDOW SW IS PUSHED STRONGLY ON THE DOWN SIDE, THE CURRENT FLOWING TOTERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW FLOWS TO THE DOWN CONTACT POINT AND AUTO DOWNCONTACT POINT OF THE DRIVER’S SW.THIS ACTIVATES THE RELAY (DOWN SIDE) INSIDE THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW, AND THE HOLD CIRCUITALSO TURNS ON AT THE SAME TIME, SO THE RELAY (DOWN SIDE) REMAINS ACTIVATED EVEN WHEN THE SW ISRELEASED.CURRENT FLOWS AT THIS TIME FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW TERMINAL 9 TERMINAL 2 OF POWER WINDOW MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 10 OF POWER WINDOW MASTER SW TERMINAL 8 GROUND, SO THE MOTOR CONTINUES TO OPERATE UNTIL THE DRIVER’S WINDOW IS FULLYDOWN.WHEN THE DRIVER’S WINDOW FINISHES DOWN OPERATION THE HOLD CIRCUIT GOES OFF, SO THE RELAY(DOWN SIDE)) ALSO TURNS OFF. THIS STOPS THE CURRENT FLOWING FROM FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THEPOWER WINDOW MASTER SW TO TERMINAL 9, SO THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR STOPS AND AUTO DOWNOPERATION STOPS.WHEN THE DRIVER’S SW IS PULLED ON THE UP SIDE DURING AUTO DOWN OPERATION, THE HOLD CIRCUIT ISTURNED OFF SO CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW TO TERMINAL 9IS CUT OFF AND THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR STOPS. IF THE SW REMAINS PULLED UP, THE RELAY (UPSIDE)IS ACTIVATED, SO CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW TERMINAL 10 TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR TERMINAL 2 TERMINAL 9 TERMINAL 8 GROUND, THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR ROTATES IN THE UP DIRECTION AND MANUAL UP OPERATION OCCURS WHILETHE SW IS PULLED UP.

3. MANUAL OPERATION BY POWER WINDOW SW (FRONT RH WINDOW)WITH POWER WINDOW SW (FRONT RH) PULLED TO THE UP SIDE, CURRENT FLOWING FROM TERMINAL 4 OFTHE POWER WINDOW CONTROL SW FLOWS TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWER WINDOW SW TERMINAL 2 OFTHE POWER WINDOW MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 3 OF THE POWER WINDOW SW TERMINAL 5 TERMINAL 7 OF THE MASTER SW TERMINAL 8 GROUND AND CAUSES THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR(FRONT RH) TO ROTATE IN THE UP DIRECTION. UP OPERATION CONTINUES ONLY WHILE THE POWER WINDOWSW IS PULLED TO THE UP SIDE. WHEN THE POWER WINDOW SW (FRONT RH) IS PULLED TO THE DOWN SIDE,THE CURRENT FLOWING TO THE MOTOR FLOWS IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION, FROM TERMINAL 1 TOTERMINAL 2, AND THE MOTOR ROTATES IN REVERSE. WHEN THE WINDOW LOCK SW IS PUSHED TO THE LOCKSIDE, THE GROUND CIRCUIT TO THE PASSENGER’S WINDOW BECOMES OPEN.

AS A RESULT, EVEN IF OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER’S WINDOW IS TRIED, THE CURRENTFROM TERMINAL 8 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW IS NOT GROUNDED AND THE MOTOR DOES NOTROTATE, SO THE PASSENGER’S WINDOW CANNOT BE OPERATED AND WINDOW LOCK OCCURS.FURTHERMORE, REAR LH, RH WINDOW OPERATE THE SAME AS THE ABOVE CIRCUIT.

4. KEY OFF POWER WINDOW OPERATIONWITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED FROM ON TO OFF, THE THEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECUAND CURRENT FLOWS FROM DOOR FUSE TERMINAL (A) 9 OF THE ECU OR DOME FUSE TO TERMINAL (B)1 OFTHE ECU TERMINAL (A) 6 TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWER RELAY TERMINAL 2 GROUND FOR ABOUT 60SECONDS. THE SAME AS NORMAL OPERATION, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM DOOR FUSE TERMINAL 5 OFTHE POWER MAIN RELAY TERMINAL 3 TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW, AND TERMINAL4 OF THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL SW RH. AS A RESULT, FOR ABOUT 60 SECONDS AFTER THE IGNITION SWIS TURNED. THE FUNCTIONING OF THIS RELAY MAKES IT POSSIBLE TO RAISE AND LOWER THE POWERWINDOW ALSO, BY OPENING THE FRONT DOOR (DOOR OPEN DETECTION SW ON ED) WITHIN ABOUT 60SECONDS AFTER TURNING THE IGNITION SW TO OFF, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (B) 19, (B) 7 OF THETHEFT DETERRENT AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ECU. AS A RESULT, THE ECU TURNED OFF AND UP AND DOWNMOVEMENT OF THE POWER WINDOW STOPS.

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Page 128: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

139

P 8 POWER WINDOW MASTER SW 4-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION 8-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY10-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND MASTER SW (DRIVER’S WINDOW) AT UP POSITION 9-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND MASTER SW (DRIVER’S WINDOW) AT DOWN OR

AUTO DOWN POSITION

WINDOW LOCK SWOPEN WITH THE WINDOW LOCK SW AT LOCK POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGED10 30 P 8 25 T 7 A 29D11 30 P 9 27 T13 B 29P 7 30 P10 27

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1D 20 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1H1I 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1J

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)ID1 36 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)IF2 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)IL1 38 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATIONIE 36 LEFT KICK PANELIG

36 RIGHT KICK PANELIH

36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

1 2 3 4 55

X 4X 7 8 9 10 1 2

1 2

P 7 P 8 P 9

P10 GRAY

GRAY

2 3 2 3

D10 D11

X

4 X 6 7 9

19

1 X X 7

XX X

A ORANGET 7 B ORANGET13

SERVICE HINTS

Page 129: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

30AEFINO. 1

5

2 5

1 3

E16

E 7 EA2

2

EA1

8

EA1

4

EA2

5

IJ213II113

IB14

2

2 2

2 2

EB

B- R

B- O

B

B- W

GR

B- Y

B- R

B- W

B- Y

B- R

B- R

B-O B

B-Y

B-W

W-

RW

-RB

W-

B

B-

WB

-W

B-W

B

B-

RB

-R

W-B B-

R

B-O

IGNITION SWI19

BATTERY

PA

RK

/NE

UT

RA

LP

OS

ITIO

N S

W

P 2

2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

EFI MAINRELAY

1

E 7

B-W

6

8

B- W

B- R

7 AM2 IG2

ST2

7. 5AST

7. 5AIGN

1K41E8

1J61J3

P

N

6

30AAM2

2A

2

2

1

1

140

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION

Page 130: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

E16

E16

E16

E17

A24 A33 A31 B13 B10 B9 B14 B12 B31 B23 B3

B76 B77 A1 B66 B45 B28 B62 B41 B43 B64

1

2

B- R

B- Y

GR

B- W

B

B- O

B- R

W- B

L- R

B- R

W- B

L- R

W- B

B- RG

R

B-Y

B-

R

Y-G

W-

R

R-

L

LG-B

LG-

R

W-

G

R G

B-Y

L-R

W-B

L-R Y

W-B RBR

P-L

Y-R

B-

W B

B-O

Y-R

P-L BR

B-Y

L-R Y R

B-

R

6 4 8 7 5 1

1

2 3 5 4 2 3 1 1 2 4 3

2 3

NSW STA IGSW VG THA E2G PM1 VCC VTA1 IDL1

M- REL BATT +B SLN- S1 S2 SLU- SLT- SLT+

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLEDTRANSMISSION SOLENOID

E 2

SP2+ SP2-

VE

HIC

LE S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

NO

. 2

( EL

EC

TR

ON

ICA

LLY

CO

NTR

OLL

ED

TR

AN

SM

ISS

ION

)

V11

T14

T 2

TURBO PRESSURESENSOR

THROTTLE POSITIONSENSORMASS AIR FLOW METER

M 1

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

AE 9 , E10B

E10B- R

VG THA E2G

+B

E2B-R

PIM VC E2

E13

B-

RS

LN

NO

. 1

NO

. 2

SLU

SL

T

RL W B BR G O

Y

SLN- S1 S2 SLU- SLT- SLT+

SLN+ SLU+

141

AND A/T INDICATOR (2JZ-GTE)

Page 131: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1

2

1

2

2

1

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

1

E16E16E16

IE

IJ111

IJ212IJ23

B21 B1 A4A20

B42 B63 B44 B24 B46 A3 A18 B27 B7

3

12 8

4 3 1 2

4

VTA2 IDL2 THW OIL THG KD M NE NE-

W- BW- BW- B

L- R

B- R

L-Y

O

BR

-Y

GR

-R

Y-L

W-

B

W-

B

W-

B

GR

-R

W-B

Y-L

L-R

W-B

W-

B

W-B

G-Y

B-R BR

G-YY

Y-

L

G-

W

YL

G-

WW

B-R

Y-L

( SH

IELD

ED

)

(SHIELDED)

NCO+ NCO- STPTE1

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

STOP LIGHTSW

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 1

O/D

DIR

EC

T C

LU

TCH

SP

EE

D S

EN

SO

R

S11

D 1

O 1

Y

S 5SUB THROTTLEPOSITION SENSOR

EN

GIN

E C

OO

LAN

T T

EM

P.

SE

NS

OR

A/T

FLU

ID T

EM

P.

SE

NS

OR

EG

R G

AS

TE

MP

. S

EN

SO

R

KIC

K D

OW

N S

W

E 3

A 5

E 1

K 4

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLEDTRANSMISSION PATTERNSELECT SW

CR

AN

KS

HA

FT

PO

SIT

ION

SE

NS

OR

E 8

C 3

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

AE 9 , E10B

E14W- B

W-B

B65

E2

15ASTOP

1I10

TE1+B

NO

RM

AL

MA

NU

AL

1J1

1H13

142

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION

Page 132: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

I14

I17

ED

II15 II138 II111

A9 A10

B69 B80 B79 A28 A25 A2

A

6 5

A

1

V

W- L

L- R

G- B

L- Y

Y

P

W-LVBR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

P

W-

L

V

P L-R

YY

Y

G-

B

L-Y

( SH

IELD

ED

)

MIOD2EO2EO1E1

2 L

JUN

CTI

ON

CO

NN

EC

TOR

J 2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

ODO ANDTRIP

TELL

TALE

LIG

HT

RH

T 6

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

AE 9 , E10B

E28BR BR

IJ211

LG-B

LG

-B

FROM CRUISE CONTROLECU

A12

OD1IJ27

G- R

G-R

2

CR

UIS

E C

ON

TR

OL

EC

UC

16

SP1

G-

R

B78

E03

BR

BR

D

10AGAUGE

1E12

143

AND A/T INDICATOR (2JZ-GTE)

Page 133: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

A

7 8 10 9 2 3

4

I18

I21

I14

I17

E16

E16

I17

I14 I14

E14

II17 II136 II11 II118 II117 II127

IF31

II12II18

II123

4

2

IE IH

SP

EE

D

B9 A1 A4 A10 A6 A7 A8 A11

B11 B10 A12 A2 A13

32

1

A

R- B

LG- R

G- B

G- R

Y

R- B

LG- R

G- B

G- R

L- R

W- L

V V

V

V

L- R

YY

W-

B

W-

B

VV

W-B

V

W-

B

W-

L

R

L-R

R

L-RR

Y

G-B

L-Y

G-

R

L

R-B

G-

W

G-B

LG-

R

G-

R

L

R-BGR

YY

YY

GR

R-

B

L

G-

R

LG-

R

G-B

YY

Y Y

A/T INDICATOR LIGHT SW[PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW]

P 2V

EH

ICLE

SP

EE

D S

EN

SO

R N

O. 1

( CO

MB

INA

TIO

N M

ETE

R)

V10

O/D MAINSW

O 5

J 1

O/D

OFF

MA

NU

P R N D 2 L

COMBINATION METER

AC10 , C11 , C12B

Y

IF

C11

BR

BR

C

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

9

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 2

D 5

ECT

P R N D 2 L

144

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION

Page 134: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

145

AND A/T INDICATOR (2JZ-GTE)

THIS SYSTEM ELECTRICALLY CONTROLS THE LINE PRESSURE, THROTTLE PRESSURE, LOCK-UP PRESSURE ANDACCUMULATOR PRESSURE ETC. THROUGH THE SOLENOID VALVE. THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLEDTRANSMISSION IS A SYSTEM WHICH PRECISELY CONTROLS GEAR SHIFT TIMING AND LOCK-UP TIMING INRESPONSE TO THE VEHICLE’S DRIVING CONDITIONS AND THE ENGINE OPERATING CONDITIONS DETECTED BYVARIOUS SENSORS, MAKING SMOOTH DRIVING POSSIBLE BY SHIFT SELECTION FOR EACH GEAR WHICH IS THEMOST APPROPRIATE TO THE DRIVING CONDITIONS AT THAT TIME, AND CONTROLS THE ENGINE TORQUE DURINGSHIFTING TO ACHIEVE OPTIMUM SHIFT FEELING.

1. GEAR SHIFT OPERATIONWHEN DRIVING, THE ENGINE WARM UP CONDITION IS INPUT AS A SIGNAL TO TERMINAL (B) 44 OF THE ENGINECONTROL MODULE FROM THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR AND THE VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL FROMVEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 2 IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (B) 23 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. AT THE SAMETIME, THE THROTTLE VALVE OPENING SIGNAL FROM THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (MAIN) IS INPUT TOTERMINAL (B) 43 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE AS THROTTLE ANGLE SIGNAL.BASED ON THESE SIGNALS, THE ENGINE CONTROL SELECTS THE BEST SHIFT POSITION FOR DRIVINGCONDITIONS AND SENDS CURRENT TO THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOIDS.WHEN SHIFTING TO 1ST SPEED, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL (B) 10 OF THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE → TERMINAL 4 OF ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID→GROUND ANDCONTINUITY TO NO. 1 SOLENOID CAUSES THE SHIFT (NO. 2 SOLENOID DOES NOT HAVE CONTINUITY AT THISTIME.)FOR 2ND SPEED, THE CURRENT FLOWS SIMULTANEOUSLY FROM TERMINAL (B) 9 OF THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE → TERMINAL 8 OF ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID → GROUND AND FROMTERMINAL (B) 10 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE → TERMINAL 4 OF ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLEDTRANSMISSION SOLENOID→ GROUND, AND CONTINUITY TO NO. 1 AND NO. 2 SOLENOIDS CAUSES THE SHIFT.FOR 3RD SPEED, THERE IS NO CONTINUITY TO NO. 1 SOLENOID, ONLY TO NO. 2 SOLENOID, CAUSING THE SHIFT.SHIFTING INTO THE 4TH SPEED (OVERDRIVE) OCCURS WHEN NO CURRENT FLOWS TO NO. 1 AND NO. 2SOLENOIDS. THE NO. 4 SOLENOID (FOR ACCUMULATOR BACK PRESSURE MODULATION) IS INSTALLED TOADJUST THE BACK PRESSURE ON THE ACCUMULATOR AND CONTROLS THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE DURINGSHIFTING AND LOCK-UP IN ORDER TO PROVIDE SMOOTH SHIFTING WITH LITTLE SHIFT SHOCK.

2. LOCK-UP OPERATIONWHEN THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE DECIDES BASED ON EACH SIGNAL THAT THE LOCK-UP CONDITION HASBEEN MET, THE CURRENT THROUGH EFI NO. 1 FUSE FLOWS FROM THE EFI MAIN RELAY → TERMINAL 3 OFELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID → TERMINAL 7→ TERMINAL (B) 14 OF THE ENGINECONTROL MODULE → GROUND,SO CONTINUITY TO NO. 3 (FOR LOCK-UP) CAUSES LOCK-UP.

3. STOP LIGHT SW CIRCUITIF THE BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED (STOP LIGHT SW ON) WHEN DRIVING IN LOCK-UP CONDITION, A SIGNAL ISINPUT TO TERMINAL(A) 4 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OPERATES ANDCUTS THE CURRENT TO THE SOLENOID.TO RELEASE LOCK-UP.

4. OVERDRIVE CIRCUIT∗ O/D MAIN SW ON

WHEN THE O/D MAIN SW IS TURNED ON (SW POINT IS OPEN), A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (A) 28 OF THEENGINE CONTROL MODULE, AND THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION CAUSES SHIFT TOOVERDRIVE WHEN THE CONDITIONS FOR OVERDRIVE ARE MET.

∗ O/D MAIN SW OFFWHEN THE O/D MAIN SW IS TURNED OFF (SW POINT IS CLOSED), THE CURRENT FLOWING THROUGH THE O/DOFF INDICATOR LIGHT FLOWS TO GROUND BY WAY OF THE O/D MAIN SW AND CAUSES THE O/D OFF INDICATORLIGHT TO LIGHT UP. AT THE SAME TIME, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (A) 28 OF THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE AND THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PREVENTS SHIFT INTO OVERDRIVE.

5. ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW CIRCUITWHEN THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW IS SWITCHED FROM NORMALTO MANUAL, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (A) 18 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. INPUT OF THIS SIGNALCAUSES CURRENT TO FLOW FROM THE GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL (A) 1 OF THE COMBINATION METER →TERMINAL (A) 12→ TERMINAL (A) 25 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE → GROUND, LIGHTING UP THEINDICATOR LIGHT. IF THE A/T SHIFT LEVER IS THEN SHIFTED TO “ 2‘’ POSITION, THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULEENABLES THE VEHICLE TO START OFF WITH THE TRANSMISSION IS 2ND GEAR, THUS PERMITTING EASINGSTARTING OFF AND DRIVING ON SLIPPERY ROADS.

6. CRUISE CONTROLWHEN CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION IS SELECTED A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (A) 12 OF THE ENGINECONTROL MODULE FROM CRUISE CONTREOL ECU. AS A RESULT, THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OPERATESAND CONTROLS OVERDRIVE, LOCK-UP AND SO ON FOR SMOOTH DRIVING.

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Page 135: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

146

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION

E2 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID8-GROUND:APPROX. 13.2:4-GROUND:APPROX. 13.2: 6.2:APPROX. 8.3 : 7.3:APPROX. 3.8 : 1.5:APPROX. 3.8 :

E 3 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR1-2:1- 10-20 K 20 C 4 F 4-7 K 0 C 32 F 2-3 K 20 C 68 F 0.9-1.3 K - 40 C - 104 F 0.4-0.7 K - 60 C 140 F 0.2-0.4 K - 80 C 176 F

E 9 (B), E10 (A) ENGINE CONTROL MODULEBATT-E1:ALWAYS 9-14 VOLTSIGSW-E1: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON +B-E:9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON IDL1-E1:0-1.5 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN VTA1-E1: 0.3-0.8 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED 3.2-4.9 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN STA-E1: 6-14 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE CRANKINGM-REL-E1: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON VCC-E1:4.5-5.5 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON L-E1:APPROX. 7.5-14 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT “L” POSITION 2-E1:APPROX. 7.5-14 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT “ 2” POSITION R-E1:APPROX. 7.5-14 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT “R” POSITION

0 1 O/D DIRECT CLUTCH SPEED SENSOR1-2:APPROX. 620 :

V11 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 2 (ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISION)1-2:APPROX. 620 :

E 8 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW4-3:CLOSED WITH ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW AT MANUAL POSITION

: PARTS LOCATIONCODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A 5 24(2JZ-GTE) E 3 24(2JZ-GTE) 0 5 29C 3 24(2JZ-GTE) E 8 29 P2 25(2JZ-GTE)

C10 B 28 E 9 B 29 S 5 25C11 A 28 E10 A 29 S11 29C12 C 28 I19 29 T 2 25(2JZ-GTE)

C16 28 J 1 29 T 6 29D 1 24(2JZ-GTE) J 2 29 T14 25D 5 28 K 4 29 V10 25(2JZ-GTE)E 1 24(2JZ-GTE) M 1 25 V11 25(2JZ-GTE)E 2 24(2JZ-GTE) 0 1 25

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)IE 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H1I

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1J

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

SERVICE HINTS

Page 136: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

147

AND A/T INDICATOR (2JZ-GTE)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA1 32(2JZ-GTE)ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)

EA2 32ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

IB1 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ138 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ238 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATIONEB 32(2JZ-GTE) FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

ED 32(2JZ-GTE) REAR SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLD

IE36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IF36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IH 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E 7 32 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE E17 32 ENGINE WIRE

E10 I14 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E1332 ENGINE WIRE

I17 38 ENGINE WIRE

E1432 ENGINE WIRE

I18 38 COWL WIRE

E16 I21 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

1 2 1 2 9X 10 11 13X876X421 10 11 12

11X X 2 X X X

X

X X

X 8 X X

12 X X X X

XXXX

X9

XX1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

3 4

21

B BLUEC10 A BROWNC11A 5 C 3

CC12 C16 D 1

D 5 E 1 E 2 E 3 E 8

GRAY DARK GRAY

GREEN BLACK

DARK GRAY DARK GRAY GRAY DARK GRAY

X

X

X

X

X X X X

X X

X

X

X

1 2

X

Page 137: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

148

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION AND A/TINDICATOR (2JZ-GTE)

10

X

X

1

21

41

X

X

X

42

62

3

23

43

63

X

24

44

64

45

65

46

66

7

27

X

X

28

X

9

X

69

X

31

X

80

X

7978

X

77

X

76

141312

20

X

X

1

31

2

X

3

33

4

24

X

25

X X

7

X

X

X

18

28

9

X

X

X

AA A A

A A A A

A A A A

A A A A A A A

54321 2

4

X

75 6

2 3 4

8 9 10

1 2 3 4

1 21 2 3 4 1 5 6

X X X

1 2 3

B DARK GRAYE 9 A DARK GRAYE10

I19 J 1 J 2 K 4

M 1 O 1 O 5 P 2 S 5

S11 T 2 T 6V10

V11

BLACK

BLACK BLACK BLUE GRAY BLACK

BLUE BLACKBLACK

BLACK

10

(HINT : SEE PAGE 7) (HINT : SEE PAGE 7)

12

1 2 3

T14 BLACK

1 2

1 2

1 2

6 7 8X

X

Page 138: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

149

MEMO

Page 139: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

30AEFINO. 1

6

5

2 5

1 3

I17EA3

3

EA1

8

EA1

4

IJ213II113IB14

2

2 2

2 2

EB

B- O

B

B- W

B- Y

B- W

B- R

B- W

B- Y

B- R

B-O B

B-Y

B-

W

W-R

W-R

B

W-

B

B-

WB

-W

B-W

B

B-

R

W-B B-RB

-O

IGNITION SWI19

PA

RK

/NE

UT

RA

LP

OS

ITIO

N S

W

P 2

2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

EFI MAINRELAY

E20

B-W

1

6

8

B- W

B- R

7. 5AST

7. 5AIGN

1K41E8

1J61J3

BATTERY

P

N

7 AM2 IG2

ST2

30AAM2

2A

2

1

2

1

150

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION

Page 140: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

E26

E26

A24 A33 A31 B10 B9 B8 B23 B3

B76 B77 A1 B66 B45 B43 B64

1

2

B- R

B- W

B- Y

B- W

B

B- O

W- B

B- R

W- B

B- R

B-Y

B-

W

B-

R

W-

R

R-

L

B-

R

R G

L-R Y

W-B RBR

G-B

Y-R

B-

W B

B-O

Y-R

G-B Y R

B-R

2 3 5 4 3 1 2

NSW STA IGSW VG THA VTA1 IDL1

M- REL BATT +B S1 S2 SL

EL

EC

TR

ON

ICA

LLY

CO

NT

RO

LLE

DT

RA

NS

MIS

SIO

N S

OL

EN

OID

E 2

SP2+ SP2-

VE

HIC

LE S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

NO

. 2( E

LEC

TR

ON

ICA

LLY

CO

NT

RO

LLE

D T

RA

NS

MIS

SIO

N)

V11

T 2THROTTLE POSITIONSENSOR

MA

SS

AIR

FLO

W M

ETE

RM

1

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

AE 9 , E10B

4

E26

B28

EVG

VG THA E2G

E2

B41VC

E23

+B

1

BR

B-R

B- R W- B

B- R

L-R

1

2

B44

THW

L-Y

W-BEN

GIN

E C

OO

LAN

T T

EM

P.

SE

NS

OR

E 3

1 2 3

NO

. 1

NO

. 2

SLN

W B Y

151

AND A/T INDICATOR (2JZ-GE)

Page 141: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1

2

1

2

2

1

1

2

E28E28

IE

IJ111

IJ212IJ23

A4A20

B24 B46 A3 A18 B25 B7

3

12 8

4

OIL THG KD M G2 G-

W- BW- B

B- RO

BR

-YW

-B

W-B

W-B

W-

B

W-B

G-Y

W G

G-YY

G-

WG

-W

W

B-

R

Y-

L

( SH

IELD

ED

)

(SHIELDED)

STPTE1

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

STOP LIGHTSW

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 1

S11

D 1

Y

A/T

FLU

ID T

EM

P.

SE

NS

OR

EG

R G

AS

TE

MP

. S

EN

SO

R

KIC

K D

OW

N S

W

A 5

E 1

K 4

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLEDTRANSMISSION PATTERNSELECT SW

E 8

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

AE 9 , E10B

B26

G1

R

B27

NE

B

1 2 3 4

DISTRIBUTORD 4

BR

A32

PS

1

2

BR

-WB

R

PO

WE

R S

TE

ER

ING

PR

ES

SU

RE

SW

P 3

B65

W-B

E2

1J1

1H13

NO

RM

AL

MA

NU

AL

NE G1 G2 G-

TE1+B

15ASTOP

1I10

152

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION

Page 142: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

I14

I17

ED

II15 II138 II111

A9 A10

B69 B80 B79 A28 A25 A2

A

6 5

A

1

V

W- L

L- R

G- B

L- Y

Y

P

W-LVBR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

P

W-

L

V

P L-R

YY

Y

G-

B

L-Y

( SH

IELD

ED

)

MIOD2EO2EO1E1

2 L

JUN

CTI

ON

CO

NN

EC

TOR

J 2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

ODO ANDTRIP

TELL

TALE

LIG

HT

RH

T 6

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

AE 9 , E10B

E28BR BR

IJ211

LG-B

LG

-B

FROM CRUISE CONTROLECU

A12

OD1IJ27

G- R

G-R

2

CR

UIS

E C

ON

TR

OL

EC

UC

16

SP1

G-

R

B78

E03

BR

BR

10AGAUGE

1E12

D

153

AND A/T INDICATOR (2JZ-GE)

Page 143: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

7 8 10 9 2 3

4

I21

I14

I17

E28

I14 I14

E28

II17 II136 II11 II118 II117 II127

IF31

II12II18

II123

4

2

IE IH

SP

EE

D

B9 A1 A4 A10 A6 A7 A8 A11

B11 B10 A12 A2 A13

A

32

1

A

L- Y

G- R

Y

L- Y

G- R

L- R

W- L

V

V

V

L- R

YY

W-

B

W-

B

V

W-

B

V

W-

BW-LR

L-RR

L-RR

Y

G-

B

L-Y

G-RL

R-B

G-W

G-B

L-Y

G-RL

R-B

G-W

YY

YY

G-

W

R-

B

L

G-

R

L-Y

G-B

YY

Y Y

A/T INDICATOR LIGHT SW[PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW]

P 2

VE

HIC

LE S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

NO

. 1

( CO

MB

INA

TIO

N M

ET

ER

)

V10

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

O/D MAINSW

O 5

J 1

O/D

OFF

MA

NU

P R N D 2 L

COMBINATION METER

AC10 , C11 , C12B

IF

C11

BR

BR

C

E28

G- BG- B

P R N D 2 L

154

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION

Page 144: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

155

AND A/T INDICATOR (2JZ-GE)

THIS SYSTEM ELECTRICALLY CONTROLS THE LINE PRESSURE, THROTTLE PRESSURE, LOCK-UP PRESSURE ANDACCUMULATOR PRESSURE ETC. THROUGH THE SOLENOID VALVE. THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLEDTRANSMISSION IS A SYSTEM WHICH PRECISELY CONTROLS GEAR SHIFT TIMING AND LOCK-UP TIMING INRESPONSE TO THE VEHICLE’S DRIVING CONDITIONS AND THE ENGINE OPERATING CONDITIONS DETECTED BYVARIOUS SENSORS, MAKING SMOOTH DRIVING POSSIBLE BY SHIFT SELECTION FOR EACH GEAR WHICH IS THEMOST APPROPRIATE TO THE DRIVING CONDITIONS AT THAT TIME, AND CONTROLS THE ENGINE TORQUE DURINGSHIFTING TO ACHIEVE OPTIMUM SHIFT FEELING.

1. GEAR SHIFT OPERATIONWHEN DRIVING, THE ENGINE WARM UP CONDITION IS INPUT AS A SIGNAL TO TERMINAL (B) 44 OF THE ENGINECONTROL MODULE FROM THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR AND THE VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL FROMVEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 2 IS INPUT TERMINAL (B) 23 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. AT THE SAMETIME, THE THROTTLE VALVE OPENING SIGNAL FROM THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IS INPUT TO TERMINAL(B) 43 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE AS THROTTLE ANGLE SIGNAL.BASED ON THESE SIGNALS, THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE SELECTS THE BEST SHIFT POSITION FOR DRIVINGCONDITIONS AND SENDS CURRENT TO THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOIDS.WHEN SHIFTING TO 1ST SPEED, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL (B) 10 OF THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE TERMINAL 1 OF THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID . GROUND ANDCONTINUITY TO NO. 1 SOLENOID CAUSES THE SHIFT (NO. 2 SOLENOID DOES NOT HAVE CONTINUITY AT THISTIME.)FOR 2ND SPEED, THE CURRENT FLOWS SIMULTANEOUSLY FROM TERMINAL (B) 9 OF THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE TERMINAL 2 OF ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID GROUND, ANDFROM TERMINAL (B) 10 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE TERMINAL 1 OF THE ELECTRONICALLYCONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID GROUND, AND CONTINUITY TO NO. 1 AND NO. 2 SOLENOIDSCAUSES THE SHIFT.FOR 3RD SPEED, THERE IS NO CONTINUITY TO NO. 1 SOLENOID, ONLY TO NO. 2 SOLENOID, CAUSING THE SHIFT.SHIFTING INTO THE 4TH SPEED (OVERDRIVE) OCCURS WHEN NO CURRENT FLOWS TO NO. 1 AND NO. 2SOLENOIDS.

2. LOCK-UP OPERATIONWHEN THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE JUDGES FROM EACH SIGNAL THAT LOCK-UP OPERATION CONDITIONSHAVE BEEN MET, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL (B) 8 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE TERMINAL3 OF THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID GROUND, CAUSING CONTINUITY TOTHE LOCK-UP SOLENOID AND CAUSING LOCK-UP OPERATION.

3. STOP LIGHT SW CIRCUITIF THE BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED (STOP LIGHT SW ON) WHEN DRIVING IN LOCK-UP CONDITION, A SIGNAL ISINPUT TO TERMINAL(A) 4 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OPERATES ANDCUTS THE CURRENT TO THE SOLENOID TO RELEASE LOCK-UP.

4. OVERDRIVE CIRCUIT∗ O/D MAIN SW ON

WHEN THE O/D MAIN SW IS TURNED ON (SW POINT IS OPEN), A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (A) 28 OF THEENGINE CONTROL MODULE AND THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION CAUSES SHIFT TOOVERRIDE WHEN THE CONDITIONS FOR OVERDRIVE ARE MET.

∗ O/D MAIN SW OFFWHEN THE O/D MAIN SW IS TURNED OFF (SW POINT IS CLOSED). THE CURRENT FLOWING THROUGHTHE O/DOFF INDICATOR LIGHT FLOWS TO GROUND BY WAY OF THE O/D MAIN SW AND CAUSES THE O/D OFF INDICATORLIGHT TO LIGHT UP. AT THE SAME TIME, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (A) 28 OF THE ENGINE CONTROLMODULE AND THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PREVENTS SHIFT INTO OVERDRIVE.

5. ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW CIRCUITWHEN THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW IS SWITCHED FROM NORMALTO MANUAL, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (A) 18 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. INPUT OF THIS SIGNALCAUSES CURRENT TO FLOW FROM THE GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL (A) 1 OF THE COMBINATION METER TERMINAL (A) 12 TERMINAL (A) 25 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE GROUND, LIGHTING UP THEINDICATOR LIGHT. IF THE A/T SHIFT LEVER IS THEN SHIFTED TO “2” POSITION, THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULEENABLES THE VEHICLE TO START OFF WITH THE TRANSMISSION IN 2ND GEAR, THUS PERMITTING EASINGSTARTING OFF AND DRIVING ON SLIPPERY ROADS.

6. CRUISE CONTROLWHEN CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION IS SELECTED A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL (A) 12 OF THE ENGINECONTROL MODULE FROM CRUISE CONTROL ECU. AS A RESULT, THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OPERATES ANDCONTROLS OVERDRIVE, LOCK-UP AND SO ON FOR SMOOTH DRIVING.

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Page 145: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

156

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION

E2 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID1, 2, 3-GROUND : EACH 11-15 ΩE 3 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR

4-7 K 0 C 32 F)2-3 K 20 C 68 F)0-9.3 K 40 C 104 F)0-4.7 K 60 C 140 F)0-2.4 K 80 C 176 F)

E 9 (B), E10 (A) ENGINE CONTROL MODULEBATT-E1:ALWAYS 9-14 VOLTSIGSW-E1: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON +B-E1:9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON IDL1-E1:0-1.5 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED :9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN VTA1-E1: 0.3-0.8 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED 3.2-4.9 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN STA-E1: 6-14 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE CRANKINGM-REL-E1: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON VCC-E1:4.5-5.5 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON L-E1: 7.5-14 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT “L” POSITION 2-E1: 7.5-14 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT “ 2” POSITION

V11 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 2 (ELCTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION)1-2:APPROX. 620

E 8 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW4-3 :CLOSED WITH THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW AT MANUALPOSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGEA4 26(2JZ-GE) E 3 26(2JZ-GE) 0 5 29

C10 B 28 E 8 29 P 2 27(2JZ-GE)C11 A 28 E 9 B 29 P 3 27(2JZ-GE)C12 C 28 E10 A 29 S11 29

C16 28 I19 29 T 2 27(2JZ-GE)D 1 26(2JZ-GE) J 1 29 T 6 29D 4 26 J 2 29 V10 27(2JZ-GE)E 1 26(2JZ-GE) K 4 29 V11 27(2JZ-GE)E 2 26(2JZ-GE) M 1 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H1I

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1J

20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K2A 22 BATTERY AND J/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA1 34(2JZ-GE)ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)

EA3 34ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

IB1 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ138 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ238 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

SERVICE HINTS

Page 146: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

157

AND A/T INDICATOR (2JZ-GE)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATIONEB 34(2JZ-GE) FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

ED 34(2JZ-GE) REAR SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLD

IE36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IF36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IH 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E20 I14 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E2334 ENGINE WIRE

I17 38 ENGINE WIRE

E2634 ENGINE WIRE

I21 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E28

1 29X 10 11 13X876X421 10 11 12

11X

X X

X 8 X X

12 X X

X

1 2 3 4 2 11

32

21

3 4

B BLUEC10 A BROWNC11A 5

CC12 D 1

D 4 E 1 E 2 E 3 E 8

GRAY

BLACK

BLACK DARK GRAY BLACK

X

GREEN

X 2 X X X

X

C16 GREEN

X X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X X X

Page 147: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

158

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION AND A/TINDICATOR (2JZ-GE)

10

X

X

X

X

41

X

X

X

3

23

43

X

24

44

64

25

45

65

26

66

7

27

X

8

X

9

X

69

X

X

X

X

X

80

X

79

X

78

X

77

X

76

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

10

20

X

1

X

31

2

32

3

X

33

4

X

24

X

25

X

X

X

X

X

X

18

28

X

9

X

X

X

AA A A

A A A A

A A A A

A A A A A A A

2

4

X

75 6

2 3 4

8 9 101 2

1 2 3 4 1 5 6

X X X

1 2 3

B DARK GRAYE 9 A DARK GRAYE10

I19 J 1 J 2 K 4

O 5 P 2 S11

T 2 T 6 V10

BLACK

BLUE GRAY BLUE

BLACK BLACK

(HINT : SEE PAGE 7) (HINT : SEE PAGE 7)

46

12

V11 BLACK

1 254321

M 1 BLACK P 3 DARK GRAY

X

X

28

X

1 2

1 2

X

X 6 7 8

X

X

Page 148: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

159

ABS (W/O TRACTION CONTROL)

Page 149: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

A1 B2 B4

A2 A4 A3 B1 B5 B6

IB62

IB613

IB61

IF111

IJ115 II121 IJ116

A9 A4 A10 A21 A11 A22 A2 A13

A7 A8 A18

E18

I 4

IGEA

A4 A2 A3 B2 B1 B4 B5 B8

M

A1

B8

2

EA1

6

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 1

MR R+ SR TS

MT SFRH SFLH SRH SFLR AST GND1 GND2

ABS ACTUATOR

D 1

60AABS NO. 1

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

R

V

V-W L-B

L-W

W-B Y R L

P-B

Y

L-B

V-WV

G-W Y

B-

Y

P

B-R

P-L

P-L

W-

B

W-

B

B-RP

B-

Y

Y

G-W

L-W L

W-B

W-

B

R

L

L

L- W

W- B

R B- RB- RR

W- B

16 11 22

23

2

AB

S R

EL

AY

BA

8,

A 9

A

ABS ECU

AA18 , A19B

IB66 IB57 IB58 IB59 IB54 IB55

BS BM MT SFRH SFLH SRH SFLR AST

GND

BA 6 , A 7A

1R

+BM +BS W

BM MR R+ SR BS GND

A1

B6

Y-R

Y-R

IB53

SFRR

SFRR

A16

A5

Y-G

Y-G

IB65

SRR

SRR (SH

IELD

ED

)

I 9

W-

B

TS TC WA

WB

(SH

OR

T P

IN)

160

ABS (W/O TRACTION CONTROL)

Page 150: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1

2

I 9

I 2

4

2

B4 B9 B11B2 B12

A3 A14 A19 A20 B1 B7 B3 B10

IB51 IB52 IB24 IB25 IC23

1

2

1

2

2

1

2

1

IC28

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

RE

AR

LH

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

FRO

NT

LH

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

FRO

NT

RH

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

RE

AR

RH

STPIG1 D/GTCWA

FR+ FR- FL+ FL- RR+ RR- RL+ RL-

AB

S W

AR

NIN

G L

IGH

T[T

EL

LTA

LE L

IGH

T L

H]

ST

OP

LIG

HT

SW

DATA LINK CONNECTOR 2D 5

S11

T 5

A11

A10

A32 A3

1

RL

LG-B

B-R

W

Y

G-

W

LGV

LGVPLBW

BW

LR

LR

R

L

B-R

L

R

144

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

ABS ECUAA18 , A19B

IF212

L

ED

IJ118

BR

BR

3

BR

( SH

IELD

ED

)

10AECU- IG

15ASTOP

10AGAUGE

1K13 1I101E12

TC ABS THA

161

Page 151: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

162

ABS (W/O TRACTION CONTROL)

THIS SYSTEM CONTROLS THE RESPECTIVE BRAKE FLUID PRESSURES ACTING ON THE DISC BRAKE CYLINDERSOF THE RIGHT FRONT WHEEL, LEFT FRONT WHEEL AND REAR WHEELS WHEN THE BRAKES ARE APPLIED IN APANIC STOP SO THAT THE WHEELS DO NOT LOCK. THIS RESULTS IN IMPROVED DIRECTIONAL STABILITY ANDSTEERABILITY DURING PANIC BRAKING.1. INPUT SIGNALS(1) SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL

THE SPEED OF THE WHEELS IS DETECTED AND INPUT TO TERMINALS FL+, FR+, RL+ AND RR+ OF THE ABSECU.

(2) STOP LIGHT SW SIGNALA SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL STP OF THE ABS ECU WHEN THE BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED.

2. SYSTEM OPERATIONDURING SUDDEN BRAKING, THE ABS ECU WHICH HAS SIGNALS INPUT FROM EACH SENSOR CONTROLS THECURRENT FLOWING TO THE SOLENOID INSIDE THE ACTUATOR AND LETS THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE ACTING ONEACH WHEEL CYLINDER ESCAPE TO THE RESERVOIR. THE PUMP INSIDE THE ACTUATOR IS ALSO OPERATING ATTHIS TIME AND IT RETURNS THE BRAKE FLUID FROM THE RESERVOIR TO THE MASTER CYLINDER, THUSPREVENTING LOCKING OF THE VEHICLE WHEELS.IF THE ECU JUDGES THAT THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE ACTING ON THE WHEEL CYLINDER IS INSUFFICIENT, THECURRENT ACTING ON SOLENOID IS CONTROLLED AND THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS INCREASED.HOLDING OF THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS ALSO CONTROLLED BY THE ECU, BY THE SAME METHOD AS ABOVE,BY REPEATED PRESSURE REDUCTION, HOLDING AND INCREASE ARE REPEATED TO MAINTAIN VEHICLESTABILITY AND TO IMPROVE STEERABILITY DURING SUDDEN BRAKING.

A 6 (A), A 7 (B) ABS ACTUATOR(A) 1-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY(B) 5-(A) 4:33 (B) 1,(B) 2,(B) 4,(A) 4:APPROX. 8.8 (B) 5,(B) 6,(B) 8,(A) 4:APPROX. 4.3

A10, A11 ABS SPEED SENSOR FRONT LH, RH1-2:1.4-1.8 K (20 C, 68 F)

A31, A32 ABS SPEED SENSOR REAR LH, RH1-2:0.9-1.3 K (20 C, 68 F)

A18, (B), A19(A) ABS ECU(B) 2-GROUND :10-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON(B)12-GROUND :10-14 VOLTS WITH THE STOP LIGHT SW ON (BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED)(A) 2, (A) 13-GROUND :ALWAYS CONTINUITY(A) 1, (A) 4, (A) 10, (A) 11, (A) 21, (A) 22-GROUND:10-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON

S11 STOP LIGHT SW1-2:CLOSED WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGEA 6 A 26(2JZ-GE) A11 26(2JZ-GE) D 1 26(2JZ-GE)A 7 B 26(2JZ-GE) A18 B 28 D 5 28

A 8 A 26 A19 A 28 S11 29

A 9 B 26 A31 30 T 5 29A10 26(2JZ-GE) A32 30

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1I20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 152: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

163

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA1 34(2JZ-GE) ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

IB2 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB536 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IB636 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL))

IF136 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF236 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EA 34(2JZ-GE) FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER

ED 34(2JZ-GE) REAR SIDE OF INTAKE FENDER

IG 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E18 34 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE I 438 COWL WIRE

I 2 38 COWL WIRE I 938 COWL WIRE

Page 153: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

60A

AB

S N

O.

1

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

2

2 3

1 4

5 5

5 5

E 6

E 6

4 3

6 1

2

5

5 5 5

55 5

A26 B1 B7 A24 A8 A21

IB613 IB62 IB61

IJ116

IJ115II121

IF111

6 IB5IB55IB53IB54IB65IB510IB59IB58IB57IB66

B7B8B5B6A5B3B4B2B1A3A4A2

A14B12A1B6B4A15B11B5A2B10

A1

EA16

EA

2

14 4

11 16 22

1

23

I 2

ABS ACTUATOR

BA 6 , A 7A

ABS ECU

BA20 , A21A

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 2

D 5DATA LINKCONNECTOR 1

D 1

R R

V-

W V L-B

V- W

L- W

W- B LG-B

R

AB

S M

OT

OR

RE

LAY

AB

S S

OLE

NO

IDR

ELA

Y

B- R

R

P-

BP

-B

YY L

L

R

R-

L

P-

L

Y-R

B-R

Y-G

P-BP

B-YY

G-W

R-L

P-L

Y-

R

B-

R

Y-G

P-

B

P

B-

Y

Y

G-W

L-W

L

R+ MR SR TC

SRLRSRRRSFRRSFLRASTSRLHSRRHSFLHSFRHMT

SRLRSRRRSFRRSFLRASTSRLHSRRHSFLHSFRHMTBSBM

GND

W-

B

W- B

V-W V L-

B

B-R

R

V-

W

M

L

D/G TS

ABS TC

(SH

OR

T P

IN)

WB

WATSTC

164

ABS W/ TRACTION CONTROL)

Page 154: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

15ASTOP

I 4

I18

3512

2

A20A7A19A6A5A13A11

A3A16A4A17A25A12B9B3B2B8A9A22A23A10

IF212

IB52IB51IB25IB24IC28IC23

IE IG

8167154

2

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

1

2

THROTTLE ECUT16

ABS DECELERATION SENSORA23

ABS ECU

BA20 , A21A

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

RE

AR

RH

A32

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

RE

AR

LH

A31

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

FR

ON

T L

HA

10

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

FR

ON

T R

HA

11

STO

P L

IGH

T S

WS

11

AB

S W

AR

NIN

G L

IGH

T[T

ELL

TA

LE L

IGH

T L

H]

T 5

RR- RL+ RL- FL+ FL- FR+

IG1 STP RRO RLO

L

L

L

B-

R

G-W

Y-B

GR

-R

L P V LG W B R

V LG W B R

LL

( SH

IELD

ED

)

W-B

W-B G R

W-

B

W-

B

GL1GGNDGND2GND1FR- VGSGL2

W B

( SH

IELD

ED

)

FRO FLOLG

-B

O

YL

W

RR+

A18

IJ114

Y-R

Y-

R

11

EXO

E10ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

5

L

I 9W- B

WA

FLOFRORLORROWA

ABS

GGND GL1 GL2 VGS

10AGAUGE

1E12

10AECU- IG

1K13 1I10

165

Page 155: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

166

ABS (W/ TRACTION CONTROL)

THIS SYSTEM CONTROLS THE RESPECTIVE BRAKE FLUID PRESSURES ACTING ON THE DISC BRAKE CYLINDERSOF THE RIGHT FRONT WHEEL, LEFT FRONT WHEEL, RIGHT REAR WHEEL AND LEFT REAR WHEEL WHEN THEBRAKES ARE APPLIED IN A PANIC STOP SO THAT THE WHEELS DO NOT LOCK.THIS RESULTS IN IMPROVED DIRECTIONALLY STABILITY AND STEERABILITY DURING PANIC BRAKING.1. INPUT SIGNALS(3) SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL

THE SPEED OF THE WHEELS IS DETECTED AND INPUT TO TERMINALS FL+, FR+, RL+ AND RR+ OF THE ABSECU.

(4) STOP LIGHT SW SIGNALA SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL STP OF THE ABS ECU WHEN THE BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED.

(5) DECELERATION SENSOR SIGNALLONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL ACCELERATION IS DETECTED AND INPUT TO THE ABS ECU.

2. SYSTEM OPERATIONDURING SUDDEN BRAKING, THE ABS ECU WHICH HAS SIGNALS INPUT FROM EACH SENSOR CONTROLS THECURRENT FLOWING TO THE SOLENOID INSIDE THE ACTUATOR AND LETS THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE ACTING ONEACH WHEEL CYLINDER ESCAPE TO THE RESERVOIR. THE PUMP INSIDE THE ACTUATOR IS ALSO OPERATING ATTHIS TIME AND IT RETURNS THE BRAKE FLUID FROM THE RESERVOIR TO THE MASTER CYLINDER, THUSPREVENTING LOCKING OF THE VEHICLE WHEELS.IF THE ECU JUDGES THAT THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE ACTING ON THE WHEEL CYLINDER IS INSUFFICIENT, THECURRENT ACTING ON SOLENOID IS CONTROLLED AND THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS INCREASED.HOLDING OF THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS ALSO CONTROLLED BY THE ECU, BY THE SAME METHOD AS ABOVE,BY REPEATED PRESSURE REDUCTION, HOLDING AND INCREASE ARE REPEATED TO MAINTAIN VEHICLESTABILITY AND TO IMPROVE STEERABILITY DURING SUDDEN BRAKING.

A20 (A), A21 (B) ABS ECU(A) 13-GROUND::10-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION(A) 5-GROUND:10-14 VOLTS WITH THE STOP LIGHT SW ON(A) 12,(A) 25-GROUND:ALWAYS CONTINUITY

A 6 (A), A 7 (B) ABS ACTUATOR(A) 1-GROUND:ALWAYS CONTINUITY(A) 5-(A) 4.33 Ω(B) 1, (B) 2, (B) 3, (B) 4- (A) 4,:APPROX. 8 8 Ω (B) 5, (B) 6, (B) 7, (B) 8- (A) 4,:APPROX. 4.3 Ω

S11 STOP LIGHT SW2-1:CLOSED WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED

A10, A11 ABS SPEED SENSOR FRONT LH, RH1-2:0.4-1.8 K Ω (20 C, 68 F)

A31, A32 ABS SPEED SENSOR REAR LH, RH1-2:0.9-1.3 K Ω (20 C, 68 F)

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 156: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

167

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A 6 A 24(2JZ-GTE) A21 B 28 D 5 28

A 7 B 24(2JZ-GTE) A23 28 E10 29

A10 24(2JZ-GTE) A31 30 S11 29

A11 24(2JZ-GTE) A32 30 T 5 29

A20 A 28 D 1 24(2JZ-GTE) T16 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

5 23 R/B NO. 5 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT RIGHT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1I 20 COWL WIRE AND NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL

1K 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA1 32(2JZ-GTE) ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

IB2 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB536 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IB636 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF136 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF236 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IG 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I 238 COWL WIRE

I 938 COWL WIRE

I1138 COWL WIRE

I1838 COWL WIRE

Page 157: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1 21 2 X 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

14 15 X 17 18 X 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

4X

14XXX

X

X

X X X

X

1 2 X

42

A BLACKA 6 B GRAYA 7 AA20

BA21

A10

A23 A31 A32 D 1

D 5 S11 T 5

GRAY

GRAY GRAY BLACK

DARK GRAY BLUE

12

11

X

X X

X X X 11

X 16 X X 2322

X

X

X

1 2

3 4 5

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

1 2

A11 GRAY

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 X 53 12

X

X X

XX

7 8

X 15 16

E10 DARK GRAY

T16

X X X

X

5

168

ABS (W/ TRACTION CONTROL)

Page 158: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

169

TRACTION CONTROL

TRACTION CONTROL IS THE SYSTEM TO REALIZE A FAVORABLE ACCELERATOR CONTROLABILITY BY MAKINGTHE ENGINE OUTPUT MOST APPROPRIATE FOR THE ACCELERATION UNDER EACH DRIVING CONDITIONPROVIDED BY THE THROTTLE ECU.(TRACTION OFF SW)THIS IS THE SWITCH TO STOP THE OPERATION OF SLIP CONTROL. AFTER STARTING THE ENGINE, PRESSING THESWITCH ONE TIME UNDER THE CONDITION THAT THE SNOW INDICATOR DOES NOT LIGHT ON, MAKES IT IN THEOPERATION STOP CONDITION (OFF), AND PRESSING IT ONE MORE TIME MAKES IT IN THE OPERATION WAITINGCONDITION. IN ADDITION, RESTARTING AFTER THE ENGINE STOP MAKES IT IN THE OPERATION WAITINGCONDITION WITHOUT CONCERNING THE TRACTION OFF SW.(SNOW MODE SW)THIS IS THE SWITCH TO FIX LOW LOADS CONTROL AT THE TIME OF DRIVING ON A SLIPPERY ROAD SUCH ASSNOWY ROAD. AFTER STARTING THE ENGINE, PRESSING THE SWITCH MAKES IT FIX AT LOW LOAD CONTROLAND SNOW INDICATOR LIGHT COMES ON. IN ADDITION, RESTARTING AFTER THE ENGINE STOP MAKES IT ALWAYSIN NORMAL CONDITION (AUTO MODE) WITHOUT CONCERNING THE SNOW MODE SW CONDITION. PRESSING THESNOW MODE SW UNDER OPERATION PROHIBITION CONDITION OF THE TRACITION (TRAC OFF INDICATOR LIGHTSON.) CANCELS THE OPERATION PROHIBITION OF THE TRACTION AND ALSO FIXES IT AT LOW LOAD CONTROL.(TRAC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT)THIS LIGHT COMES ON BY SELECTING THE OPERATION STOP CONDITION OF THE TRACTION CONTROL WITHTRACTION OFF SW AND ALERTS THE DRIVER TO BE IN OPERATION STOP CONDITION AND ALSO ALERTS THEDRIVER BY BLINKING IN CASE OF THE OCCURANCE OF THE SYSTEM MAULFUCTION.

T15 (A), T16 (B)THROTTLE ECU WT-E1: 0.3 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE TRAC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT ON

9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE TRAC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT OFF IND-E1 : 0.3 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT ON

: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT OFFCSW-E1: 0.3 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE TRAC OFF SW HOLDED ON PUSHING

: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE TRAC OFF SW RELEASEDSIND-E1 0.3 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE SNOW INDICATOR LIGHT ON

9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE SNOW INDICATOR LIGHT OFF SNOW-E1: 0.3 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE SNOW MODE SW HELD ON PUSHING

: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE SNOW MODE SW RELEASEDNE-E1: PULSE GENERATION (ENGINE IDLING)TC-E1: 4.5-5.5 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE ENGINE NOT RUNNINGWA-E1: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE ABS ECU NORMAL CONDITION

0.3 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE ABS ECU ABNORMAL CONDITION EFIB-E1 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE ENGINE NOT RUNNING IDL2-E1: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AND THE SUB THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN

0-3 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AND THE SUB THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED VTA2-E1: 3.2-4.9 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AND THE SUB THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN

0.3-0.8 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AND THE SUB THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED BATT-E1: ALWAYS 9-14 VOLTS +B-E1: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND ENGINE NOT RUNNING IDL1-E1: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN

0-3 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED VTA1-E1: 3.2- 4.9 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN

0.3-0.8 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED RLY+-RLY :9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON A,A-,B,B+--EO1: PULSE GENERATION (ENGINE RUNNING AND THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED) EFI+,EFI-, ETC+,ETC--E1: PULSE GENERATION (IGNITION SW ON)

T 8 TRACTION CONTROL SW4-6 :CLOSED WITH THE TRACTIOIN CONTROL SW AT OFF POSITION8-6 :CLOSED WITH THE TRACTIOIN CONTROL SW AT SNOW POSITION

S18 SUB THROTTLE VALVE MOTOR4-6, 3-1:APPROX. 0.44 Ω

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 159: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

7. 5ATRAC

2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

1

3 6

1 4

5 5

5 5

2

4 6 1 3

6 19 7 20

6

4 8

2 3

8

B8B16B7B15A23A25A24A12A11B12B4B9B1

B64 B63 A40 A39

A19A6A4A3A26A13B14B6

IB514

IB512

IB511

E16

I11

IG IE EC ED

SUB THROTTLEVALVE MOTOR

S18ABS ECUA20

TRACTIONCONTROLSW

T 8

SU

B T

HR

OTT

LE

PO

SIT

ION

SE

NS

OR

S 5

TH

RO

TTL

E P

OS

ITIO

N S

EN

SO

RT

2

ENGINE CONTROLMODULE

AE 9 , E10B

THROTTLE ECU

BT15 , T16A

R

W-R

L-Y

L-R

L-B

BR

-BB

R-

B

L-B

L-R

( SH

IELD

ED

)

Y L B R Y-

B

GR

-R

LG-B O

BATT +B RLY+ RLY- A- GE01 FRO

E1EO1SNOW

R

GR

-R

V-

Y

G-O

GR

-R

R

R

GR

-R

BR

W-B

R-BLG

W-B

W-

B

W-

B

IDL1 IDL2 VTO1 VTO2

TRACTIONSOLENOIDRELAY

E16

: M

/TI1

7 :

A/T

VTA1 VTA2IDL1IDL2CSW

A B- B RLORRO FLO

10AECU- B

1H8

A- A B- B

FLOFRORLORRO

TC

SN

OW

OF

F

170

TRACTION CONTROL

Page 160: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

A38

A16

30AEFI NO. 1

2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

1

11

2

5 1

3 2

2 2

2 2

4 2

48

A17 A9 A8 A21 A14 A7 A20 A15

B5 B7

A24

A26A27A13A14B51B67

B3 B10 B5 B11 B2 A1

A9

IF22 IF212

IF19 IF21

I 2

I 2

I14

EB

EA22

EA18

IF111

II121

13

Y

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 2

D 5D

ATA

LIN

KC

ON

NE

CTO

R 1

D 1

TE

LL T

ALE

LIG

HT

LHT

5

THROTTLE ECU

BT15 , T16A

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

AE 9 , E10B

CO

MB

INA

TIO

NM

ET

ER

BC

10,

C12

A

LG- R

R

R

R

RP

-B

P-B

LG-

RLG

-R

LG- R

LG-

R

LL

P-G W

WP-G

YY

TC

TC

OPA

SN

OW

SLI

P

TC WA SIND

EFI MAINRELAY

B-

RB

-RB

-Y

W- B

EFIB

P

W-L Y BR

( SH

IEL

DE

D)

B W

( SH

IEL

DE

D)

GR

GR

FAIL ETC+ ETC- GE12 EFI+ EFI- GE11

EFIF FAIL

W-

B

ETC+ ETC- EFI+ EFI-

M- REL

NE

P-L

NEO

WT IND

EFIF

GR

10AGAUGE

1E12

TR

AC

OFF AB

S

171

Page 161: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

172

TRACTION CONTROL

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A20 28 E 9 B 29 T 5 29

C10 A 28 E10 A 29 T 8 29

C12 B 28 S 5 25(2JZ-GTE) T15 A 29

D 1 24(2JZ-GTE) S18 25(2JZ-GTE) T16 B 29

D 5 28 T 2 25(2JZ-GTE)

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

5 23 R/B NO. 5 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT RIGHT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOIINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA132(2J2 GTE) ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)

EA232(2J2-GTE) ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

IB5 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IF136 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF236 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EB 32(2JZ-GTE) FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

EC 32(2JZ-GTE) FRONT SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLD

ED 32(2JZ-GTE) REAR SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLD

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IG 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E16 32 ENGINE WIRE I14 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

I 238 COWL WIRE

I17 38 ENGINE WIRE

I1138 COWL WIRE

Page 162: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

6 7 8

19 20

9X

5 X7

A BLUEC10A20

X X X X

X X X 11

X X X X X

X

XX

XX4XX

XXXX

XXX

X

XX

X

X

63

X

64

X

67

X

X

X

X

51 X

XX

X

40X

13 14

24

X

X

26

X

X

27

X 38

X

X

39

21 X 3

4 X 6

38

42 X

4 X 6 X 8 X

1 X 3 4 X 6 7 8 9 X 13

14 15 16 17 X 19 20 21 X 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 X 14 15 16

BT16AT15

A DARK GRAYE10B DARK GRAYE 9

BC12 D 1 BLACK D 5 DARK GRAY

S 5 BLACK S18 BLACK T 2 BLACK T 5 T 8

X

13

11 12

23 24 25

173

Page 163: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

174

CRUISE CONTROL

I14

II12 II18 II121

IF111

II123 IJ27

IF24

I 2

I 2A9A10

B11 B6

2

1

4

9

IF

7 5

7 8

3 1 2

10 4 11

15220

61

Y Y

Y

G- R

P

Y

R

O

BR

L-

R Y R BR

O

O R P-B

P-

B

RO

YRRY

BR

PY

G-R

Y

W-

R

YY

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

A/T

IND

ICA

TOR

LIG

HT

SW

[PA

RK

/NE

UTR

AL

PO

SIT

ION

SW

]( A

/T)

P 2

( M/T

)

C15CRUISE CONTROLCLUTCH SW(M/T)

( M/T

)

ODO AND TRIP

CR

UIS

E BC

10,

C12

AC

OM

BIN

ATI

ON

ME

TE

RTELL

TALE

LIG

HT

RH

T 6

V10VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 1(COMBINATION METER)

A/D TC TC

DATA LINK CONNECTOR 2 DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1D 5 D 1

14

B-R

IF2

5P

Y

E14 : 2JZ- GTEE28 : 2JZ- GE

I14

L-R

L-R

L- R

TO S

PE

ED

OM

ET

ER

[CO

MB

. M

ET

ER

]

I 4

G-

R

G- R

(A/T)

I 8

BR

(A/T)

(A/T)

R( *1)

( *2)

10AECU- B

10AGAUGE

1H81H121E12

10AECU- IG

1I9

SPD D BATT

PI TC

CRUISE CONTROL ECUC16

B

Page 164: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

175

*2 : 2JZ- GE*1 : 2JZ- GTE

15ASTOP

I17

I 4

IJ210 IJ211 IJ13 IB615 IB69 IB617 IB68

A8

B2

B64A12B9

3

4

1

2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

22 9 21

1016

1 2 4 3

12 11

G- W

R-L

BR

-Y

G-RLG

LG G-R

W-B

R-L

R-L

WW

G-W

G-W

B-W

R-B

LG-B

R-L

RR

BR

-B

R-L

R

R- L

R-

L

CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATORC 4

B-W

TO LIGHT FAILURESENSOR

STO

P L

IGH

T S

WS1

1

IDLS2

S2 OD1 IDL1

THROTTLEPOSITION SENSOR

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLEDTRANSMISSION SOLENOID

BE 2 , A

AE 9 , E10B

(2JZ- GE)

(2JZ- GTE)

IE

181913

L

R-Y

W-B

W-B

W-B

W- B 17

15 5

C14CRUISE CONTROL SW[COMB. SW]

( A/T

)

( *1

A/T

)

( A/T

)( A

/T)

( A/T

)

( A/T

)

CRUISE CONTROLC16

T 2

32

(2JZ- GTE)(2JZ- GE)

LG-B

( *2

A/T

)

( *1)

( *1)

I17

( *1

)

R-B

R- B

R- B

(*2)

(*2)( *

2)

E16

W-B

G-W

I 9 : *1I 4 : *2

1I10

1J1

1H13

M

MC GNDMO L

IDLODECT

LSTP-

MO MC

CMS CCSGND

ECU

RESUME/ACCEL

SET/COAST

CANCEL

CCS

E

CMS

MA

IN

Page 165: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

176

CRUISE CONTROL

CURRENT IS APPLIED AT ALL TIMES THROUGH STOP FUSE TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU,TERMINAL 2 OF THE STOP LIGHT SW, AND ALSO THROUGH THE ECU-B FUSE TO TERMINAL 15 OF THE CRUISECONTROL ECU.WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED TO ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL (A) 9 OFTHE COMBINATION METER AND THE CURRENT THROUGH ECU-IG FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 14 OF THE CRUISECONTROL ECU.WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS ON AND THE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH IS TURNED ON, A SIGNAL IS INPUT FROMTERMINAL 15 OF CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SW TO TERMINAL 19 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU. AS A RESULT, THECRUISE CONTROL ECU FUNCTIONS AND THE CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH TERMINAL 14 OF THE CRUISECONTROL ECU TO TERMINAL 13 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU → GROUND, AND THE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMIS IN A CONDITION READY FOR OPERATION.AT THE SAME TIME, THE CURRENT THROUGH THE GAUGE FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL (A) 9 OF THE CRUISECONTROL INDICATOR LIGHT → TERMINAL (B) 6 → TERMINAL 7 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU → TERMINAL 13 →GROUND, CAUSING THE CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR LIGHT TO LIGHT UP, INDICATING THAT THE CRUISECONTROL IS READY FOR OPERATION.

1. SET OPERATIONWHEN THE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SW IS TURNED ON AND THE SET SW IS PUSHED WITH THE VEHICLESPEED WITHIN THE SET LIMIT (APPROX. 40 KM/H, 25 MPH TO 200 KM/H, 124 MPH), A SIGNAL IS INPUT TOTERMINAL 18 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU AND THE VEHICLE SPEED AT THE TIME THE SET SW ISRELEASED, WHICH I MEMORIZED IN THE ECU AS THE SET SPEED.

2. SET SPEED CONTROLDURING CRUISE CONTROL DRIVING, THE ECU COMPARES THE SET SPEED MEMORIZED IN THE ECU WITH THEACTUAL VEHICLE SPEED INPUTS INTO TERMINAL 20 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU FROM THE SPEEDSENSOR, AND CONTROLS THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR TO MAINTAIN THE SET SPEED.WHEN THE ACTUAL SPEED IS LOWER THAN THE SET SPEED, THE ECU CAUSES THE CURRENT TO THECRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR TO FLOW FROM TERMINAL 12 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE CRUISE CONTROLACTUATOR → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINAL 11 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU. AS A RESULT, THE MOTOR IN THECRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR IS ROTATED TO OPEN THE THROTTLE VALVE AND THE THROTTLE CABLE ISPULLED TO INCREASE THE VEHICLE SPEED. WHEN THE ACTUAL DRIVING SPEED IS HIGHER THAN THE SETSPEED, THE CURRENT TO CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 11 OF THE ECU →TERMINAL 2 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR → TERMINAL 1 → TERMINAL 12 OF THE CRUISE CONTROLECU.THIS CAUSES THE MOTOR IN THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR TO ROTATE TO CLOSE THE THROTTLE VALVEAND RETURN THE THROTTLE CABLE TO DECREASE THE VEHICLE SPEED.

3. COAST CONTROLDURING THE CRUISE CONTROL DRIVING, WHILE THE COAST SW IS ON, THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATORRETURNS THE THROTTLE CABLE TO CLOSE THE THROTTLE VALVE AND DECREASE THE DRIVING SPEED. THEVEHICLE SPEED WHEN THE COAST SWITCH IS TURNED OFF IS MEMORIZED AND THE VEHICLE CONTINUES ATTHE NEW SET SPEED.

4. ACCEL CONTROLDURING CRUISE CONTROL DRIVING, WHILE THE ACCEL SW IS TURNED ON, THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATORPULLS THE THROTTLE CABLE TO OPEN THE THROTTLE VALVE AND INCREASE THE DRIVING SPEED.THE VEHICLE SPEED WHEN THE ACCEL SW IS TURNED OFF IS MEMORIZED AND THE VEHICLE CONTINUES ATTHE NEW SET SPEED.

5. RESUME CONTROLUNLESS THE VEHICLE SPEED FALLS BELOW THE MINIMUM SPEED LIMIT (APPROX. 40 KM/H, 25 MPH) AFTERCANCELING THE SET SPEED BY THE CANCEL SW, PUSHING THE RESUME SW WILL CAUSE THE VEHICLE TORESUME THE SPEED SET BEFORE THE CANCELLATION.

6. MANUAL CANCEL MECHANISMIF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS OCCUR DURING CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION, THE MAGNETICCLUTCH OF THE ACTUATOR TURNS OFF AND THE MOTOR ROTATES TO CLOSE THE THROTTLE VALVE ANDTHE CRUISE CONTROL IS RELEASED.

∗ PLACING THE SHIFT LEVER IN EXCEPT “D” POSITION (PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW EXCEPT “D” POSITION).“SIGNAL IS NOT INPUT TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE ECU” (A/T)

∗ DEPRESSING THE BRAKE PEDAL (STOP LIGHT SW ON). “SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 16 OF THE ECU”∗ PUSHING THE CANCEL SWITCH (CANCEL SW ON). “SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 18 OF THE ECU”∗ DEPRESSING THE CLUTCH PEDAL (CRUISE CONTROL CLUTCH SW OFF). “SIGNAL IS NOT INPUT TO TERMINAL

2 OF THE ECU”

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Page 166: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

177

7. AUTO CANCEL FUNCTION

A) IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING OPERATING CONDITIONS OCCUR DURING CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION, THE SETSPEED IS ERASED, CURRENT FLOW TO MAGNETIC CLUTCH IS STOPPED AND THE CRUISE CONTROL ISRELEASED. (MAIN SW TURNS OFF).WHEN THIS OCCURS, THE IGNITION SW MUST BE TURNED OFF ONCE BEFORE THE MAIN SW WILL TURN ON.

∗ OVER CURRENT TO TRANSISTOR DRIVING MOTOR AND/OR MAGNETIC CLUTCH.∗ WHEN CURRENT CONTINUED TO FLOW TO THE MOTOR INSIDE THE ACTUATOR IN THE THROTTLE VALVE

“OPEN” DIRECTION.∗ OPEN CIRCUIT IN MAGNETIC CLUTCH.∗ MOMENTARY INTERRUPTION OF VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL.∗ SHORT CIRCUIT IN CRUISE CONTROL SW.∗ MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE DESPITE THE MOTOR DRIVE SIGNAL BEING OUTPUT.

B) IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS OCCUR DURING CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION, THE SET SPEED ISERASED AND THE CRUISE CONTROL IS RELEASED. (THE POWER OF MAGNETIC CLUTCH IS CUT OFF UNTILTHE SET SW IS “ON” AGAIN.)

∗ WHEN THE VEHICLE SPEED FALLS BELOW THE MINIMUM SPEED LIMIT, APPROX. 40 KM/H (25 MPH)∗ WHEN THE VEHICLE SPEED FALLS MORE THAN 16 KM/H (10 MPH) BELOW THE SET SPEED, E.G. ON AN

UPWARD SLOPE.∗ WHEN POWER TO THE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM IS MOMENTARILY CUT OFF.

8. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL FUNCTION∗ IN OVERDRIVE. IF THE VEHICLE SPEED BECOMES LOWER THAN THE OVERDRIVE CUT SPEED (SET SPEED

MINUS APPROX. 4 KM/H, 2.5 MPH) DURING CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION, SUCH AS DRIVING UP A HILL, THEOVERDRIVE IS RELEASED AND THE POWER INCREASED TO PREVENT A REDUCTION IN VEHICLE SPEED.

∗ AFTER RELEASING THE OVERDRIVE, VEHICLE SPEED BECOMES HIGHER THAN THE OVERDRIVE RETURNSPEED (SET SPEED MINUS APPROX, 2 KM/H, 1.2 MPH) AND THE ECU JUDGES BY THE SIGNALS FROMPOTENTIOMETER OF THE ACTUATOR THAT THE UPWARD SLOPE HAS FINISHED, OVERDRIVE IS RESUMEDAFTER APPROXIMATELY 2 SECONDS.

∗ DURING CRUISE CONTROL DRIVING, THE CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION SIGNAL IS OUTPUT FROM THECRUISE CONTROL ECU TO THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. UPON RECEIVING THIS SIGNAL, THE ENGINECONTROL MODULE CHANGES THE SHIFT PATTERN TO NORMAL. TO MAINTAIN SMOOTH CRUISE CONTROLOPERATION (ON A DOWNWARD SLOPE ETC.), LOCK-UP RELEASE OF THE TRANSMISSION WHEN THE IDLINGPOINT OF THE THROTTLE POSITION IS “ON” IS FORBIDDEN.

C 4 CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR3-4 : APPROX. 38.5 Ω

C14 CRUISE CONTROL SW [COMB. SW]15-17 : CONTINUITY WITH THE MAIN SW ON5-17 : APPROX. 418 Ω WITH THE CANCEL SW ON

APPROX. 68 Ω WITH THE RESUME/ACCEL SW ONAPPROX. 198 Ω WITH THE SET/COAST SW ON

C16 CRUISE CONTROL ECU14-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION15-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS20-GROUND : 4 PULSE WITH 1 ROTATION OF ROTOR SHAFT18-GROUND : APPROX. 418 Ω WITH THE CANCEL SW ON IN CONTROL SW

APPROX. 198 Ω WITH THE SET/COAST SW ON IN CONTROL SWAPPROX. 68 Ω WITH THE RESUME/ACCEL SW ON IN CONTROL SW

13-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

SERVICE HINTS

Page 167: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

178

CRUISE CONTROL

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C 424 (2JZ-GTE) D 1 26 (2JZ-GE) S11 29

C 426 (2JZ-GE) D 5 28

T 225 (2JZ-GTE)

C10 A 28E 2

A 24 (2JZ-GTE)T 2

27 (2JZ-GE)

C12 B 28E 2

B 26 (2JZ-GE) T 6 29

C14 28 E 9 B 29V10

25 (2JZ-GTE)

C15 28 E10 A 29V10

27 (2JZ-GE)

C16 28P 2

25 (2JZ-GTE)

D 1 24 (2JZ-GTE)P 2

17 (2JZ-GE)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H

1I 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1J

( )

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB6 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IF136 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF236 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ138 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ238 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IF36 LEFT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E1432

I4 38 COWL WIRE

E1632

ENGINE WIRE I838 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E28 34 I1438 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

I2 38 COWL WIRE I17 38 ENGINE WIRE

Page 168: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

179

9X 10 11X X6

X X

X X 15 X X

5 X

X 171 2

X 2 X X X X 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

14 15 16 X 18 19 20 21 22 X X X X

X 2 X X X X 7 8 X 10 11 12 13

14 15 16 X 18 19 20 21 X X X X X

4X

10

XX

82

A BLUEC10 BC12

A GRAYE 2 B BLACKE 2

C 4

C14 C15 C16

C16 D 1 D 5

X X

X X X 11

X X X

GRAY

BLACK (A/T)

(M/T)

GREEN

GREEN BLACK DARK GRAY(2JZ- GTE)

(2JZ- GTE) (2JZ- GE)

X

X

X

1 2 3 4

X

XX

X

X

64

X

X

9 X

X

XX

B DARK GRAYE 9(2JZ- GTE)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X 64 X X

9 X

X

X

X

XX

XX

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X X

12

X

X X X

X

B DARK GRAYE 9 A DARK GRAYE10(2JZ- GE) (2JZ- GTE)

X

X

X

X

X

X X

XX

X

X

XXX

X

X

X X

Page 169: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

180

CRUISE CONTROL

X

X 12 X X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X 4

91

3

2

4

3

2 1 5 6 7

X X X

1 2 3

A DARK GRAYE10

BLACKT 2

T 2P 2 S11

T 6 V10

GRAY BLUE(2JZ- GE)

BLACK

XX

(2JZ- GTE)

(2JZ- GE)

X

BLACK

Page 170: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

9X 10 11 11X X 1 2

1 2

X 4 5 6

A BLUEC10 BC12 P 1

P 4

GRAY

BLU E

1 5 6 7

X X X

T 6

1 2 3

V10 BLACK

181

PPS

Page 171: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

I14

A9

B11

II14 II114

IF IH

SOL+ SOL- E

II18II123II12

13 2

5 461

7 5

Y

Y P

Y

PW

-G

W-

L

W-B

LG-

B

LG-

R

BR

RYL-R

Y

Y

B-R

1

PPS ECU

SPEEDOMETER[COMB. METER]ODO AND TRIP

V10VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 1(COMBINATION METER)

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

SPD B

P 4

I14

I14

TELL

TALE

LIG

HT

RH

T 6

A10A11 2 6

BC10 , C12A

L-R Y R

L-R

BR

L- R

PPS SOLENOIDP 1

I 8

BR

BR

1 2

W-G

W-L

( 2JZ

-GT

E)

( 2JZ

-GT

E)

( 2JZ

-GE

)

( 2JZ

-GE

)

10AGAUGE

1E12

10AECU- IG

1E17

182

PPS

Page 172: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

183

THE PPS (HYDRAULIC REACTION TYPE) CONTROLS THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE APPLIED TO THE HYDRAULICREACTION CHAMBER IN THE GEAR BOX CONTROL UNIT USING THE PPS ECU, TO CHANGE THE STEERING FORCEAND PROVIDE OPTIMUM STEERING FEELING AT ANY VEHICLE SPEEDS AND UNDER ANY STEERING CONDITIONS.

(PPS OPERATION)WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON THE STARTING CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE ECU-IG FUSE TO TERMINAL4 OF THE PPS ECU. THE PPS ECU MONITORS VEHICLE SPEED, INPUT SIGNAL TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE ECU.WHEN THE VEHICLE SPEED IS LOW, THE PPS ECU SENDS A HIGHER-CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE ECU TERMINAL 1 OF THE SOLENOID VALVE TERMINAL 2 TERMINAL 2 OF THE ECU TERMINAL 6 GROUND, INCREASING THE SOLENOID VALVE OPENING ANGLE TO PROVIDE COMFORTABLE STEERINGOPERATION. WHEN THE VEHICLE SPEED IS HIGH, THE PPS ECU DECREASES THE SOLENOID VALVE OPENINGANGLE BY REDUCING THE CURRENT TO THE VALVE TO PROVIDE RESPONSIVE STEERING FEELING.

P1 PPS SOLENOID1-2 : APPROX. 7.7 Ω (25 C, 77 F)

P4 PPS ECU4-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION6-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C10 A 28 P1 27 (2JZ-GE)V10

25 (2JZ-GTE)

C12 B 28 P4 29V10

27 (2JZ-GE)

P1 25 (2JZ-GTE) T6 29

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IF 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IH 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I8 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE I14 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 173: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

3

4

SHIFT LOCK

SHIFT LOCKSOLENOID

46

215

IE

KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID[UNLOCK WARNING SW]

ACC IG STP

KLS+ E

L- R

L

G- W

G

G- R

V

W-B

W-B

W-B

G-

W

B-R

L-R

SHIFT LOCK ECU

U 1

S 7

W

1

2

STOP LIGHTSW

S11

W- B

P1

P

P2

SLS-

SLS+

4

1

3

1

1K12

1J1

CONTROL SW

2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

1I14 1I9 1I10

15ACIG

10AECU- IG

15ASTOP

184

SHIFT LOCK

Page 174: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

185

WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED TO ACC POSITION THE CURRENT FROM THE CIG FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL5 OF THE SHIFT LOCK ECU, IN THE ON POSITION, THE CURRENT FROM THE ECU-IG FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 1OF THE ECU.

1. SHIFT LOCK MECHANISMWITH THE IGNITION SW ON, WHEN A SIGNAL THAT THE BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED (STOP LIGHT SW ON) AND ASIGNAL THAT THE SHIFT LEVER IS PUT IN “ P” POSITION (CONTINUITY BETWEEN P1 AND P OF THE SHIFT LOCKCONTROL SW) IS INPUT TO THE ECU, THE ECU OPERATES AND CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE ECU TERMINAL ‘SLS+’ OF THE SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID SOLENOID TERMINAL ‘SLS-’ TERMINAL 4 OF THE ECU GROUND. THIS CAUSES THE SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID TO TURN ON (PLATE STOPPER DISENGAGES) AND THESHIFT LEVER CAN SHIFT INTO POSITION OTHER THAN THE “ P” .

2. KEY INTERLOCK MECHANISMWITH THE IGNITION SW ON OR ACC POSITION, WHEN THE SHIFT LEVER IS PUT IN “ P” POSITION (NO CONTINUITYBETWEEN P2 AND P OF SHIFT LOCK CONTROL SW), THE CURRENT FLOWING FROM TERMINAL 6 OF THE ECU KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID IS CUT OFF. THIS CAUSES THE KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID TO TURN OFF (LOCKLEVER DISENGAGES FROM LOCK POSITION) AND THE IGNITION KEY CAN BE TURNED FROM ACC TO LOCKPOSITION.

S7 SHIFT LOCK ECU5-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION1-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION4-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY2-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED

S11 STOP LIGHT SW2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

S7 29 S11 29 U1 29

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1I

1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K( )

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

1 2

X 4

5 6

1 2

S 7 S 1 1 B L U E

3 4

U 1

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 175: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

7. 5ADOME

2

IF310

I 8

A

A

5 22

431

2

A

L- R

W-B

G-O

G-O

G-O

RL-R

L-R

W-B

L-R

R

IH

W-B

CLOCKC 8CIGARETTE

LIGHTER

C 6

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

J 1

15ACIG

1E2

1E11

1B5

10APANEL

1I3

1

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

186

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND CLOCK

Page 176: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

187

C6 CIGARETTE LIGHTER2-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION1-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

C8 CLOCK2-GROUND : ALWAYS 12 VOLTS (POWER FOR CLOCK)5-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION

(POWER FOR INDICATION)3-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

C6 28 C8 28 J1 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1I 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IH 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I8 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

X 2 3 4 5

C 8 G R A Y

AA A A

A A A A

(H I N T : S E E P A G E 7 )

J 1

1

2

C 6

SERVICE HINTS

Page 177: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

IE

ID112 ID111 ID110 IL115 IL114 IL16

I 5

8

2 1 7 6 3 5

LG- R

BR- B

LG-

R

BR

-B

LG-B

BR

-Y

LG

W-B

W-B LG LG-

B

LG-R

LG-R

BR

-Y

BR

-B

LG

LG-

B

LG-R

LG-R

BR

-Y

BR

-B

W-B

GR

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR SWR 7

REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR LHR16 R17

REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR RH

7. 5ARAD NO. 2

1E10

M M M M

M+ MVMH

5 3 4 4 5 3

MH MV M+

B

MLH MLV M+E MRH MRV

OP

ER

ATI

ON

SW

SE

LEC

T S

W

RH RHLHLH

UPLEFT

LEFTUP

RIGHT DOWN

RIGHTDOWN

1J1

1E18

188

REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR

Page 178: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

189

R7 REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR SW8-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION

5-2 : CONTINUITY WITH THE OPERATION SW AT LEFT OR UP POSITION8-5 : CONTINUITY WITH THE OPERATION SW AT RIGHT OR DOWN POSITION

2-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

R7 29 R16 30 R17 30

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1(LEFT KICK PANEL)

1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

ID1 36 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IL1 38 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I5 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

1 2 3

X 5 6 7 8

4 53 4 53

R 7 R 1 6 R 1 7

SERVICE HINTS

Page 179: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

IC26

BQ11

MM2 1

BQ12

BI

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

134

2

L-W

L-W

L-W

L

L-B

W-B

W-

B

POWER SEAT CONTROL SW (DRIVER’ S SEAT)P11

P12POWER SEAT MOTOR(DRIVER’ S SEAT SLIDE CONTROL)

RECLINING MOTOR

R-W

W-B

30ADOOR

1H15

2

1

FR

ON

T

RE

AR

FR

ON

T

RE

AR

190

POWER SEAT

Page 180: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

191

P11 POWER SEAT CONTROL SW (DRIVER’S SEAT)2-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS1-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

P11 31 P12 31

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1H 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

BQ1 42 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND SEAT WIRE (UNDER THE FRONT LH SEAT)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

B1 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

1

3

2

4

1 2

P11 P12

SERVICE HINTS

Page 181: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

I11 I11

B 9 I24

BQ14

IC16

3 4

1 2

3 4

1 2

2 2

1

BQ12

BIIG IG

Y- R

Y- R

B

B

Y-R Y

Y-R B

Y-R B

L

W-BL

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

B

1

4 6 2

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

Y

IC17

BQ13

BB

S 6SEAT HEATER SW

SE

AT

HE

ATE

R( D

RIV

ER

’S

SE

AT)

SE

AT

HE

AT

ER

( FR

ON

T P

AS

SE

NG

ER

’S

SE

AT)

S12

S13

SE

AT

HE

ATE

R R

ELA

Y( D

RIV

ER

’S

SE

AT

)

S14

SE

AT

HE

ATE

R R

ELA

Y( F

RO

NT

PA

SS

EN

GE

R’

S S

EA

T)

S15

15ASEAT- HTR

1H16

1

LH RH

192

SEAT HEATER (CANADA)

Page 182: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

193

S6 SEAT HEATER SW4-GROUND ; APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION1-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

S6 29 S13 31 S15 31

S12 31 S14 31

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1H 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IC1 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

BQ1 42 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND SEAT WIRE (UNDER THE FRONT LH SEAT)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IG 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I1138 COWL WIRE

B9 42 SEAT WIRE

I2438 COWL WIRE

1 2 4 6 1 2 1 2

S 6 B L A C K S 1 4 S 1 5S 1 3 B L U ES 1 2 B L U E

1 2

3 4

1 2

3 4

SERVICE HINTS

Page 183: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1

2

2

1

SEAT BELTWARNING LIGHT[TELLTALELIGHT RH]

T 6

Y

W-B

IE BI

R-B

R-B

YW

-B

DOOR COURTESYSW LH

D10

2

3

I 7

IC215

W-B

W-B

W-B

B-W

W-B

16

1

R

R

1B5

1J1 1C12 1I161I15

INTEGRATION RELAY

8 65

1 7

10

1K12

1E1

Y-

9

1E122

7. 5ADOME

10AGAUGE

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

2

1

UNLOCKWARNING SW

BUCKLESW LH

B 6U 1

194

UNLOCK AND SEAT BELT WARNING

Page 184: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

195

CURRENT ALWAYS FLOWS TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE INTEGRATION RELAY THROUGH DOME FUSE.1. SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEMWHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON, CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL 7 OF THEINTEGRATION RELAY. AT THE SAME TIME, CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 9 OF THE RELAY FROM THE GAUGEFUSE THROUGH THE SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT. THIS CURRENT ACTIVATES THE INTEGRATION RELAY ANDCURRENT FLOWING THROUGH THE WARNING LIGHT FLOW FROM TERMINAL 9 OF THE RELAY → TERMINAL 10 →GROUND, CAUSING THE WARNING LIGHT TO LIGHT UP. A BUCKLE SW OFF SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 8 OFTHE RELAY, THE CURRENT FLOWING TO TERMINAL 7 OF THE RELAY FLOWS THROUGH TERMINAL 10 → GROUNDAND THE SEAT BELT WARNING BUZZER SOUNDS FOR APPROX. 4-8 SECONDS. HOWEVER, IF THE SEAT BELT ISPUT ON DURING THIS PERIOD (WHILE THE BUZZER IS SOUNDING), SIGNAL INPUT TO TERMINAL 8 OF RELAYSTOPS AND THE CURRENT FLOW FROM TERMINAL 7 OF THE RELAY → TERMINAL 10 → GROUND IS CUT,CAUSING THE BUZZER TO STOP.

2. UNLOCK WARNING SYSTEMWITH THE IGNITION KEY INSERTED IN THE KEY CYLINDER (UNLOCK SW ON), THE IGNITION SW STILL OFF ANDDRIVER’S DOOR OPENS (DOOR COURTESY SW ON), WHEN A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 6 OF THE RELAY, THEINTEGRATION RELAY OPERATES, CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 7 OF THE RELAY → TERMINAL 10 →GROUND AND UNLOCK WARNING BUZZER SOUNDS.

B6 BUCKLE SW LH1-2 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT BELT IN USE

D10 DOOR COURTESY SW LH3-2 : CLOSED WITH THE LH DOOR OPEN

U1 UNLOCK WARNING SW2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER

INTEGRATION RELAY10-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

6-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN5-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER8-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT BELT IN USE9-GROUND : 0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND BUCKLE SW OFF1-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS

: PARTS LOCATIONCODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

B6 28 T6 29D10 30 U1 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1C 20 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1I1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1K

( )

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESSCODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATIONIE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTSI7 38 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 185: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

196

UNLOCK AND SEAT BELT WARNING

1 22 3

1

X X 1 6 X

B 6 D 1 0 T 6 U 1

21

Page 186: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1 2 X X

10 X X 16 X X

X

X1 32 2 3

C14 R15 W 1BLACK BLAC K

203

REAR WIPER AND WASHER

Page 187: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

IC21

BM15

BO14

IC213 IC24

BM14 BM13

BO12 BO15

IB2

1M

2 3

IE

L LG

L

L L

LL

L

LG

LG-R

LG-

B

W-

B

LG-B

LG-R

LG-R

LG-B

LG-R

LG-B

W-B

W-

B

L

2 1 10 16

3 2

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SWC14

WASHER MOTORW 1

TOFRONT WIPER MOTOR

REAR WIPER MOTOR AND RELAYR15

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

E 9 : 2JZ- GTEE21 : 2JZ- GE

20AWIPER

1H5 1A1

1J1

1K12

M

R L Y

1

LS C1

LM +B SM

LM L SM

+B

REAR WIPER RELAY

REAR WIPERMOTOR

L C1

B

WASHER1

OFF

INT

ON

WASHER2

[COMB. SW]

204

REAR WIPER AND WASHER

Page 188: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

205

WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON, CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE WASHER MOTOR, TERMINAL 1OF THE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND RELAY THROUGH THE WIPER FUSE.

1. REAR WIPER NORMAL OPERATIONWITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWING TOTERMINAL 1 OF THE REAR WIPER RELAY FLOWS TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE RELAY → TERMINAL 1 OF THE REARWIPER AND WASHER SW → TERMINAL 16 → TO GROUND. THUS, THE RELAY COIL IS ACTIVATED AND THECURRENT TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE RELAY FLOWS TO → TERMIANL LH → TERMINAL LH OF THE REAR WIPERMOTOR → MOTOR → TO GROUND AND CAUSES THE MOTOR TO OPERATE THE WIPER.

2. REAR WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATIONWHEN THE IGNITION SW IS ON AND THE REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW IS TURNED TO INT POSITION, CURRENTFLOWING TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND RELAY FLOWS TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE RELAY →TERMINAL 10 OF THE REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND.THIS CAUSES THE MOTOR TO OPERATE (THE POINT CHANGES) AND THE INTERMITTENT CIRCUIT OF THE RELAYOPERATES. INTERMITTENT OPERATION OF THE CIRCUIT IS CONTROLLED BY THE CHANGING AND DISCHARGINGOF THE CONDENSER INSTALLED INSIDE THE RELAY.

3. WASHER OPERATIONWITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND THE REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW TURNED TO ON POSITION, WHENTHE WIPER SW IS TURNED FURTHER, THE CURRENT FLOWING TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE WASHER MOTOR FLOWSTO TERMINAL 3 OF THE MOTOR → TERMINAL 2 OF THE REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW → TERMINAL 16 → TOGROUND, SO THAT THE WASHER MOTOR ROTATES AND THE WINDOW WASHER EJECTS THE SPRAY, ONLY WHILETHE SWITCH IS FULLY TURNED.WHEN THE WIPER SW IS OFF AND THEN TURNED TO WASHER ON (WIPER OFF SIDE), ONLY THE WASHEROPERATES.

W1 WASHER MOTOR2-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION3-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE WASHER SW TURNED ON

R15 REAR WIPER MOTOR AND RELAY1-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION2-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE REAR WIPER SW AT INT POSITION3-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE REAR WIPER SW AT ON POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGEC14 28

W125 (2JZ-GTE)

R15 30W1

27 (2JZ-GE)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)1A 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1K

( )

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB2 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LET KICK PANEL)

IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

BM1 40 BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT SIDE OF PACKAGE TRAY TRIM)

BO1 40 BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE (BACK DOOR UPPER LEFT)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

E9 32 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE E21 34 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

SYSTEM OUTLINE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 189: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

197

SRS

NOTICE: When inspecting or repairing the SRS, perform the operation in accordance with the followingprecautionary instructions and the procedure and precautions in the Repair Manual for the applicable model year.

Malfunction symptoms of the supplemental restraint system are difficult to confirm, so the diagnostic troublecodes become the most important source of information when troubleshooting.When troubleshooting the supplemental restraint system, always inspect the diagnostic trouble codes beforedisconnecting the battery.

Work must be started after 90 seconds from the time the Ignition SW is set to the “LOCK” position and thenegative (-) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery.(The supplemental restraint system is equipped with a back-up power source so that if work is started within 90seconds of disconnecting the negative (-) terminal cable of the battery, the SRS may be activated.)When the negative (-) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery, memory of the clock and audio systemswill be cancelled. So before starting work, make a record of the contents memorized by each memory system.When work is finished, reset the clock and audio system as before and adjust the clock.To avoid erasing the memory of each memory system, never use a back-up power supply from outside thevehicle.

When removing the steering wheel pad or handling a new steering wheel pad, keep the pad upper surface facingupward. Also, lock the lock lever of the twin lock type connector at the rear of the pad and take care not todamage the connector.(Storing the pad with its metallic surface up may lead to a serious accident if the SRS inflates for some reason.)

Always store a removed or new front passenger airbag assembly with the airbag door facing up. Storing theairbag assembly with the airbag door facing down could cause a serious accident if the airbag inflates.

Store the steering wheel pad where the ambient temperature remains below 93C (200F), without high humidityand away from electrical noise.

Never use SRS parts from another vehicle. When replacing SRS parts, replace them with new parts.

Never disassemble and repair the steering wheel pad, front passenger airbag assembly, airbag sensor assembly.

Before repairing the body, remove the airbag sensors if during repair shocks are likely to be applied to thesensors due to vibration of the body or direct tapping with tools or other parts.

Do not reuse a steering wheel pad.After evaluating whether the airbag sensor assembly is damaged or not, decide whether or not to reuse it.(See the Repair Manual for the method for evaluating the airbag sensor assembly.)

When troubleshooting the supplemental restraint system, use a high-impedance (Min. 10 kΩ/V) tester.

The wire harness of the supplemental restraint system is integrated with the cowl wire harness assembly. Thevehicle wiring harness exclusively for the airbag system is distinguished by corrugated yellow tubing, as are theconnectors.

Do not measure the resistance of the airbag squibs.(It is possible this will deploy the airbag and is very dangerous.)

If the wire harness used in the supplemental restraint system is damaged, replace the whole wire harnessassembly.

INFORMATION LABELS (NOTICES) are attached to the periphery of the SRS components. Follow theinstructions on the notices.

Page 190: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

The SRS has connectors which possess the functions described below:

1. SRS ACTIVATION PREVENTION MECHANISMEach connector contains a short spring plate. When the connector is disconnected, the short spring plate automaticallyconnects the power source and grounding terminals of thesquib to preclude a potential difference between the terminals.

2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION CHECK MECHANISMThis mechanism is designed to electrically checks if connectors are connected correctly and completely.The electrical connection check mechanism is designed sothat the disconnection detection pin connects with the diagnosis terminals when the connector housing lock is in tolocked condition.

198

SRS

Page 191: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

3. CONNECTOR TWIN-LOCK MECHANISMWith this mechanism connectors (male and female connectors) are locked by two locking devices to increaseconnection reliability. If the primary lock is incomplete, ribsinterfere and prevent the secondary lock.

199

Page 192: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

15

2

II112 II121 IF12 IF111

I14

I14

I 5

15 16 5 8

7 6 3 2 10 9

D+ D- P+ P- E1 E2

AB TC AB TC

5 11 12 4

P- B

B- Y B

P- B

B-

O

GR B

W-R

B-Y

(*1

)

P-B

(*1

)

B R

B

P-

B

B

P-

B

B

P-B

SRS WARNINGLIGHT[TELLTALELIGHT RH]

T 6

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 1

DATA LINKCONNECTOR 2

D 1 D 5

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

IE

1 2

1 2

A27 A28

IG2 ACC LA TC

AIRBAG SQUIB(STEERING WHEEL PAD)

AIRBAG SQUIB(FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY)

AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY

W-B

R W L Y

W-

B

W-

B

A34

B (

*2)

R (

*2)

*2 : 2JZ- GE*1 : 2JZ- GTE

7. 5AIGN

15ACIG

10AECU- B

1G10 1G6 1E13

1E

3

1E4

1G

7

1G9

1G3 1G4

1J1

SPIRALCABLE

200

SRS

Page 193: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

201

THE SRS IS A DRIVER AND PASSENGER PROTECTION DEVICE WHICH HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL ROLE TO THE SEATBELTS.WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED TO ACC OR ON, THE CURRENT FROM THE CIG FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 16OF THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY. ONLY WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS ON DOES THE CURRENT FROM THE IGNFUSE FLOW TO TERMINAL 15 OF THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY.IF AN ACCIDENT OCCURS WHILE DRIVING, DECELERATION CAUSED BY A FRONTAL IMPACT IS DETECTED BY THESENSOR IN THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY, AND WHEN THE FRONTAL IMPACT EXCEEDS A SET LEVEL (WHENTHE SAFING SENSOR BUILT INTO THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY IS ON, THE FLOOR SENSOR BUILT INTO THEAIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY IS ON AND THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY IS ON), THE CURRENT FROM THE CIG ORTHE IGN FUSE FLOWS THROUGH THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY TO TERMINALS 7 AND 3 OF THE AIRBAGSENSOR ASSEMBLY TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE AIRBAG SQUIB → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINALS 6 AND 2 OF THEAIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY → THE FLOOR SENSOR BUILT INTO THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY → TERMINAL 9,TERMINAL 10 OR BODY GROUND → GROUND. WHEN THE SAFING SENSOR BUILT INTO THE AIRBAG SENSORASSEMBLY IS ON, AND FLOOR SENSOR BUILT INTO THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY IS ON, ONE OF THEABOVE-MENTIONED CIRCUITS IS ACTIVATED SO THAT THE CURRENT FLOWS TO THE AIRBAG SQUIBS, CAUSINGIT TO OPERATE.THE AIRBAG STORED INSIDE THE STEERING WHEEL PAD IS INSTANTANEOUSLY EXPANDED TO SOFTEN THESHOCK TO A DRIVER.SIMULTANEOUSLY, THE AIRBAG STORED INSIDE THE PASSENGER’S INSTRUMENT PANEL IS INSTANTANEOUSLYEXPANDED TO SOFTEN THE SHOCK TO A PASSENGER.

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A27 28D1

24 (2JZ-GTE) T6 29

A28 28D1

26 (2JZ-GE)

A34 28 D5 28

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1G20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1J20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I5 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE I14 38 INSTRUMENT WIRE

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Page 194: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

202

SRS

1 2 1 2

X 5 X

X X X 11

X X

X

4X

12

XXX

2

X X 15 X

A27 A28 C 5 D 1

D 5 T 6

YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW BLACK

DARK GRAY

XXX

X

XX

X X

X XX

X

A B

8X 2 3 X 5 6 7

9 10 X X X X 15 16

Page 195: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

11

IGBI

22

11

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

TENSION REDUCERSOLENOID RH

TENSION REDUCERSOLENOID LH

BUCKLE SWRH

T12T11

B 7

B-

R

B-

R

B-W

B-W

W-B

W-B

( 2JZ

-GTE

)

B-

R

( 2JZ

-GE

)

1C6

10AECU- IG

1I9 1K13

22

BUCKLE SWLH

B 6

206

ELECTRIC TENSION REDUCER

Page 196: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

207

B6 BUCKLE SW LH1-2 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT BELT IN USE

B7 BUCKLE SW RH1-2 : CLOSED WITH THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT BELT IN USE

T11, T12 TENSION REDUCER SOLENOID LH, RH1-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

B6 28 T11 30

B7 28 T12 30

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1C 20 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1I20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IG 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

BI 40 LEFT QUARTER PILLAR

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

B 6 B 7 T 1 1 T 1 2

SERVICE HINTS

Page 197: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

2 5

1 3

1

2

1

2

4 4

4 4

BM16

IF13

IL113BO11

IF18

IC25

IL116

I 4

I 6

IEIH

A

A

B B

B

W- L

W- B

W-B

W-B

OO

Y

B

BB L-R

L-R

BB

L-R

L-R

W-B

W-B

W-B

W-

B

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERRELAY

J 1

N 2NOISEFILTER

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

A/C AMPLIFIER

MIR

RO

RH

EA

TER

RH

[RE

MO

TE C

ON

TR

OL

MIR

RO

R R

H]

MIR

RO

RH

EA

TER

LH

[RE

MO

TE C

ON

TR

OL

MIR

RO

R L

H]

R17

R16

GND

RDEFGR

A1

A18

A9A3 B4

R-W P-

B

10 7

H13REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER SW[HEATER CONTROL SW]

SW1SW5

AA13 , A14B

W-

B

I14

L-R

TO

DIO

DE

( ID

LE-

UP

)L-

R

10AGAUGE

30ADEFOG

1H12 1K7

3

4

10AMIR- HTR

1C7 1H4 1D1

1J1

1D10

1

1

B1

BB

-W

NOISEFILTER

CR18 , R19BREARWINDOWDEFOGGER

N 3 A

NOISEFILTER

C

208

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND MIRROR HEATER

Page 198: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

CR19

4

X X 9 18

ORANGE

X X

AA14

3 X

7 X 10 X X

AA A A

A A A A

(HINT : SEE PAGE 7)

J 1

1 1 2

R16, R17

B ORANGEA13 H13 ORANGE

AN 2, N 3

1 1

B GREENR18

X

X

209

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

(4) 3- (4) 5 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE REAR WINDOW SW [HEATER CONTROL SW] ON

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A13 B 28 N 2 29 R18 B 30

A14 A 28 N 3 A 30 R19 C 30

H13 29 R16 30

J 1 29 R17 30

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)4 23 R/B NO. 4 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1C 20 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1D 20 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL

1H1J 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IC2 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IL1 38 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

BM1 40 BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT SIDE OF PACKAGE TRAY TRIM)

BO1 40 BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE (BACK DOOR UPPER LEFT)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IE 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IH 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I 4 38 COWL WIRE I14 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

I 6 38 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 199: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

20ARADNO. 1

2

IB18

I 2

I15 I15

IE17 IE16

M1 2

IH

A

A

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

GR

L- Y

L- Y

GR

P- L

P- L

B- R

B- R

G

IF11

L-Y

L-Y

GR

B-

P-L

B-RL-Y

L-Y

L-Y

R G

R G

W-

BW

-B

L- Y

(*1)

L- Y

(*2)

1 4 5 8 7

2 3

2

(*1)

(*1)

(*2)

(*2)

(*1)

(*2)

(*1)

(*2)

A30AUTO ANTENNA CONTROL RELAY

A33AUTO ANTENNA MOTOR

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

J 1

6

1

G ( *

GR

(* 2)

GR

P-L

B-

R

B-

R

( *1)

( *2)

( *1)

( *2)

10AECU- IG

7. 5ARADNO. 2

1E17 1E10 1H3

RR R 1)

+B IG ACC AMP ANT GND

UP DOWN

- +

210

AUTO ANTENNA

Page 200: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

B8A8

B9A1

B3A3

B4A4

B10

B3

B9

B1

A6

A3

I16

IH18 IH19

IF

IF311

A4

GR

L- Y

L- Y

GR

P- L

P- L

B- R

B- R

(*1)

(*1)

(*2)

(*2)

(*1)

(*2)

(*1)

(*2)

B-R

B-R

P-L

P-L GR V

L-Y LG

P-L

P-L

BR

GR

(*1)

L- Y

(*1)

P- L

(*1)

V

(*1)

LG

(*1)

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

( *2)

( *1)

( *2)

( *1)

( *2)

( *1)

( *2)

( *1)

( *1)

( *1)

ACC

+B1

AMP+

OUT

OUT

GND

(*1)(*2)

GND

BR

STEREO POWERAMPLIFIER

RADIO AND PLAYER

BS 8 , S 9A

AR 4 , R 6B

ANT AMP ACC B

211

*2 : W/O STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER*1 : W/ STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER

Page 201: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 81 2

AA A A

A A A A

3 4

8 9

1 3 4

8 X

X X

3 4 X 6

3X1

X X 9 10

BR 4

AR 6 AS 8 BS 9

A30 A33 J 1GRAY

(HINT : SEE PAGE 7)

(W/ WOOFER) BLACK

3X1

X X 9 10

BS 9(W/O WOOFER)

212

AUTO ANTENNA

A30 AUTO ANTENNA CONTROL RELAY1-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS4-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION5-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION6-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A30 28 R 4 B 29 S 9 B 29

A33 30 R 6 A 29

J 1 29 S 8 A 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB1 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IH1 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND CONSOLE BOX WIRE (UNDER THE INSTRUMENT PANEL BRACE RH)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IF 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IH 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I 2 38 COWL WIRE I16 38 CONSOLE BOX WIRE

I15 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 202: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

213

MEMO

Page 203: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

20ARADNO. 1

2

IB18

IH22 IH26 IH21 IH23

IE110 IE111 IF32 IF33

A3 A6 D6 D2 D1A3 A6 C11 C4 C10

A4 C2 C1 C8

A4 D3 D9

IH12 IH11 IH15 IH32 IH31

C9

D4

IH16

I 5 I 5 I19 I19

IF311ID12 ID18 IL15 IL11 IE19 IE113

1 21 21 2

1 2 1 2

IF

1 12 2

LG-R

LG-

R

LG-

BLG

-BLLG

LLGVPP V

LLGVP

LG-

R

LG-

BLLGVP LVP LG

BR

BR

WRYBB Y R W

WRYB

L-Y

L-Y

GR

GND FL+ FL- FR+ FR- WF+ WF-

C14

D5C3 (*1)

(*2)

(*1)(*2)D8

C5

ACC +B1 RL+ RL- RR+ RR-

STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER

REAR SPEAKER LH REAR SPEAKER RHR14R13

F10 F11

F13F12 W 2FRONT DOOR SPEAKER LH

FRONT TWEETER (SPEAKER) LH

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER RH

FRONT TWEETER (SPEAKER) RH

WOOFER (SPEAKER)

BS 8 , S 9 , S10 , A C

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

D

2

1

7. 5ARADNO. 2

1H3

214

RADIO AND PLAYER

Page 204: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

IH18 IH19

I16

B1B3B10 B9B14B13B6B5B4B12B11

B1B3B9B10B14B13B6B5B4B12B11

AMPBACCR. RR. LF. RF. LMUTEBEEPFADE

AMP+OUTOUTGNDR. RR. LF. RF. LMUTEBEEPFADE

143151476512 1311

GND

ANT

(* 1)

(* 2)

ANT AMP

LGVBRWRLYGB

P-

LP

-L

B-

RB

-R

P-

LP

-L

A30

R 6

AUTO ANTENNACONTROL RELAY

RADIO AND PLAYER

STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER

BS 8 , S 9A

(SH

IEL

DE

D)

( SH

IEL

DE

D)

7 8

8

C, S10 ,

D

215

(w/STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER) * 2 : W/O WOOFER (SPEAKER)* 1 : W/ WOOFER (SPEAKER)

Page 205: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

216

RADIO AND PLAYER

S8 (A) STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER(A) 6, (A) 2-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS

(A) 3-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON OR ACC POSITION(A) 4-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A30 28 R6 29S10

C 29

F10 29 R13 30S10

D 29

F11 29 R14 30 W2 30

F12 30 S8 A 29

F13 30 S9 B 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1H 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB1 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

ID1 36 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IH1

IH2 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND CONSOLE BOX WIRE (UNDER THE INSTRUMENT PANEL BRACE RH)

IH3( )

IL1 38 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IF 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I5 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE I19 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

I16 38 CONSOLE BOX WIRE

SERVICE HINTS

Page 206: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

217

(w/STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER)*1 : W/ WOOFER (SPEAKER)*2 : W/O WOOFER (SPEAKER)

7 8

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1 3 4 5 6 7

8 X 11 12 13 14 15

1

2

1

2

X X

3 4 X 6

643X1

X X 9 10 11 12 14

5

13

21 3 4 5 X X

8 9 10 11 X X 14 X X

1 2 3 4

5 6 X 8 9 X 1

2

DS10C BLACKS1 0

BS 9AS 8

A30 F10 F11 F12 F13 R 6

R13 R14

W 2

GR AY

(* 1)

643X1

X X 9 10 11 12 14

5

13

BS 9(* 2 )BLACK

(* 1) (* 2)

Page 207: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

20ARADNO. 1

2

IB18

IF11

IE110 IE111 IF32 IF33

A4 A3 B2 B6 B1 B3 A8 A9

A7 A2 A6 A1 A5

GND FL+ FL- FR+ FR-

I 5 I 5 I19 I19

1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2

IF

ID12 ID18 IL15 IL11

LLLGLGVVPP

P V LG LLLGVP

BR

YB

L -Y

2 1 21

7 8

ANT AMP

GR

B Y R W

R W

B-

R

P-

L

L -Y

L-Y

REAR SPEAKER LH AUTO ANTENNACONTROL RELAY

R13 A30

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

AMPANTRR-RR+RL-RL+ACCB

RADIO AND PLAYER

REAR SPEAKER RHR14

BR 4 , R 5A

F12FRONT DOOR SPEAKER LH

F13FRONT DOOR SPEAKER RH

F10 F11FRONT TWEETER(SPEAKER) LH

FRONT TWEETER(SPEAKER) RH

2

1

7. 5ARADNO. 2

1E10

218

RADIO AND PLAYER

Page 208: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

219

(w/o STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER

R4(A) RADIO AND PLAYER(A) 4-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS(A) 3-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON OR ACC POSITION(A) 7-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A30 28 F12 30 R5 B 29

F10 29 F13 30 R13 30

F11 29 R4 A 29 R14 30

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)

2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB1 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

ID1 36 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IL1 38 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

IF 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I5 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE I19 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

7 81

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

1 2

3 6 1

2

1

2

GRAYA30 AR 4

BR 5

F10 F11 F12 F13

R13 R14

X

SERVICE HINTS

Page 209: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

15AHEAD (RH)(USA)

2

5

6

1

IF213IF16

IB12

IF21 IF24 IF114

IE11 IE12 IE13

BP15 BP13 BP11

II124II119

A2 A16 A15 B6

A7 A6 A3 A9 A8 B8 A10 A11 A13

II129

SLI

P

CR

UIS

E

HIG

H B

EA

M

WA

TER

TE

MP

.

FU

EL

FU

EL

TA

CH

O

IJ2

13

IE EC IF

I 3

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

IJ2

9

EXT

I 4

E10

C 9

P 2

COMBINATION METER

FROM HEADLIGHT HI RH

FUEL SENDER

IGNITER

EN

GIN

E C

ON

TR

OL

MO

DU

LE

CLUTCH STARTSW

PA

RK

/NE

UT

RA

L P

OS

ITIO

NS

W

Y-G

Y-B BR

BR

Y-B

Y-G

BR

Y-R

R-

L

OW Y-G

Y-B BR

B-W

B-W

B-W

BR

BR

Y-L

(*3

)

R-L

W-B

W O

TO T

HR

OTT

LE E

CU

TO C

RU

ISE

CO

NT

RO

LE

CU

TO D

IMM

ER

SW

[CO

MB

. S

W]

EN

GIN

E C

OO

LA

NT

TE

MP

. S

EN

DE

R

LH RH

TU

RN

B

(A/T)

B

(M/T)

B- W

(M/T)

R- W

(*1)B- W

G-B

G-Y

R-

WR

-W

R-W

G-B

G-YB-W

B

B

BR

BR

( *4)

( *3)

( *1)

BU

LBC

HE

CK

RE

LAY

1 2 3

4 16

FROM TURN SIGNAL SW[COMB. SW]

1

2

( *2)

E 4

CC10 , C11 , C 1 2B A

( *3)

1

I 4

B

( *3)

Y-R

(*4

)

(A/T)

( A/T

)

( A/T

)

( *2)

TACO

F14

2

P

N

1E19 1E14

1H11 1H7

7. 5AST

1K4

220

COMBINATION METER

Page 210: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

C4 C10 C6 C7 C8 C11

A1 C13 B7 B5 B4 A14 B2 B1

I 2

I 2

I14

A

A

EB IH EC

2

11

II133

II134

2

1

IB214

IF115

D 6

P 5 J 1

E 7

BR

AK

E F

LUID

LE

VE

LW

AR

NIN

G S

W

DIODE

ENGINE OILLEVEL SENSOR

JUN

CTI

ON

CO

NN

EC

TOR

PARKING BRAKESW

DA

YTI

ME

RU

NN

ING

LIG

HT

RE

LAY

( MA

IN)

BRK

PKB

DELAY

COMBINATION METER

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

G-

W

R-

B

L

G-R

L-Y

G-B

BR

-W

W- B

W-B G

L-W

Y-G

R-Y

R-G

Y-G

GB

R

W-B

W-B

BR

-W

BR

-WB

-W

BR

-W

BR

-W

R-W

W-

B

Y-G

( *3)

L- W

R- Y

Y- G

R- G

BR- W

BR- W

B- W

B- W

G- O

G- O

BR

AK

E

P R N D 2 L

MA

STE

R

( *1)

( *2)

( *1)

( *4)

(*1 *4)

(* 1 * 3)( *2)

FROM A/T INDICATOR LIGHT SW[PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW]

1 2

18

8

B 2

CC10 , C11 , C12B A

4 4

R- W

(*3)

W-B

A

SN

OW

A5

IF19

P-G

P-G

( *3)

( *3)

TO T

HR

OTT

LE E

CU

(*2)

(*2)

1

GENERATORG 2

L

10APANEL

1I8

221

*1 : USA*2 : CANADA

*3 : 2JZ- GTE*4 : 2JZ- GE

Page 211: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

I14

I14 I14 I14

I14

SP

EE

D

II123

1E11

2

1B5

7. 5ADOME

IF310

B12C3 C1 B9

B13 C2 C12 B10 B11

II12 II18

I14

I21

I14

IF

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

TO ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

TO CRUISE CONTROL ECU

TO E

NG

INE

CO

NTR

OL

MO

DU

LE

TO R

HE

OS

TA

T

TO D

IOD

E( I

NT

ER

IOR

LIG

HT

)

IF25

II111

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 1(COMBINATION METER)

TELLTALE LIGHT RH

JUN

CTI

ON

CO

NN

EC

TOR

CO

MB

INA

TIO

N

ME

TER

MA

NU

O/D

OFF

ILLU

MIN

AT

ION

J 1

V10

T 6

B

3 2

5 10 6 7 14 11

B B

1 4 81

G-O

G-O

G-O Y Y

Y

Y

G-O

R

L-R

W-

G

P BR

R-B

R-G

RL-R

L-R R

R

W-LV

W-G

W-G

PP

P

BR

YY

R

W- G

P

P

P

P

W- G

L- R

Y- G

R- Y

L- W

R- G

Y- G

R- Y

L- W

Y Y

Y

Y

G- O

G- O

Y

P

P

R-B

CC

10,

C11

,

C

12B

A

2

I 8 : * 6I14 : *5

5

11

PPS ECUP 4

A/C AMPLIFIERA13

10AGAUGE

1E12

SPEED

SPD

ODO AND TRIP

DO

OR

222

COMBINATION METER

Page 212: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

1G9

1E4 II115 II125IE15 IF212 IF22

16 18 12 15 6 1 4 3 5 8 9

B-O

W-

R

Y-

R

V

Y-G B

B-Y

L L-B

LG-R

L

L-W

R-Y

L-B

Y-B

LG-R

W-B

W-LY

VFROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

Y- G

R- Y

L- W

Y

Y-

B

IE

1TO

IN

TE

GR

ATI

ON

RE

LAY

TO A

IRB

AG

SE

NS

OR

AS

SE

MB

LY

TO A

BS

EC

U

TO E

NG

INE

CO

NT

RO

L M

OD

UL

E

TO T

HR

OTT

LE E

CU

OIL PRESSURESW

W-B

O 2

T 5T 6

( *3)

( *3)

12

THE

FT

DE

TER

RE

NT

AN

DD

OO

R L

OC

K C

ON

TR

OL

EC

U

T13

LIGHTFAILURESENSOR

7. 5AIGN

10AECU- B

1E8 1E13

4

WRN

L 2

2 10TELLTALE LIGHT LH

OIL

LE

VE

L

AB

S

OIL

TR

AC

OF

F

SE

CU

RIT

Y

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

3 2TELLTALE LIGHT RH

SE

AT

BE

LT

RE

AR

LIG

HT

CH

RA

GE

SR

S

IND

1E18

1J1

223

*1 : USA*2 : CANADA *4 : 2JZ- GE

*3 : 2JZ- GTE *5 : 2JZ- GE M/T*6 : EXCEPT *5

Page 213: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

224

COMBINATION METER

B2 BRAK E FLUID LEVEL WARNING SW1-2 : CLOSED WITH THE FLOAT DOWN

P5 PARKING BRAK E SW1-GROUND : CLOSED WITH THE PARKING BRAKE LEVER PULLED UP

O2 OIL PRESSURE SW1-GROUND : CLOSED WITH THE OIL PRESSURE ABOVE APPROX. 20 KPA (2.8 PSI, 0.2 KG/CM2)

E4 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENDER1-GROUND : APPROX. 160-240 Ω (50 C, 122 F)

APPROX. 17.1-20.4 Ω (120 C, 288 F)E7 ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR

1-2 : CLOSED WITH THE FLOAT UP AND THE ENGINE OIL TEMP. AT BELOW APPROX. 55 C (131 F)OPEN WITH THE FLOAT DOWN AND THE ENGINE OIL TEMP. AT BELOW APPOX. 60 C (140 F)

F14 FUEL SENDER1-2 : APPROX. 3 Ω AT FUEL FULL

APPROX. 110 Ω AT FUEL EMPTYC10 (B), C12 (A) COMBINATION METER(B) 9-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION(A) 16-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ST POSITION AND THE SHIFT LEVER AT P OR N

POSITION (A/T)12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ST POSITION AND THE CLUTCH PEDAL DEPRESSED (M/T)

(A) 8-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY(A) 11-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATION

CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGEA13 28

E724 (2JZ-GTE) O2 27 (2JZ-GE)

B224 (2JZ-GTE)

E726 (2JZ-GE)

P225 (2JZ-GTE)

B226 (2JZ-GE) E10 29

P227 (2JZ-GE)

C9 28 F14 30 P4 29C10 B 28

G224 (2JZ-GTE) P5 29

C11 C 28G2

26 (2JZ-GE) T5 29C12 A 28 I4 27 T6 29

D6 28 J1 29 T13 29

E424 (2JZ-GTE) L2 30

V1025 (2JZ-GTE)

E426 (2JZ-GE) O2 25 (2JZ-GTE)

V1027 (2JZ-GE)

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

4 23 R/B NO. 4 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

1B 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1G1H1I 20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)1J

( )

1K: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

IB136 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB236 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IE1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IF136 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF236 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IJ2 38 ENGINE WIRE COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

BP1 40 FUEL GAUGE WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (LUGGAGE ROOM FRONT LH)

SERVICE HINTS

Page 214: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

225

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EB32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDEREB34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

EC32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLDEC34 (2JZ-GE)

FRONT SIDE OF INTAKE MANIFOLD

IE36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IF36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IH 36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS

I2 38 COWL WIRE I8

I3 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE I14 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

I4 38 COWL WIRE I21

1 2 1 2 13987654X21 10 11 12

13X876X4321 10 11 12 161110985X321 X 13 146 7 15

X X X 8

X X X X 18

1

X

X

X

16

X X

X

1 2 3 4AA A A B B B

A A A A B B B B B

1

B BLUEC10

C BROWNC11 AC12

B 2 C 9

D 6 E 4

F14 I 4 J 1

O 2

GRAY

GRAY GRAY E10 DARK GRAY

DARK GRAY BLACK

BLACK

(HINT : SEE PAGE 7)

1 2

E 7 GRAY

X

X X

X X

X5 6

1

P 2 P 5GRAY

11 X X X

1

X4XX X X

X 5

A13 ORANGE

G 2 BLACK

L 2 P 4 BLUE

Page 215: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

226

COMBINATION METER

1 098X65

4321

109XX65

43211 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 X 10 11 12 X 1 4 15 16 X 18

1 2 3

T 5 T 5 T 6

V10

(2JZ- GE)(2JZ - G TE)

BLAC K

X X

XX12 X

T13 OR AN GE

Page 216: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

227

MEMO

Page 217: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

228

RADIATOR FAN AND AUTOMATIC

1. HEATER BLOWER OPERATIONMANUAL BLOWER OPERATIONWHEN THE BLOWER CONTROL SW IS SET TO ANY BLOWER SPEEDS, THE A/C AMPLIFIER OPERATES AND THECURRENT TO DRIVE THE BLOWER MOTOR FLOWS FROM TERMINAL BLW OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TO TERMINAL SIOF THE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL RELAY. THE CURRENT ACTIVATES THE RELAY AND THE VOLTAGE APPLIED TOTERMINAL +B OF THE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL RELAY IS OUTPUT AT TERMINAL M+ AS THE VOLTAGE FOR THESELECTED BLOWER SPEED. THE CURRENT THEN FLOWS FROM TERMINAL M+ OF THE BLOWER MOTORCONTROL RELAY TO TERMINAL 2 TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL M- OF THE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL RELAY TERMINAL GND GROUND, AND THE BLOWER MOTOR OPERATES AT THE BLOWER SPEED SELECTED.

AUTO FUNCTIONWHEN THE AUTO SW IS TURNED ON, THE A/C AMPLIFIER CALCULATES THE REQUIRED VENT TEMPERATURE BASEON THE SET TEMPERATURE AND INPUT FROM EACH SENSOR. THEN TERMINAL BLW OF THE A/C AMPLIFIERINPUTS CURRENT TO TERMINAL SI OF THE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL RELAY IN CONFORMITY WITH THEREQUIRED VENT OUTPUT. THIS CURRENT ACTIVATES THE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL RELAY SO THAT CURRENTFLOWS FROM TERMINAL M+ OF THE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL RELAY TERMINAL 2 OF THE BLOWER MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL M- OF THE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL RELAY TERMINAL GND GROUND,ACTIVATING THE BLOWER MOTOR. THE BLOWER MOTOR THEN OPERATES AT DIFFERENT STEPS IN CONFORMITYWITH VARIABLE CURRENT FLOW OUTPUT FROM TERMINAL BLW OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TO TERMINAL SI OF HEBLOWER MOTOR CONTROL RELAY.

2. OPERATION OF AIR INLET CONTROL SERVO MOTOR(SWITCHING FROM FRESH TO RECIRC)WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM HTR FUSE TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE AIR INLETCONTROL SERVO MOTOR TERMINAL 5 TERMINAL AIR OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL GND GROUND, THE MOTOR ROTATES AND THE DAMPER STOPS AT RECIRC POSITION.(SWITCHING FROM RECIRC TO FRESH)WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM HTR FUSE TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE AIR INLETCONTROL SERVO MOTOR TERMINAL 3 TERMINAL AIF OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL GND GROUND, THE MOTOR ROTATES AND THE DAMPER STOPS AT FRESH POSITION.

3. OPERATION OF AIR VENT MODE CONTROL SERVO MOTORWITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM HTR FUSE TO TERMINAL IG OF THE A/CAMPLIFIER (SWITCHING FROM DEF TO FACE)THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL AOF OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL 1 OF THE AIR VENT MODE CONTROLSERVO MOTOR TERMINAL 2 TERMINAL AOD OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL GND GROUND. THEMOTOR ROTATES AND THE DAMPER MOVES TO FACE SIDE. WHEN THE DAMPER OPERATES WITH THE A/C SW ATFACE POSITION, THE DAMPER POSITION SIGNAL IS INPUT FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE SERVO MOTOR TO THETERMINAL TP0 OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER. AS A RESULT, CURRENT TO THE SERVO MOTOR CIRCUIT IS CUT OFF BYTHE AMPLIFIER, SO THE DAMPER STOPS AT THAT POSITION.(SWITCHING FROM FACE TO DEF)THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL AOD OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL 2 OF THE AIR VENT MODECONTROL SERVO MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL AOF OF THA A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL GND GROUND, THE MOTOR ROTATES AND THE DAMPER STOPS AT THAT POSITION.

4. OPERATION OF AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTORWHEN THE TEMPERATURE SW IS TURNED TO THE “COOL” SIDE, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL AMC OFTHE A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL 1 OF THE AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTOR MOTOR TERMINAL 2 TERMINAL AMH OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL GND GROUND AND THE MOTOR ROTATES. THEDAMPER OPENING ANGLE AT THIS TIME IS INPUT FROM TERMINAL 3 OF SERVO MOTOR TO TERMINAL TP OF THEA/C CONTROL ASSEMBLY, THIS IS USED TO DETERMINE THE DAMPER STOP POSITION AND MAINTAIN THE SETTEMPERATURE.WHEN THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SW IS TURNED TO THE “WARM” SIDE, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROMTERMINAL AMH OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL 2 OF THE AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTOR MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL AMC OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER, ROTATING THE MOTOR IN REVERSE AND SWITCHINGTHE DAMPER FROM COOL TO WARM SIDE.

SYSTEM OUTLINE

Page 218: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

229

AIR CONDITIONING

5. AIR CONDITIONING OPERATIONTHE A/C AMPLIFIER RECEIVES VARIOUS SIGNALS, I.E., THE ENGINE RPM FROM THE IGNITER, OUTLETTEMPERATURE SIGNAL FROM THE A/C THERMISTOR, COOLANT TEMPERATURE FROM THE ENGINE COOLANTTEMP. SENSOR AND THE LOCK SIGNAL FROM THE A/C COMPRESSOR, ETC.WHEN THE ENGINE IS STARTED AND THE A/C SW (HEATER CONTROL SW) IS ON, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO THE A/CAMPLIFIER. AS A RESULT, THE GROUND CIRCUIT IN A/C AMPLIFIER IS CLOSED AND CURRENT FLOWS FROM HTRFUSE TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH RELAY TERMINAL 2 TERMINAL ACMG OF THE ENGINECONTROL MODULE TERMINAL A/C TERMINAL MGC OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TERMINAL GND GROUND, TURNING THE RELAY ON, SO THAT THE A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH IS ON AND THE A/C AMPLIFIEROPERATES.AT THE SAME TIME, THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE DETECTS THE MAGNETIC CLUTCH IS ON AND THE A/CAMPLIFIER IS OPERATING AND OPENS DIRECTION TO AVOID LOWERING THE ENGINE RPM DURING A/COPERATING.WHEN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING SIGNALS ARE INPUT TO THE A/C AMPLIFIER, THE A/C AMPLIFIER OPERATES TOTURN OFF THE AIR CONDITIONING.∗ ENGINE RPM SIGNAL IS HIGH.∗ COOLANT TEMP. SIGNAL IS HIGH.∗ A SIGNAL THAT THE TEMPERATURE AT THE AIR OUTLET IS LOW.∗ A SIGNAL THAT THERE IS A LARGE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN ENGINE SPEED AND COMPRESSOR SPEED.∗ A SIGNAL THAT THE REFRIGERANT PRESSURE IS ABNORMALLY HIGH OR LOW.

Page 219: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

E 9

E 9

E 2

2 2

2 22 2 2

6 5

1 2

3

5 2

3 1

2 3

4

1 53 1

4 2

2 2 2 2

1

24

2 1

IK13 IK12

EA11

IK11

IB41

IF1

5

IF3

13

IB2

3

EB IG

A2 A3

B2 B1 A1

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

R- L

R- L

R- L

R- L

R- L

R- L

W- G

L- W

L

LII1

10L L

L- W

L

L- W

L

R-L

B

R-L

R-L

L-R

L-W

W-

B

L-R

L-R L

B BR W

-BW

-B

L

R-L

L -BL

W-B

W-B

W-B

L-R

W-

R

LL

W-G

R- L

2 2

1 1

(* 1)

(* 1)

( *1

)

50AHTR

30AFAN

RA

DIA

TO

R F

AN

RE

LAY

NO

. 2

RADIATOR FANRELAY NO. 1

HEATERRELAY

A/C

MA

GN

ET

ICC

LUT

CH

RE

LAY

A/C

SIN

GLE

PR

ES

SU

RE

SW

A/C

MA

GN

ETI

CC

LUT

CH

A 4

EN

GIN

E C

OO

LA

NT

TE

MP

. S

W

E 5

B 3BLOWER MOTOR

+B SI

M+ M- GND

BLOWER MOTORCONTROL RELAY

BB 4 , B 5A

E 9 : * 1E21 : *2

E11 : *1E26 : *2

R 2

R 3

A3

A2A 3

A

EA

E 5

W-

B

L- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

7. 5AHTR

1A5 1K2

M

230

RADIATOR FAN AND AUTOMATIC

Page 220: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

E 2

E 2

1

2

1

2

EB

A

A

I25

B9 B13 C7 B15 B6 C21B16

II131 II129

IH

EA12

L-B

L-B

L-B

L-B

W-B

W-B

W-

B

RA

DIA

TOR

FA

N M

OTO

R N

O. 2

R20

A/C

CO

ND

EN

SE

R F

AN

MO

TOR

A 2

R- L

W- G

L- W

L

L

W- B

R- L

B- W

W-G

L-R

B-W

B-WL-R

L-WLL

W-

BW- B

W- B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W- G

23 34 16

4

A

(*2)

ENGINE CONTROL MODULEE10

IGNITERI 4

JUNCTIONCONNECTOR

J 1

A/C AMPLIFIER

AA12 , A13C

GND VER1 A/C- IN BLW HR MGC IGN

EXT

(*1)

B, A14

E 2

1

2

RA

DIA

TOR

FA

N M

OTO

R N

O. 1

R 1

L- BL- B

L-B

W-B

M M M

ACMGA/C(*1)AC(*2) TACO

231

AIR CONDITIONING*1 : 2JZ- GTE*2 : 2JZ- GE

Page 221: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

IG116 IG113 IG115 IG114IF110

I25

I25

B8 B19 B20 B17 C16 C4 C10 C11 C1 C2

A1 A6 A18 A5 B6 B3 B4

A9

W- B

R- L

R- L

R-

L

R-

L

G-R G GR

G-

R

G GR

R-

LR

-L

R-L

R-L V

R-Y BR Y

BR

-W

G

W-B

2 5 3 4

R-

L

IG AIR AIF AIM/AMOUT L- RDEFL- DEF

L- F/DL- FOOT

L- B/LL- FACE

AIR INLET CONTROL SERVO MOTORA24

HEATER CONTROL SW

BH12 , H13A

A/C AMPLIFIER

AA12 , A13C

RR-DEFOG DEF F/D FOOT B/L FACE

B, A14

M

RECIRC

FRESH

232

RADIATOR FAN AND AUTOMATIC

Page 222: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

C6 C17 C18 C19 C12 C15 C14 C3 C13 B1 B4 B3 B2 A8 A10 4 A9 B11

B12 B11 A7 A15 3 A4 A14 A17 A12 A16 B1 B10 B9 A13 B2 B7 A11 A2 A10

I12

R-B

LG-B

GR B LG P

B-W P-B R

LG-R

W-L

R-W

G-W L-R

Y-B

P-B

L-W

L-B

BR

-W

L-W

BR- W

L- W

A

A

L- MAUTOL- REC

L- FRSL- A/C

L- HI L- M3 L- M2 L- M1 L- L0 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 SG TSET

A/C AMPLIFIER

AA12 , A13C

AUTOREC/FRS A/C FAND- FAND+ OFF

WARM COOL

HEATER CONTROL SW

BH12 , H13A

B, A14

233

AIR CONDITIONING*1 : 2JZ- GTE*2 : 2JZ- GE

Page 223: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

I12

I12 I13

I13 I13 I13

I19I14I12

2

1 2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

IB611 IB63 II120

II126IF37 IF38

IG16 IG13 IG17 IG11IG111

IG14

IG1

5

2

1

A2 A17 A5 A6 C22 B10 A7 C8 C9A16

BR- W

V- WV- W

BR- W

V- W

BR- WBR- W

BR- W

L- W L- W L- W L- W

BR

-W

Y-G

GR

-R

L-W

BR

-W

L-W

V-

W

G

L-W

L-W

LG

V-W

L-Y

Y-

L

W

V-W

LG-R

LG-

R

WY-L

L-Y

LGG-Y

G-Y

G

GR

-R

Y-G

BR

-W

L-W

G

L-W

L-W

G-Y

G-Y

L-W

V-W LG

BR

-W

Y-L W

5 3 4 2 1

G

V-

W (

*1)

S5 TS TR TAM LOCK- IN TPO TE AOD AOFTW

A/C

RO

OM

TE

MP

. S

EN

SO

R

A1

6

A/ C

SO

LAR

SE

NS

OR

A1

7

A/C

AM

BIE

NT

TEM

P.

SE

NS

OR

A 1

A/ C

LO

CK

SE

NS

OR

[A/C

MA

GN

ETI

C C

LU

TC

H]

A 4

AIR VENT MODECONTROL SERVO MOTOR

A26

A/C

EV

AP

OR

AT

OR

TE

MP

. S

EN

SO

R

A1

5

EN

GIN

E C

OO

LAN

TT

EM

P.

SE

NS

OR

( A/C

SY

STE

M)

E1

1

A/C AMPLIFIER

AA12 , A13C

L-W

B, A14

L-W

(*2

)

M

DEF

FACE

234

RADIATOR FAN AND AUTOMATIC

Page 224: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

4 4

5 2

3 1

4 4

I14 I14

I14

IG18 IG19 IG12 IF18 IF36

II18 II123

A18 A3 A1 B7 C20 B18 A11 A14

II1

2

IB612

EA

V- W

Y

Y

Y

L- R L- R

L- Y

W-R

L-R Y

Y Y

Y

R Y

L-R

Y

BR

-W

G-

W

V-

W V

R-Y

G-W V

R-

Y

G-W V R-Y

W-

R

L-R O P L -Y

L-Y

P L-R

W-

B

4 3 5 2 1

6 5 3

1

2 1

W-L

B

TP AMH AMC +B ACC RDEFGR SPEED PSW

AIR MIX CONTROLSERVO MOTOR

SP

EE

DO

ME

TE

R[C

OM

B.

ME

TE

R]

A25

TELL

TALE

LIG

HT

RH

T 6

VE

HIC

LE S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

NO

. 1

( CO

MB

INA

TIO

N M

ETE

R)

V10

A/C

DU

AL

PR

ES

SU

RE

SW

ODO ANDTRIP

A/C AMPLIFIER

AA12 , A13C

O

RE

AR

WIN

DO

WD

EFO

GG

ER

RE

LAY

IF

A9

A11 B11

A10

A4

B1

B2A1

(*1)

(*1)(*2)

(*2)

BA

3,

AB

C10

, C

12A

B, A14

BR

BR

R

10AECU- B

15ACIG

10AGAUGE

1E13 1E2 1H12

1E

12

FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 56)

M

WARM

COOL

235

AIR CONDITIONING*1 : 2JZ- GTE*2 : 2JZ- GE

Page 225: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

236

RADIATOR FAN AND AUTOMATIC

A4 A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH4-GROUND : APPROX. 3.7 Ω

A3 (A) A/C DUAL PRESSURE SW [A /C TRIPLE PRESSURE SW] (2JZ-GTE)(A)1 -(A) 4 : OPEN ABOVE APPROX. 225 KPA (33 PSI, 2.3 KG/CM2) OR 3140 KPA (458 PSI, 32 KG/CM2)

A3 (B) A/C DUAL PRESSURE SW (2JZ-GE)(B)1- (B)2 : OPEN ABOVE APPROX. 225 KPA (33 PSI, 2.3 KG/CM2) OR 3140 KPA (458 PSI, 32 KG/CM2)

A12 (C), A13 (A), A14 (B) A/C AMPLIFIER+B-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 10-14 VOLTSIG-GROUND : APPROX. 10-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION

HR-GROUND : APPROX. 10-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND DO NOT TURN THE BLOWERMOTOR BELOW 1 VOLT WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND TURN THE BLOWER MOTOR

ACC-GROUND : APPROX. 10-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITIONTW-GROUND : 10-14 VOLTS AT START THE ENGINE AND MAX. COLD POSITION OF THE A/C TEMP. CONTROL SW

BELOW 1 VOLT AT START THE ENGINE AND MAX. WARM POSITION OF THE A/C TEMP. CONTROL SWMGC-GROUND :BELOW 1 VOLT AT START THE ENGINE, PUSH THE A/C AUTO SW AND THE A/C SW ON POSITION

10-14 VOLTS AT START THE ENGINE, PUSH THE A/C AUTO SW AND THE A/C SW OFF POSITIONBLW-GROUND : 1.0-3.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND TURN THE BLOWER MOTOR

S5-GROUND : 4-6 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ONSG-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

AMH-AMC : 13-19 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW OFFAOF-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE FACE SW ONAOD-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE DEF SW ONGND-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY

: PARTS LOCATIONCODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE

A124 (2JZ-GTE) A17 28 H12 A 29

A126 (2JZ-GE) A24 28 H13 B 29

A2 24 A25 28 I4 27

A3A 24 (2JZ-GTE) A26 28 J1 29

A3B 26 (2JZ-GE) B3 28 R1 25

A424 (2JZ-GTE) B4 A 28 R2 25

A426 (2JZ-GE) B5 B 28 R3 25

A12 C 28 C10 A 28 R20 25A13 A 28 C12 B 28 T6 29A14 B 28 E5 24

V1025 (2JZ-GTE)

A15 28 E10 29V10

27 (2JZ-GE)A16 28 E11 29

: RELAY BLOCKS

CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)2 22 R/B NO. 2 (ENGINE COMPARTMENT LEFT)

4 23 R/B NO. 4 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR

CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)1A 20 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1E 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1(LEFT KICK PANEL)

1H20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

1K20 COWL WIRE AND J/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)

: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESSCODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA132 (2JZ-GTE)

ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO 2)EA1 34 (2JZ-GE)ENGINE WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE R/B NO. 2)

IB2 36 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)

IB436 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IB636 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IF1 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT LH)

IF3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IG1 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE AND COWL NO. 3 WIRE (BEHIND HEATER CONTROL SW)

II1 38 ENGINE WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

IK1 38 COWL NO. 4 WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)

SERVICE HINTS

Page 226: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

237

AIR CONDITIONING

: GROUND POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION

EA32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDEREA 34 (2JZ-GE)FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER

EB32 (2JZ-GTE)

FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDEREB 34 (2JZ-GE)FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER

IF 36 LEFT KICK PANEL

IG36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

IH36 RIGHT KICK PANEL

: SPLICE POINTS

CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTSE2 I12 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

E5 32 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE I13 38 COWL NO. 3 WIRE

E9 I14E11 32 ENGINE WIRE I19 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIREE21 34 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE I25E26 34 ENGINE WIRE

1 221 1

2 34

1 2X 4

1 2 3 4 X 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 221 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 X X 14 X 16 17 18

4

X 13 X 15 16

1 2 3 X 6 7 8

9 10 11 17 18 19 20

A BLACKA 3 B GRAYA 3

C ORANGEA12 A ORANGEA13 B ORANGEA14

BLACK BLACK GRAYA 1 A 2 A 4

1 2

12X

2 3 4 5

1

2 3 4 5

1

2 3 4 5

1 2

1

321

2

9X 10 11

11X X

A BLACKB 4 B BLACKB 5 A BLUEC10

BC12

BLACK GRAY

BLACK

A15 A16 A17 A24 A25 A26

B 3

(2JZ- GTE) (2JZ- GE)

1 2

1 2

X23

34

X

16

X

DARK GRAY DARK GRAY(2JZ- GTE)E 5 E10

X X XX

1 2

X

Page 227: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

238

RADIATOR FAN AND AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING

X

X X

23

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 X

A ORANGEH12(2JZ- GE) E10 E11DARK GRAY

34

1 2 3 4 X

6 7 X 9 10 11 12 X X

4AA A A

A A A A

21

1 2

3 4

1

X 5

2 3

6

1 5 6

X X X

1 2 3

B ORANGEH13 I 4 J 1 R 1

R 2 R 3 T 6 V10

BLACK BLACK

BLACK GRAY BLACK

(HINT : SEE PAGE 7)

XX

1 2

1 2

R20 BLACK

X

Page 228: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

239

MEMO

Page 229: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

246

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 230: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

247

K

Page 231: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

248

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 232: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

1 S

UP

RA

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L W

IRIN

G D

IAG

RA

M 2

AC

C

IG1

ST2IG2

AM1

4 867

A M2

22

2

2

2

1J6

1J4

21

53

2

1K4

2A

2

21

2IJ

1

IJ2

13

1J

31J

5

1E

81E

12

34

II123

II1

2E

A3

EA

24

1B B

A A A

L IG S

IJ29

3E

A1

4IB

1

2

1B

1 A

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

50A

AM

1(U

SA

)6

0A A

M1

( Can

ada

)

50A

MA

IN

STA

RTE

RR

ELA

Y

7. 5

AA

LT-

S12

0A

AL

T3

0A AM

2

BA

TTE

RY

[

STA

RTE

R

To T

heft

Det

erre

nt

and

Doo

r Lo

ck C

ontro

l EC

U<

14-3

>

To

Eng

ine

Con

trol

Mod

ule<

3-7>

<4-

8>

To

Bul

b C

heck

Rel

ay[C

om

b.

Met

er]<

26-

6>

C 9

CLU

TC

HS

TAR

T S

W(M

/T)

7. 5

AS

T

P N

P 2

PA

RK

/NE

UT

RA

LP

OS

ITIO

N S

W(A

/T)

7. 5

AIG

N10

AG

AU

GE

T 6CHARGE WARNING LIGHT[TELLTALE LIGHT RH]

( *1

)

( *2

)

1 2 3

G 1

B, G

2A

GE

NE

RA

TOR

1

12

3

BG

1A

G 2

BLA

CK

GE

NE

RA

TO

R

S 2

A, S

3B

1

1

STA

RT

ER

AS

2B

S 3

BL

AC

K

W

W

W

W

W- RW- R

B B

B B- W B- W B

BB

B

L- O

B

B

L- O

B

B

B- O Y-G

Y

W

B- Y

B- W

W

W

W

W

Y- G

Y

W

Y-

GB

-W

B-

WBB

-W

B

B

(A/T)

(M/T)(M/T)(M/T)(M/T)

( A/T

)( A

/T)

( A/T

)( A

/T)

( M/T

)

3

6

22

2

2

11

11

1

2

125

B-Y

B-

R

B-W

B- R

1

1E

A3

EA

21

( *1)

( *2)

B

*2 :

2JZ

-GE

*1 :

2JZ

-GTE

To Daytime RunningLight Relay(Main)<6- 1>

B

(A/T)

Y- G

From CombinationMeter<26- 5>

Y-G

W

W

Ch

arg

ing

Sta

rtin

gP

ow

er

So

urc

e

1B4 W

*3 :

Can

ada

( *3

)

12IB

2

B- W

K

Page 233: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

2 S

UP

RA

7IG

2A

M2

6

IJ11

I J19

4IB

1 2 2A

21

21

21

21

21

21

2A

6B

5B

4B

10B

11B

12B

1B

2B

3B

9B

8B

4A

3A

7B

21

21 EC

EC

+BIG

C1

IGC

2IG

C3

IGC

4IG

C5

IGC

6

IGT1

IGT

2IG

T3

IGT4

IGT

5IG

T6

IGF

+B

IGT

EX

T

IGF

C-

NE

G1

G2

G-

IGN

ITE

R

I 6IGNITION COIL NO. 1

I 7IGNITION COIL NO. 2

I 8IGNITION COIL NO. 3

I 9IGNITION COIL NO. 4

I10IGNITION COIL NO. 5

I11IGNITION COIL NO. 6

IGN

ITE

R

D 4

DIS

TRIB

UTO

R

N 1

NO

ISE

FIL

TER

To

Eng

ine

Con

trol

Mod

ule<

3-5>

<3-

6>

I 5 IGN

ITIO

NC

OIL

N 1

NO

ISE

FIL

TER

To Engine Control Module<4- 7>

To Tachometer[Comb. Meter ]<26- 6>

To Engine Control Module<4- 8>

Fron

t si

de o

fin

take

man

ifold

Fro

nt s

ide

ofin

take

man

ifold

BR

BR

B

R

W

R- Y

R- W

BR

BR

R- Y

R

L

B- R

LG

W- R

R- W

G

B- O

L- Y

Y

Y- B

Y- G

Y- RB- O

B- O

B- O

B- O

B- O

B- O

B- R

B- O

B- O

G

B- W

B- O

W- R W- R

B- O

B

B-W

B-W

B-W

B-W

B-O

B-O

B-O

B-

OB

-OB

-O

B-O

B-W

B-W

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

IGN

ITE

R

12

34

AI

2B

LAC

K

12

34

56

78

911

1210

BI

3B

LAC

K

(2JZ- GTE)

12

34

30A

AM

2

BA

TTE

RY

GN

D

21

B- OI

2A

, I

3B

1

12

34

5

CI

4B

LAC

K

3C

4C

5C

2C

1C

I 4

C

B- W

12

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

gn

itio

n( 2

JZ

-G

TE

)n

itio

n( 2

JZ

-G

E)

( 2JZ

-GE

)

( 2JZ

-GE

)S

T2

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 234: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

MEMO

Page 235: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

3 S

UP

RA

( Co

nt.

ne

xt p

age

)

2

AC

C

IG1

ST2IG2

AM

14 86

7A

M2

21

535

21

2

2

1J4

22

22

22

4E

A1

8E

A1

5E

A2

11I C

212

IC2

2B

P1

54 M

6B

P1

9I J

1

4IB

1

4IJ

1

5IJ

1

IC2

10

IF17

EA

2

2

1B

4

22

22

ED

IG

12

12

12

12

12

12

Rig

ht k

ick

pan

elR

ear

side

of

inta

ke m

anifo

ld

120A ALT

30A EFI NO. 2

30A AM2

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

15II1

13II1

13IJ

21J

51J

31J

6

1E12

IJ1

18

ED

Rea

r si

de o

fin

take

man

ifold

10A GAUGE

7. 5A IGN

7. 5A ST

B-W

B-RL

W-B

B-R

O

LG-

R

R

LG-B

L-B BR

L-B

B-R

W-B

85

62

162

3

16

12

1

1013414

8 3

G

V- W

L W- B

V- W

G

Y

B- R

L- R

G

V- W

L

B- RB- R

B- W

B- Y

GR

B- R

B-Y

B- Y

B- Y

L

W- RW- R

W

W

B- Y

B- W

B- W

B- R

B- O

B- W

W- B

3

EFI NO. 2 RELAY

EFI MAIN RELAY

( Sho

rt P

in)

EF

PC

DI

FP

TSW

B

F14FUEL PUMP

D 5

DA

TA L

INK

CO

NN

EC

TOR

2

D 1DATA LINKCONNECTOR 1

To ABS SolenoidRelay<19- 2>

ABA/D

OP

A

TC

AB

S

From

Eng

ine

Con

trol

Mod

ule

<15

-5>

Fro

m C

ruis

eC

ontr

ol E

CU

<17

-2>

From

Tra

ck O

ffIn

dica

tor

Ligh

t

[T

ellta

le L

ight

LH

]<

20->

1>

W E1

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

F15

FUE

L P

UM

P E

CU

+B

23

48

7

2

1

L

BR

R

G

B- Y

W R- B

R

R- W

R- G

R- Y

R- L

W- B

W- B

W- B

B

#10

#20

#30

#4

0#

50

SD

L

S 1

SFI

RE

SIS

TOR

I12INJECTOR NO. 1

I13INJECTOR NO. 2

I14INJECTOR NO. 3

I15INJECTOR NO. 4

I16INJECTOR NO. 5

I17INJECTOR NO. 6

BA

TTE

RY

+B

32

BR

BR BR

L- B

B- O

B

T 5MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

3TE

1

BA

T

GR-L

R-Y

R-G

R-WRR-B

B-R

V-WGL-

BB

R

BR

L- B

BR

From ABS ECU<19- 2>

E1

1

11

11

2

22

22

1E8

1K

4

14I C

2

2A

1

P- B

11

TC

From ABS ECU<19- 2>

B- R

Y

B- W

22 W

En

gin

e C

on

tro

l(2

JZ

-G

TE

)P

ow

er

So

urc

e

A B C D E G I K M O Q S

H J L N P R

22

LWA

30A EFI NO. 1

I7. 5A OBD- I

B- W

14

1C

BI

Left

quar

ter

pilla

rF

ront

sid

e of

left

fend

erE

B

IB1

5

B- W

Left

kick

pane

lIE

B- R

V- W

G

W- B

G

W- B

BR

W- B

BR

IJ1

12

6#60

5SG

4CG

85 A

B

D1

7D

ATA

LIN

KC

ON

NE

CTO

R 3

From AirbagSensor Assembly<13- 3>

9E

CT

+B

12

B B-YV

F

BR

BRL

B-O

B-W

( A/T

)

B-R

B-Y GR

B- W

* E

ng

ine

Con

tro

l M

odu

leF

or t

he

co

nne

cto

rs o

f th

e p

arts

lis

ted

be

low

. s

ee t

he n

ext

pa

ge

.

B- Y

B- W

B- RB- RTo Throttle ECU

<20- 3>

From Airbag SensorAssembly <13-3>From ABS ECU<19-2>From Throttle ECU<20-2>From CruiseControl ECU<17-1>

Fro

m A

BS

EC

U<

19-2

>

Fro

m A

BS

EC

U <

19-2

>F

rom

Thr

ottle

EC

U<

20-2

>F

rom

Cru

ise

Con

trol

EC

U

<17

-2>

Fro

m A

irbag

Sen

sor

Ass

em

bly

<13

-3>

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 236: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

56

78

3 S

UP

RA

( Co

nt’

d)

21

21

21

21

21

BB

AB

BB

BB

AB

AA

BB

BB

B

BB

AA

AB

BB

BB

BB

AB

BB

BB

BB

BB

BB

BA

B

12

12

12

4I J

2

14IJ

25

IJ2

A

10I C

19

IC1

12IC

1

IC14 IC18

21

21AA

AA

AA

BA

BB

B

BA

BB

BB

BB

BB

12

12

12

1

1

ED

Rea

r si

de o

fin

take

man

ifold

52

47

726

2122

5756

5554

5352

5831

3533

3432

75

7415

161

718

19

2011

504

9

2

1

42

487

12

02

4039

3873

60

17

624

3344

2446

634

2

31

23

26

625

277

6980

79

43

25

32

12

34

3

14

1

A A

31

64

2726

141

340

39

5138

456

628

BRL

B-

O

B-R B-W

( A/T

)

B-

Y

B-

RB

-R

B-

RB

-R

B-R

W-B

W-B

W

B- LB- R

L

P

G- B

G- Y

G- R

W- LB- R

B- R

B- R

B- R

B- R L- W

B- O

B- W(A/T)

GR

B- Y

W- BW- B

L- Y

O(A/T)

BR- Y

GR- R

Y- L

GR- R

R- L R- L

BR- WBR- W

L- B

G

V- W

R- W

W- R

LG

B- R

L

R

R- Y

B- R

V- Y

G- O

G- W

R- G

P

V

R- B

R

R- W

R- G

R- Y

R- L

Y- R

W

W

B- R

OX

SH

TSW

DI

FPC

IGT1

IGT2

IGT3

IGT

4IG

T5IG

T6

IGF

+BIS

C1

ISC

3IS

C2

ISC

4E

GR

EV

AP

#6

0#

50#

40

#30

#2

0#

10A

BS

KN

K1

KN

K2

W-B

B-R

B-R

V 7VSV(Intake Air Control Valve)

V 4VSV(Exhaust Bypass Valve)

V 5VSV(Exhaust Gas Control Valve)

V 6VSV(Fuel Pressure Up)

A 5

A/T

FLU

IDT

EM

P.

SE

NS

OR

E 1

EG

R G

AS

TE

MP

. S

EN

SO

R

E 3

EN

GIN

E C

OO

LAN

TTE

MP

. S

EN

SO

R

V 8VSV(Waste Gate Valve)

From ABS ECU<19- 1>

Fro

mO

do a

ndT

rip M

eter

[Tel

ltale

Lig

ht R

H]

<26

-1>

OX

HT

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

H 5HEATED OXYGENSENSOR(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

E+B

OX

1H

T1

TE

1

SP

1V

SV

1V

SV

2V

SV

3F

PU

VS

V4

IGS

W

NS

WM-R

EL B

ATT

TH

WO

ILT

HG

IDL2

VTA

2

(SHIELDED)

GR-

LR

-YR

-G

R-

WRR

-BB

-R

V-

WGL-

BB

R

BR

BR

B-R

1 3

2 4

R- L

BR- W

V

B- R

W

(SHIELDED)

V 2VSV(EGR)

V 3VSV(EVAP)

HT

OX

+B E1

H11

HE

AT

ED

OX

YG

EN

SE

NS

OR

( BA

NK

1 S

ENS

OR

2)

I 1IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE

Fro

m I

gnite

r<

2-2>

<2-

3>

L- R

L- R

W- B

W- B

W- B

B- R

P- L

Y- R

BR

P- L

W- L

G- O

V- Y

BR

Y

W

B

R

W- G

W

O

B- W

L

B- R

BR

BR

BR

BR

W-B

RG

R-

R

L-R

L-R

W-

BW

-B

BR

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

AC

MG

G1

G-

G2

NE

NE

-E

1E

O1

EO

2

E2

THA

VG

E2

G

PIM

VC

EFI

+

EF

I-

ETC

+ET

C-

VT

01

VT0

2

FAIL

NE

O

THA

VG

E2

G

E2

+B

From A/CMagneticClutchRelay<27- 2>

To Throttle ECU<20- 3>

To Cruise ControlECU<17- 3>To Throttle ECU<20- 3>

T14TURBO PRESSURESENSOR

S 5

SU

B T

HR

OT

TLE

PO

SIT

ION

SE

NS

OR

T 2

THR

OT

TLE

PO

SIT

ION

SE

NS

OR

M 1

MA

SS

AIR

FLO

W M

ET

ER

Fro

mS

top

Lig

htS

W<

7-4

>

To T

ach

om

eter

[Com

b.

Met

er]

<26

-6>

Fro

mD

iode

(Idle

-U

p)<

21-

3> A A A

AAAA

BR

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

O

L

B-R

B-W

W

C 3

CR

AN

KS

HA

FTP

OS

ITIO

N S

EN

SO

R

C 2

CA

MS

HA

FT

PO

SIT

ION

SE

NS

OR

NO

. 2

J 2

JUN

CTI

ON

CO

NN

EC

TOR

K 2

KN

OC

K S

EN

SO

R( o

n R

ear

Sid

e)

K 1

KN

OC

K S

EN

SO

R(o

n Fr

ont

Sid

e)

C 1

CA

MS

HA

FT

PO

SIT

ION

SE

NS

OR

NO

. 1

BR

B- R

EN

GIN

E C

ON

TRO

L M

OD

ULE

E 9

B,

E10

A

GR

B- R B- R

( A/T

)

En

gin

e C

on

tro

l(2

JZ

-G

TE

)

A B C D E G I K M O Q S

H J L N P R

F

TA

CO

IDL1

STP

E2

VT

A1

VC

CP

M1

ELSA

AB

BB

BB

A

151

662

41

4364

654

G- W

W- B

R

Y

L- R

B- Y

B- W

R- Y

EF

IFB

67

P

Fro

m T

hro

ttle

EC

U<

20-3

><

20-4

>

I J1

20B

-R

B- R

6IJ

1

A

SD

L

8

7IJ

1

B

78E

03 BR

G G

(SHIELDED)

( SH

IELD

ED

)

A

34

L- R

A/C

From A/CAmplifier<27- 5>

B

77

B

STA

* E

ngin

e C

ontro

l M

odul

eFo

r th

e co

nnec

tors

of

the

part

s lis

ted

belo

w.

see

the

nex

t pa

ge.

W- B

( Co

nt.

ne

xt p

age

)

Fro

m P

ark/

Neu

tra

lP

ositi

on S

W (

A/T

)<1

-3>

Fro

m C

lutc

h S

tart

SW

(M

/T)

<1-3

>

K

Page 237: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

910

111

2

3 S

UP

RA

( Co

nt’

d)

En

gin

e C

on

tro

l(2

JZ

-G

TE

)

10

30

50

70

1 21

41

61

2 22

42

62

3 23

43

63

4 24

44

64

5 25

45

65

6 26

46

66

7 27

47

67

8 28

48

68

9 29

49

69

11

31

51

71

20

40

60

80

19

39

59

79

18

38

58

78

17

37

57

77

16

36

56

76

15

35

55

75

14

34

54

74

13

33

53

73

12

32

52

72

10

20

30

40

1 11

21

31

2 12

22

32

3 13

23

33

4 14

24

34

5 15

25

35

6 16

26

36

7 17

27

37

8 18

28

38

9 19

29

39

BE

9D

AR

K G

RA

YA

E10

DA

RK

GR

AY

EN

GIN

E C

ON

TR

OL

MO

DU

LE

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 238: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

MEMO

Page 239: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

4 S

UP

RA

( Co

nt.

ne

xt p

age

)

24 86

7

1J

41E

8

22

2

22

4E

A1

8E

A1

3E

A3

11

IC2

12IC

2

2B

P1

4IB

1

4IJ

112

IJ1

9I J

1

6B

P1

1J3

21

35

22

I C2

10

IB15

54 M

12

12

12

12

12

12

BI

EB

18

IJ1

1J5

1E1

2

ED

1B

4

I19

I GN

ITIO

N S

W

F15

FUE

L P

UM

P E

CU

D 5

DA

TA L

INK

CO

NN

EC

TO

R 2

Fro

m A

BS

EC

U<

18-

4>

From

Airb

agS

ens

or

Ass

embl

y<

13-

3>

7. 5A IGN

50A AM1

EFI MAIN RELAY

30A AM2

120A ALT

30A EFI NO. 1

BATTERYI12 INJECTOR NO. 1

I13 INJECTOR NO. 2

I14 INJECTOR NO. 3

I15 INJECTOR NO. 4

I16 INJECTOR NO. 5

I17 INJECTOR NO. 6

To A

BS

Rel

ay<

18-

1>

Fro

m A

irbag

Sen

sor

Ass

embl

y<

13-

3>

D 1

DA

TA L

INK

CO

NN

EC

TOR

1

AB

TCTS

E1

TE1

+B

+B

FPE

DI

FP

C

TCA

BA

/D

E1

From ABS ECU<18- 2>

From

AB

SE

CU

<18

-3>

F14FUEL PUMP

( Sho

rt P

in)

10A

GA

UG

E T 5MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

10

30

50

70

1 21

41

61

2 22

42

62

3 23

43

63

4 24

44

64

5 25

45

65

6 26

46

66

7 27

47

67

8 28

48

68

9 29

49

69

11

31

51

71

20

40

60

80

19

39

59

79

18

38

58

78

17

37

57

77

16

36

56

76

15

35

55

75

14

34

54

74

13

33

53

73

12

32

52

72

BD

RA

K G

RA

Y

B-WL-

RL

R-WRR-B

V-WG

BR

Y-G

B-WB-Y

B-O

B-R

B-YB-W B-R

B-Y

B-R

L- R

Y- G

W-

B

W- R

W W

W- R

B- Y

V- W

G

W- B

V- W

G

L

O

LG- B

B

B- R

B- RB- R B- W

W- B

B- WB- W

B- RB- R

B- W

V- W

G

W- B

L

B- R

BR

B- W

B- W

B- W

B- W

B- W

B- W

B- W

R- L

L- R

L

R- W

R

R- B

B

W- B

W- B

B- R

B

R

Y

BR

L- B

BR BR

Y YB- Y

B-W

B-R

R

B-O

4

2

2 22

412

1410

122

28

2

1

11

1

32

15

3

23

511

163

3

W- B

BR

10

20

30

40

1 11

21

31

2 12

22

32

3 13

23

33

4 14

24

34

5 15

25

35

6 16

26

36

7 17

27

37

8 18

28

38

9 19

29

39

AD

AR

K G

RA

Y

B-W

B-W

B-W

B-W

WB

B-R

WA

Fro

m C

ruis

eC

ont

rol

EC

U<

17-

2>

E1

0

E 9

Rea

r si

de o

fin

take

man

ifold

Fro

nt s

ide

ofle

ft fe

nder

Left

quar

ter

pilla

r

2A

1

22 W

En

gin

e C

on

tro

l(2

JZ

-G

E)

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

AB

S

A

B-R

II115L-

B

B C D E F G H I J K L M N P

1C14

OR

-L

B- W

B- W

7. 5A OBD- I I

AC

C

IG1

IG2

ST2

AM

1

AM

2

B- W

From Cruise ControlECU <17-2>From Airbag SensorAssembly <13-3>From ABS ECU <18-2>

Fro

m C

ruis

eC

ontr

ol E

CU

<17

-1>

Fro

m A

irbag

Sen

sor

Ass

embl

y <

13-3

>F

rom

AB

S E

CU

<18

-2>

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 240: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

56

78

4 S

UP

RA

( Co

nt’

d)

12

21

12

21

AA

AB

AA

BB

BB

BB

BB

BB

AA

AB

BB

BB

BB

BB

23A

34A

78B

79

B80

B6

9B

7B

27B

25

B26

B49

B36

A47

B72

B48

B71

B5

B19

B18

B17

B16

B15

B22

A21

A6

A

1 J6

1K4

13IJ

2

13II

1

21

12

21

11

B-R

B-

O

B-R

B-

Y

B-W Y-

G

B-R

B-R

B-R

B-

R

B-

RB

-R

G

V-W

R-

B

R

R-

W L L-R

B-W

W-

BW

-B

B-

R

W-B

R-B

BR

BR

BR

BR

W- G

L- R

BR

BR

BR

G

B

W

R

W

W

R- L

B- Y

B- R

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

W

G

B- R

R- L

L- R

L

R- W

R

R- B

V- W

G

L- B

B- R

Y- G

B- W

B- Y

B- W

B- O

B- R

G- W

R- B

Y- B

L- B

G- Y

V

P

W- L

R- W

R- Y

P

R- Y

G- W

B- O

B- R

B- R B- R

B- R

B- R

B- R

B- R

B- R

L- Y

BR- Y

L- B

L- R

Y

R- B

W- B

G- B

Y- R

BR

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

7. 5

AS

T

V 1VSV(ACIS)

V 3VSV(EVAP)

V 2VSV(EGR)

V 6VSV(FuelPressure Up)

I 1IDLE AIRCONTROL VALVE

M 2MAIN HEATED OXYGENSENSOR(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

M 3MAIN HEATED OXYGENSENSOR(BANK 2 SENSOR 1)

J 2

JUN

CT

ION

JO

NN

EC

TO

R

E

+BH

TO

X+B

HT

OX E

From A/C Amplifier<27- 5>

From A/C MagneticClutch Relay<27- 2>

Fro

m D

istr

ibu

tor

<2-

4>

K 2KNOCK SENSOR(on Rear Side)

K 1KNOCK SENSOR(on Front Side)

EV

GT

HA

E2

IDL1

VT

A1

VC

TH

OTH

GT

HW

STP

ELS

1S

P1

IGF

IGT

FPU

HT

3K

NK

2G

1G

2N

EG

-E

1E

O1

EO

2E

O3

AC

AC

MG

TE1

BA

TTM

-R

EL

NS

WIG

SW

+B

ISC

2IS

C4

ISC

1IS

C3

AC

ISE

VA

PE

GR

WD

IFP

C#

60

#50

#4

0#

30#

20

#10

HT1

OX

1H

T2

OX

2

EN

GIN

E C

ON

TR

OL

MO

DU

LE

T 2

THR

OT

TLE

PO

SIT

ION

SE

NS

OR

M 1

MA

SS

AIR

FLO

W M

ET

ER

E 3ENGINE COOLANTTEMP. SENSOR

E 1EGR GAS TEMP. SENSOR

A 5A/T FLUIDTEMP. SENSOR

To Cruise ControlECU<17- 3>

R- B

From Igniter< 2- 3><2- 4>

From Odo and Trip Meter[Telltale Light RH]<26- 1>

From Diode(Idle- Up)<21- 3>

From Stop Light SW<7- 4>

13

46

43

2

34

25

1

AA

A

21

33

12

25

1

A

B

(A/T) (A/T)

W- B

(SHIELDED)

ED

E 9

B, E

10A

Rea

r si

de o

fin

take

ma

nifo

ld

2033

24

76

13

134

3235

33

3974

757

35

758

215

444

46

2441

4364

6545

28

(A/T) (A/T)

En

gin

e C

on

tro

l(2

JZ

-G

E)

A CB D E F G H I J K L M N P

B 12

B

C 3CRANKSHAFT POSITIONSENSOR

6IJ

17

IJ1A

14IC

2

(SHIELDED) (SHIELDED)

G G

B- W

16

2

D17DATA LINK CONNECTOR 3

208

4

B-R

B-R

BR BR

77

BB

ST

AS

DL

NE

2N

E2-

TH

AE

2V

GE

2G

+B

R-L

O

B- W

B

W

5IJ

1

AA

AA

EC

Fron

t si

de

ofin

take

man

ifold

IELe

ft k

ick

pane

lIG

Rig

ht k

ick

pane

l

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

BA

TS

GC

G

W-B

BR BR

W- B W- B

BR

BR

BR

BR

BR

54

44

SD

L

W- B

B VG

66

A

421

3

(SHIELDED)

B- R

BR- W

R- L

BR

BR

S16

SU

B H

EA

TED

OX

YG

EN

SE

NS

OR

( BA

NK

1 S

EN

SO

R 2

)

+BH

TO

X

E

B

KN

K1

50A

OX

3

30

A

32APS

21

BR

P 3

PO

WE

R S

TEE

RIN

GP

RE

SS

UR

E S

W

BR- W

BR

From Park/Neutral Posiyion SW(A/T) <1-3>From Clutch Start SW (M/T) <1-3>

K

Page 241: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

5 S

UP

RA

22

2

IB2

13

43

21

OF

F

TA

IL

HE

AD

LOW

HIG

H

FLA

SH

OF

F

ON

HEL

TE

DH

FH

LFG

HU

EF

LIGHTCONTROLSW

FOGLIGHTSW

DIMMERSW

To T

hef

t D

eter

rent

and

Doo

r Lo

ckC

ont

rol E

CU

<14

-3>

To I

nteg

ratio

nR

elay

<11

-1>

G- R

R

R

R- Y

R- Y R- Y

R-Y

RR

G-

R

R-Y

R-Y

R-Y

BR

22

143

7

2A

1J1

1K5

IE

R

R

W- B

W- B

O

R- L

B

11

131

19

61

2

21

53

12

12

12

12

2IB

122

2

22 2

2

22

6IF

1

14IF

17

IB1

IB2

1512

12

EA

EB

R- L

R- L

G- W

G- W

R- L

W- B

R- L

R- L

W- B

G- W

2

R-W

R-B

R-B

R- W

R- W

R- B

R- B

R- B

G- R

R

2 3

R

R- W R- WR- WR- W

(Canada)

12

HEADLIGHTRELAY

50A MAIN

15A FOG

C12HIGH BEAMINDICATOR LIGHT[COMB. METER]

H 2HEADLIGHT HI RH

H 4HEADLIGHT LO RH

H 3HEADLIGHT LO LH

H 1HEADLIGHT HI LH

O O

W- B

W- B

F 4FRONT FOG LIGHT RH

F 3FRONT FOG LIGHT LH

( US

A)

( Can

ada)

15A

HE

AD

( LH

)( U

SA

)

15A

HE

AD

( LH

-LW

R)

( Can

ada)

( Can

ada

)

(USA)

FO

G L

IGH

TR

ELA

YW- B

W- B

From IntegrationRelay<11- 2>

C1

3C

OM

BIN

AT

ION

SW

BA

TT

ER

Y

To F

og

Lig

htS

W[C

omb.

S

W]<

6-3

FO

G L

IGH

TR

ELA

YF

OG

LIG

HT

RE

LAY

O

O

15A

HE

AD

( RH

)( U

SA

)

W-B

R- L

1

Left

kick

pa

nel

Fron

t si

de o

fri

ght

fend

erFr

ont

side

of

left

fend

er

( US

A)

22

11

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

He

ad

ligh

t(U

SA

)F

og

Lig

ht W- B

W-B

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 242: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

6 S

UP

RA

21

43

34

12

1H9

1J4

1J5

22

1B5

1B

4

1H

12

22

22

13

IB2

10

IB2

22

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

14

22

22

2

12

12

IG

22

22

12

12

2IB

1

6IF

1

14IF

1

13IB

5

EA

EB

IE

5 1K

1 1J

2B1

2

2 22

215

175

1214

3

22

22

2

7

2 3

11

11

1

69

11

13

11

111

88

1316

CH

GO

ILP

KB

EH

I

G-WR-Y

R-W

R

W

R-Y

R-Y

R-WR

R R

R-

W

R-Y

R-L

R-W

W-

B

W-

B

W-B

W-

BW

-BW

-B

W-B

W-B

W-B

W- BW- B

W- B

R- W R- W R- W R- L

W- B

W- B

W- B W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

R

R- Y

R- W

R

R- L

R- L

R

R- BR

R- W

R- W

R- W

R- Y

R- B

W

RR

W

R

R- L

Y

R- L

R- Y

1

1

W

R- Y R- Y

10A GAUGE

R

O

HU

HF

TH

EL

HL

ED

FGE

F

OFF

TAIL

HE

AD

LOW

HIG

H

FLA

SH

OFF

ON

LIGHTCONTROLSW

DIMMER SWFOGLIGHTSW

120A ALT60A AM1

7. 5A DOME

50A MAIN

BATTERY

From Generator< 1- 4>

To Brake Fluid LevelWarning SW<26- 6>

To Parking Brake SW< 26- 7>

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

IG+

BD

RL

HD

6D

AY

TIM

E R

UN

NIN

G L

IGH

T R

EL

AY( M

AIN

)

DIM

ME

R R

ELA

Y( D

AY

TIM

E R

UN

NIN

G L

IGH

T R

ELA

Y N

O.

2)( C

anad

a)

HE

AD

LIG

HT

RE

LAY

BR- W

B- W

Y- G

2A

W- B W- B

Fro

m I

nteg

ratio

nR

elay

<11

-2>

C13

CO

MB

INA

TIO

N S

WF

rom

Fog

Lig

htR

elay

<5-

3>

DA

YT

IME

RU

NN

ING

LIG

HT

RE

LAY

NO

. 3

15A HEAD(LH- UPR)

15A HEAD(RH- UPR)

7. 5A DRL

H 1HEADLIGHT HI LH

H 2HEADLIGHT HI RH

15A HEAD(RH- LWR)

15A HEAD(LH- LWR)

H 4HEADLIGHT LO RH

H 3HEADLIGHT LO LH

C12HIGH BEAM INDICATORLIGHT[COMB. METER]

To IntegrationRelay<11- 1>

To

The

ftD

eter

ren

tan

d D

oor

Lock

Con

trol

EC

U<

14-

3>

B

B- Y

BR

2

1

Rig

ht k

ick

pane

lFr

ont

side

of

left

fend

erF

ront

sid

e of

right

fend

er

2B

4B

1A

5A

1B

3B

2A

3 AD 2

A,

D 3

B

7I F

2Y- G

DA

YTI

ME

RU

NN

ING

LIG

HT

RE

LAY

NO

. 3

1 452

3 6

12

34

AD

2G

RA

YB

D 3

GR

AY

2 2W

W- B

W-

B

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

He

ad

ligh

t(C

an

ad

a)

K

Page 243: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

7 S

UP

RA

AC

C

IG1

AM

14

2

21

35

221J

4

1B

4

1K11

1A3

1C

16

12

12

23

12

1C

2

1J5

1J1

1K

5

IEE

BE

AB

IB

J

12 1H

1

1C

10

12

12

1

6B

O1

1B

M1

3B

O1

2B

M1

BI

BJ

1B2

1I

10

5IE

1

G

W

W- L

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

Y Y

VV

G

B

W- B W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

G

G

LG

LG

LG

W- B

W- B

W- B

W G- W G- W G- W

B-Y

G-

W

R- W

W- B

R- W

W- B W- B

G- W G- W W- B W- B

W-

B

R-

W

W-B

2

5

211

9

38

47

1

3

1

18

12 2

11

B- Y

W

W- B

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

I20INTEGRATIONRELAY

TAILLIGTHTRELAY

10A

TA

IL

DIO

DE

OFF

TA

IL

HE

AD

TE

LH

BA

TTE

RY

Left

kick

pane

lF

ron

t si

deof

left

fend

er

Fro

nt s

ide

ofrig

ht f

end

er

10A

GA

UG

E15

AS

TOP

T 6REAR LIGHT WARNING LIGHT[TELLTALE LIGHT RH]

S11

ST

OP

LIG

HT

SW

+T

BW

RN

STP

+

-TE

ST

P-

F 5FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT LH

P13PARKING LIGHT LH

F 8PARKING LIGHT RH

F 6FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT RH

R12REAR SIDE MARKERLIGHT RH

R11REAR SIDE MARKERLIGHT LH

R10STOP LIGHT RH[REAR COMB. LIGHT RH]

L 1LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

H14HIGH MOUNTEDSTOP LIGHT

Left

quar

ter

pilla

rLo

wer

bac

kpa

nel

cen

ter

Left

quar

ter

pilla

r

Low

er b

ack

pane

l cen

ter

W- B

W- B

2A

1

60A POWER

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

120A ALT

C13

LIG

HT

CO

NTR

OL

SW

[CO

MB

. S

W]

2

L 2

LIG

HT

FAIL

UR

E S

EN

SO

R

11 1

22 2

W-B

G- W G- W

G-W

To Theft Deterrentand Door LockControl ECU<14- 3>

12

G

IJ1

11G

-WG

-WG

-W

G-W

G-W

G-W

G- W

G- WTo

AB

S E

CU

<18

-4>

<19

-3>

To E

ngi

ne C

ont

rol

Mod

ule

<3-

8><

4-7

>

To C

ruis

e C

ontro

l EC

U<

17-4

>

To S

hift

Lock

EC

U<

22-3

>

1E12

Y

51

R10TAILLIGHT RH[REAR COMB. LIGHT RH]

3

R 9STOP LIGHT LH[REAR COMB. LIGHT LH]

5

R 9TAILLIGHT LH[REAR COMB. LIGHT LH]

51

W-B

W- B

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

Ta

illig

ht

top

Lig

ht

222

W

W

W-

B

BK

Rig

ht s

ide

ofh

igh

mou

nte

dst

op li

ght

W- B

W- B

W- B W- B

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 244: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

8 S

UP

RA

21

35

1B

2

2

1K

111I

3

IH

35

12

12

31

21

21

32

12

820

10I F

3

10

IH1

215

IH2

16IF

1

10B

2A

9A

5C

TA

ILLI

GH

TR

ELA

Y

10A

PA

NEL

Rig

ht k

ick

pane

l

J 1

JUN

CT

ION

CO

NN

EC

TOR

J 1

JUN

CTI

ON

CO

NN

EC

TOR

R 8

RH

EO

ST

AT

G 4GLOVE BOXLIGHT SW

A29ASHTRAYILLUMINATION

O 5A/T INDICATOR ILLUMINATION[O/D MAIN SW]

E 8ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLEDTRANSMISSION PATTERNSELECT SW

T 8TRACTION CONTROL SW

S 6SEAT HEATER SW

A

BB

BB

BB 2

1

B

A

3B

BA

TTE

RY

G 3GLOVE BOX LIGHT

H10HAZARD SW

RADIO AND PLAYER

C 7CIGARETTE LIGHTER ILLUMINATION

H12HEATER CONTROL SW

W- B

W- G

W- G

W- G

W- G

W- G

W

W- G

W- G

W- G

W- G

W- G

W- G

W- G

G- O

W- B

GG- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

G- O

BW- L

G-O

G-O

G-O

G-

OG

-O

G-

OG

-O

G-

OG

-OG

-O

W-

GW

-GW

-G

W-G

W- B

G-

O

(* 1) (* 1)

W- G

(*1)

(*2) (*2)

(*1)

E

T

*2 :

w

/o S

tere

o P

ower

Am

plifi

er*1

:

w/ S

tere

o P

ow

er A

mp

lifie

r

12

34

56

7

89

1011

1213

1415

AR

6R

AD

IO A

ND

PLA

YE

R

BR

4

W- GG- O

W- G

(*2)

( *1)

( *2)

( *1)

11 22 2A1

120A ALT60A POWER

T 6ODO AND TRIP ILLUMINATION[TELLTALE LIGHT RH]

From Combinat ionMeter<26- 8>

12

34

56

78

910

12

34

56

R 5

C

R 4 B , R 5 C , R 6 A

4 10

See

Tai

lligh

tS

yste

m<

7-1>

IELe

ft ki

ck p

ane

l

1E18

1J1

W- B W- B

ILL

-

G-O

G-O

G- O

22 W

C10METER ILLUMINATION[COMB. METER]

12

13

Illu

min

atio

nP

ow

er

So

urc

e

(Canada)

(2JZ- GTE)

(Canada)

(2JZ- GTE)

G- O

To

Clo

ck<

21-3

>

K

Page 245: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

9 S

UP

RA

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

14

2

2

1J

5

1 J4

12

IF1

17IF

1

1E1

41E

191A

4

4IF

1

3IB

1

7 1H 11 1H

3 1C 7 1A

1C4

IE4

44

2A

BI

BJ

EB

12

2

22

16IB

2

10

21 EA

I H

15B

6A

7A

1B4

1E7

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

H10

HA

ZA

RD

SW

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada) 120A ALT

15AHAZ- HORN

7.

5ATU

RN

B1

FTB

TR

B2

TL

OFF

ON

BA

TT

ER

Y

Left

kick

pane

lR

igh

t ki

ckpa

nel

Fro

nt s

ide

of le

ftfe

nde

r

Low

erba

ckpa

nel

cent

er

Left

quar

ter

pilla

r

R 9REAR TURN SIGNALLIGHT LH[REAR COMB. LIGHT LH]

R10REAR TURN SIGNALLIGHT RH[REAR COMB. LIGHT RH]

F 7FRONT TURN SIGNALLIGHT LH

F 8FRONT TURN SIGNALLIGHT RH

TURN SIGNALINDICATOR LIGHT [COMB. METER]

J 1

JUN

CTI

ON

CO

NN

EC

TO

R

H 8

HO

RN

LH

H 9

HO

RN

RH

C13

HO

RN

SW

[CO

MB

. S

W]

To T

heft

Det

err

ent

and

Doo

r Lo

ck C

ontro

lE

CU

<14

-4>

C10 A , C12 B

HO

RN

RE

LAY

L- R

L- B

L- R L- R

W- B W- B

L- B

L- B

L- B

G- Y

G- B

W- B

W- B W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

G- B

G- Y

G- B

G- Y

W- R

R- BR- B

G- Y

G- B

G- B

G- Y

B

G- R

W

WW

W

WW

L-R

G-Y

G-B

G-

B

G-

YG

-Y

W-B

W-B

R-B

W-R

R-B

WW

B- Y

A

66

108

58

1

RH

LH

TB

TR

TL

21

2 22

2

31

55

56

97

1 11

3A

11

BL

E W- B

139

87

65

43

21

1011

1216

1110

98

54

32

112

1314

67

15

AC

10B

LU

EB

C1

2

TU

RN

SIG

NA

L IN

DIC

ATO

R L

IGH

T[C

OM

B.

ME

TER

]

TU

RN

SIG

NA

LFL

AS

HE

R

C13

TUR

N S

IGN

AL

SW[C

OM

B.

SW

]

LH

RH

Fron

t sid

e o

fri

ght

fend

er

1

22 WPo

we

r S

ou

rce

Tu

rn S

ign

al

an

d H

az

ard

Wa

rnin

g L

igh

tH

orn

W

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 246: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

10

SU

PR

A

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

1

3 4

1J4

2

21E

1

1J

5

1J8

1B

51

C1

1F8

1H

9

1I1

61

C12

1I6

1E9

1I15

1K12

1J1

BI

IGIE

31

15IC

22

IC2

123 1

12

1K

1

1F6

1F1

0

1

1

32

1E1

2

1B

4

814

711

12

86

45

10

2

2 22

11

1

BR

W

B- W

R- B

R- W R- W R- W

R- B

R- W

R- W

Y

W- B

W- B

W- B

G

R- B

LG

W- B

W- B

G

R- B

LG

R

R

R-

B

W- B

G B-Y

Y Y- R

10A GAUGE

7. 5

AR

AD

NO

. 2

R

R

R

R

W- G

W

L 5

LUG

GA

GE

CO

MP

AR

TM

EN

TLI

GH

T S

W

L 4

LU

GG

AG

EC

OM

PA

RTM

EN

TL

IGH

T

P 6

PE

RS

ON

AL L

IGH

T

LH

RH

I18IGNITION KEYCYLINDER LIGHT

INT

EG

RA

TIO

N R

ELA

Y

T 6TELLTALE LIGHT RH

D10DOOR COURTESYSW LH

D11DOOR COURTESYSW RH

D 7DIODE(Interior Light)

U 1UNLOCKWARNING SW

W- B

W- B

BA

TTE

RY

7. 5A DOME

120A ALT50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

Lef

t qu

arte

rp

illar

Rig

ht k

ick

pane

lLe

ft ki

ckpa

nel

2A

1

2

SEAT BELT

1E

11

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

DOOR

From TheftDeterrent andDoor LockControl ECU<14- 2>

R

R-B

From

The

ftD

eter

rent

and

Doo

r Lo

ck C

ontro

lE

CU

<14

-3

>

LG

R- B

1 16

21

R- B

9

22 W

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

Un

loc

k a

nd

Se

at

Be

lt W

arn

ing

nte

rio

r L

igh

t

213

From Theft Deterrentand Door LockControl ECU<14- 2>

R- L

To Buckle SWLH<21- 4>

From Theft Deterrentand Door LockControl ECU<14- 3>

Y

Y

IE18

LGLG

LG LG

K

Page 247: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

11

SU

PR

A

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

1

3 4

1J4

1B

5

1J

5

2

2

1B

4

1I16

2A

3A

2A

4A

1A

1 J8

1E18

1E

10

1 J1

MM

MM

12

ID1

11

ID1

10ID

11

5IL

16

IL1

14

IL1

IE

BE

MLH

MLV

M+

MR

VM

RH

CO

NT

RO

LS

WS

ELE

CT

SW R

H

LH

UP

DO

WN

RIG

HT

LEF

T

UP

DO

WN

RIG

HT

LEF

T

8

21

65

37

53

44

35

R 7

RE

MO

TE C

ON

TRO

L M

IRR

OR

SW

MH

MV

M+

M+

MV

MH

R17

RE

MO

TE C

ON

TR

OL

MIR

RO

R R

H

R16

RE

MO

TE C

ON

TRO

LM

IRR

OR

LH

Left

kic

k pa

nel

17

6

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada) 120A ALT

7. 5A DOME

BATTERY

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

See Unlock and Seat BeltWarning System<10- 1>

See Taillight System<7- 1>

To Light Control SW[Comb. SW]<5- 1><6- 2>

W W

R

R

B

R- Y

R

W- B

LG

LG- B

LG- R

LG

LG- B

LG- R

BR- B

BR- Y

LG- RLG- R

BR- B

BR- Y

GR

GG

LG-

R

W-B

10A

GA

UG

E

INT

EG

RA

TIO

N R

ELA

Y

1

7.

5AR

AD

NO

. 2

B-

Y

See Taillight System<7- 1>

22 W

11

1 22

2

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

Lig

ht

Au

to T

urn

Off

Re

mo

te C

on

tro

l M

irro

r

From Headlight Relay<5- 2><6- 2>

I20

A

12

34

I20

A

INTE

GR

ATI

ON

RE

LAY

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 248: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

12

SU

PR

A

1B2

1H15

1I7

2

1J1

1D10

1D

91

J2

IE

M1

2

6I C

2

3IL

117

IL1

4IL

1

15I D

114

ID1

M2

1M

21

M2

BQ

1

BI

43

12

1B

Q1

2A

810

9

4

45

2

75

13

W- L

Y

W- B

W- B

L

L

L

L

W- B

R- W

G- Y

W- L

L

L

L

B

22 1 1

W- B

L

L- W L- W L- W

L

G- W

R- LR- L

G- W

L

G- W

R- L

L

L- B

W- B

G- Y

R

W- B

Left

quar

ter

pilla

r

5IF

3

Left

kick

pan

el

BA

TTE

RY

120

AA

L T

60A PO

WE

R

PO

WE

R M

AIN

RE

LAY

P 9

PO

WE

R W

IND

OW

MO

TO

R L

H

P10

PO

WE

R W

IND

OW

MO

TOR

RH

P12

PO

WE

R S

AE

T M

OTO

R( D

river

’s

Sea

t S

lide

Con

trol

)

FRONT

REAR

FRONT

REAR

RE

CLI

NIN

G M

OT

OR

P11

PO

WE

R S

EA

T C

ON

TRO

L S

W( D

rive

r’s

Sea

t)

P 7POWER WINDOWCONTROL SW RH

R- W

W- B

L- W

UP

POWER WINDOWRELAY

UP

DOWN

30A

DO

OR

DOWN

UP

DOWN

NO

RM

AL

LOC

K

P 8

PO

WE

R W

IND

OW

MA

STE

R S

W

15

23

1

21

22 W

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

Po

we

r W

ind

ow

Po

we

r S

ea

t

From Theft Deterrentand Door Lock ControlECU<14- 4>

K

Page 249: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

13

SU

PR

A

2

AC

C

IG1

ST

2

IG2

AM

1

3 67

AM

21

J4

1J3

1J8

1B

2

22

2

1G10

1G6

1E

13

1B4

1J

1

1E3

1G3

1G4

1G7

1G9

1E4

2A

IE

11I F

12

IF1

12II1

157

63

21

6

E1

E2

TC

LA

109

85

1

1

2

2

4IB

1

B

W- B

R

B

B- Y(2JZ- GTE) B (2JZ- GE)

P- B(2JZ- GTE) R (2JZ- GE)

P- B

B B

B

B- Y

P- B

W- B

W- B

B

P- B

B

P- B

W- R

W

W- R

W

W- L

B- W

G

W- L

B- O

W- R

GR

W-L

G B-W

R

W

L

Y

7.

5AIG

N15

AC

IG1

0A

EC

U-

B

30A AM2

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

60A POWER

A28AIRBAG SQUIB(Front Passenger Airbag Assembly)

A27AIRBAG SQUIB(Steering Wheel Pad)

IG2

D+

D-

P+

P-

AC

C

A3

4A

IRB

AG

SE

NS

OR

AS

SE

MB

LY

BA

TT

ER

Y

Le

ft ki

ckp

anel

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

21

II1

120A ALT

152

SP

IRA

LC

AB

LE

11

112

2

22

1

T 6

SR

S W

AR

NIN

G L

IGH

T[T

EL

LTA

LE L

IGH

T R

H]

222

W

W

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

SR

S

To

Dat

a L

ink

Con

nect

or 2

<3-

3><

4-2>

To

Da

ta L

ink

Co

nnec

tor

1<

3-3>

<4

-2>

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 250: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

14

SU

PR

A

22

221J

4

1B

21J

51J

82

AC

C

IG1

AM

1

3 4

1B4

1H

151E

171E

2

13IF

1

6I F

2

13

ID119

IB6

11IF

29

IF3

4IE

1

4IB

6

7I D

11

ID1

21

21

1J1

1D

10

1B5

1E11

9IL

110

IL1

15IF

216

IF2

10IF

214

IF2

7IL

12

IL1

6I D

11

6ID

112

IL1

8IL

1

16IL

1

5ID

111

IL1M

M

7E

A1

3ID

1

L- WL- W

B- R

L- R

W

W- L

W(* 2)

W(* 1)

R

W(* 1)

W

Y

GR

G

G- Y G- Y

R- W

G- R

P- BP- B

P- B P- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

LL

GR

Y

W

G- Y

W- B

W- B

W- B

W- B

R- W

G- RG- R

R- W

38

43

R- B

G- W

R- Y

L- O

L- R L- R

L- O

R- Y

G- W

LG

W

L- Y

G- B

L- Y

L- R

W- B

G- R

R- W

L- W

L- Y L- R

L- R

W- B

W- B

W- B

L- W

1

12

21

23

21

14

21

32

43

L-R

L-R

W

W- B

W-B

G-Y

R-W

G-R

R

G B-

Y

22

22

2 1

1 11

1

W

G- Y

W-B

W-B

L-Y

W- B

P- B

L- RL- Y

G- B

GR

BA

TTE

RY

120A ALT

15AHAZ- HORN

7. 5A DOME

60A POWER

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

L 3LUGGAGECOMPARTMENTKEY UNLOCK SW

E 6ENGINE HOODCOURTESY SW

30A D00R

10A ECU- IG

15A CIG

W- L

UNLOCK

LOCK

UNLOCK

LOCK

UNLOCK

LOCK

UNLOCK

LOCK

D12DOOR KEY LOCK ANDUNLOCK SW LH

P 8DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW LH[POWER WINDOW MASTER SW]

D14DOOR LOCK CONTROLSW RH

D13DOOR KEY LOCK ANDUNLOCK SW RH

D15DOOR LOCK MOTOR AND DOORUNLOCK DETECTION SW LH

D16DOOR LOCK MOTOR AND DOORUNLOCK DETECTION SW RH

B

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

LU

GD

SW

HK

SW

UL3

L2L1

UL1

UL

12L

SW

DA

CT

-LS

WP

AC

T+

E

HO

RN

SR

LYH

EA

DTA

ILD

SW

DD

SW

L+

B1

SH

AC

CIG

+B

2

R

From Horn Relay<9- 4>

From Starter Relay<1- 2>

From Headlight Relay<5- 2 <6- 2>

From Taillight Relay<7- 1>

To Door CourtesySW LH<10- 1>

To Luggage Compar tmentLight SW<10- 4>

*1 :

2JZ

-GE

*2 :

2JZ

-GTE

TH

EFT

DE

TE

RR

EN

T A

ND

DO

OR

LO

CK

CO

NT

RO

L E

CU

BJ

EA

IEF

ront

sid

e of

right

fend

erLe

ft ki

ck p

ane

l

W(* 1)

IHR

ight

kic

k pa

nel

Low

er b

ack

pan

el c

ente

r

2A

1

T 1

TH

EF

TD

ETE

RR

EN

TH

OR

N

W(*2)

(* 2)

(*1) (*1 M/T)

(* 2) (* 2)

4IF

3

T 5THEFT DETERRENTINDICATOR LIGHT[TELLTALE LIGHT LH]

1E18

10

IND W- L W- B

9

R- L R- L

DS

WP

2

21

22II1

R- B

IF2

3

22 W

2

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

Th

eft

De

terr

en

t a

nd

Do

or

Lo

ck

Co

ntr

ol

W-B

9A

7A

8A

11B

9B

14B

19B

12B

20

B6

B22

B5

B8

B16

B15

B2

A21

B3

A4

A

1B

4B

7B

23

B10

B25

B2

4B

6A

12IF

3 YYTo Power MainRelay<12- 1> P

RLY

12

3

45

67

89

1920

12

34

67

89

1011 25

2423

2221

1715

1413

1218

5 16

BT1

3O

RA

NG

E

AT

7O

RA

NG

E

TH

EF

T D

ET

ER

RE

NT

AN

DD

OO

R L

OC

K C

ON

TR

OL

EC

U

T 7

A,

T13

B

To Unlock WarningSW<10- 2>

To Door CourtesySW RH<10- 2>

P- B

(* 3)

P- B

(* 1 A/T)

*3 :

Exc

ept 2

JZ-G

E M

/T

K

Page 251: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

15

SU

PR

A( C

ont

. n

ext

pag

e)

2

AC

C

IG1

ST

2

IG2

AM

14 86

7A

M2

1J4

2

2

22

22

1J

31J

6

8E

A1

2E

A2

22

1B

4

22

22

1E8

1K4

21

35

21

531

3II1

13IJ

2

EA

1

4

4IB

1

24A

1A

76

B31

A9

B10

B3

1B

12B

13B

33A

77

B2

A4

A12

A24

B62

B42

B63

B41

B4

3B

64

B65

B45

B

2A

66

B28

B78

B7

9B

80

B3

A18

A25

A28

A10

A9

A7

A

23B

14B

3B

21

B1

B11

A

21

12

3IJ

238

II1

12I J

25

II1

12

13 1H

1 1J

W- R

W

B- Y

B- R

B- W

GR

B- Y

B- R B- R

GR

B- W

B- O

B- W

B- RB- R

R- L

W- R

W- G

LG- R

Y- G

W- R

W

B- Y

B-

R

B-R

B-

R

W-

B B- W

B-W

B-Y

R-

L

B-

R

B-Y R

-B

LG-R

G-B

LG- B

R

G

L

Y

BR

BR

BR

Y

G- Y

W- L

V

W-L

G-Y

W-B

W-B

Y

G- Y

W- L

V- G

84

15

67

23

2

2

22

1

1

B- O

B

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

See

Eng

ine

Con

trol

Sys

tem

<3-

1>

EFI NO. 2 RELAY

EFI MAIN RELAY

7. 5A ST

7. 5A IGN

11

1

B

2

W- B

120A ALT

30A EFI NO. 2

30A EFI NO. 1

See Engine ControlSystem<3- 7>

See Engine ControlSystem<3- 7>

See Engine ControlSystem<3- 8>

From Cruise ControlECU<17- 3>

BA

TT

ER

Y

M-R

EL

IGS

WN

SW

+B

BA

TT

ST

AS

P1

STP

OD

1O

ILP

M1

VTA

2ID

L2S2

S1

VC

CV

TA1

IDL1

E2

THA

VG

E2G

See

Eng

ine

Con

trol

Sys

tem

<3-

7><

3-8>

K 4

KIC

K D

OW

NS

W

See Engine ControlSystem<3- 7>

0 1O/D DIRECT CLUTCH SPEED SENSOR

V11VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 2(Electronically Controlled Transmission)

B- R

E 2

ELE

CT

RO

NIC

ALL

Y C

ON

TR

OLL

ED

TR

AN

SM

ISS

ION

SO

LEN

OID

To Cruise ControlECU<17- 3>

E 9

B, E

10A

EN

GIN

E C

ON

TR

OL

MO

DU

LE

10

30

50

70

1 21

41

61

2 22

42

62

3 23

43

63

4 24

44

64

5 25

45

65

6 26

46

66

7 27

47

67

8 28

48

68

9 29

49

69

11

31

51

71

20

40

60

80

19

39

59

79

18

38

58

78

17

37

57

77

16

36

56

76

15

35

55

75

14

34

54

74

13

33

53

73

12

32

52

72

BE

9D

AR

K G

RA

Y

EN

GIN

E C

ON

TR

OL

MO

DU

LE

B-R

B- R

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

30A AM2

SLN

+S

LU+

SLU

-S

LN-

SLT

-S

LT+

S1

S2

SLT

+S

LT-

SLN

-S

LU

-S

P2

+S

P2-

NC

O+

NC

O-

AB

S

R2

LO

D2

MI

MK

DE

01E

02E

03

1

EB

Fro

nt s

ide

ofle

ft fe

nder

ED

SLU

SLN

SLT

NO. 1

NO. 2

Re

ar s

ide

ofin

take

man

ifold

10

20

30

40

1 11

21

31

2 12

22

32

3 13

23

33

4 14

24

34

5 15

25

35

6 16

26

36

7 17

27

37

8 18

28

38

9 19

29

39

AE

10D

AR

K D

RA

Y

B

W

O

G

L

BR

R

Y

22W

5E

A2B- R

B-W

B- R

B-W

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

Ele

ctro

nic

ally

Co

ntr

olle

d T

ran

sm

issi

on

an

d A

/T I

nd

ica

tor(

2J

Z-

GT

E)

B C D E F G HA

BR- B

69B

BR

E1

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 252: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

56

78

15

SU

PR

A( C

on

t’d

)

78

109

23

4

PR

ND

2L

1 J5

12 1E

7II1

1II1

18II1

27II1

IF31

24

IHIE

A A

12

36II1

BI

BJ

14

10

67

811

17II1

II123

IE1

12

132

12

B-Y

R-B

LG-R

G-

B

G-R

R-B

LG-R

G-

BY

YY

Y

Y

G- R

R- B

LG- R

G- B G- B

L- Y

G- R

L

G- W

Y

W- B

W- BW- B

V

W-L

G-

Y

W-

B

VV

V

W-B

W-B

V

W-L

V

R- B R- B R- B

R- B

R- B

Y

(A/T)

10A

GA

UG

E

P 2

BA

CK

-UP

LIG

HT

SW

AN

D A

/T IN

DIC

ATO

RL

IGH

T S

W[P

AR

K/N

EU

TR

AL

PO

SIT

ION

SW

]

B 1

BA

CK

-UP

LIG

HT

SW

(M/T)

R-B

( A/T

)

R-B

W-

B

R-B

To

Cru

ise

Co

ntro

lE

CU

<1

7-2>

VW

-B

43

MA

NU

AL

NO

RM

AL

E 8

ELE

CT

RO

NIC

AL

LY C

ON

TR

OLL

ED

TR

AN

SM

ISS

ION

PA

TTE

RN

SELE

CT

SW

L

O/D OFF

MANU

P

R

N

D

2

C11

A/T

IN

DIC

ATO

R L

IGH

T[C

OM

B.

ME

TER

]

J 1

JUN

CT

ION

CO

NN

EC

TOR

O 5

O/D

MA

IN S

W5

5

44

W- BW- B

R10

RH

R 9

LH

BACK- UP LIGHT[REAR COMB. LIGHT]

Low

er

back

pane

l cen

ter

Left

quar

ter

pilla

rR

ight

kic

k pa

nel

Left

kick

pan

el

To D

ata

Lin

kC

onne

ctor

2<

3-3>

( M/T

)

( A/T

)

GR

L

See Combination Meter<26- 8>3

IJ27

G-R

W- B

Ele

ctro

nic

ally

Co

ntr

olle

d T

ran

sm

iss

ion

an

d A

/T I

nd

ica

tor

( 2JZ

-G

TE

)B

ac

k-U

p L

igh

t(2

JZ

-G

TE

)

R-B

A B C D E F G H

K

Page 253: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

16

SU

PR

A( C

ont

. n

ext

pag

e)

2

AC

C

IG1

ST

2

IG2

AM

14 86

7A

M2

1J4

2

2

22

1J

31J

6

3E

A3

2

1B

4

22

1E8

1K4

21

53

13

II113

I J2

EA

1

4

4IB

1

24A

1A

76

B31

A9

B10

B8

B

33A

77

B2

A4

A12

A41

B43

B64

B6

5B

45B

66B

69B

80

B7

9B

3A

18A

25A

28A

10A

9A

23

B

21

3IJ

238

II1

12I J

25

II1

12

13 1H

1 1J

W- R

W

B- Y

B- R

B- W

B- R

B- Y

B- W

B- O

B- W

B- RB- R

R- L

W- R

B- R

W- R

W

B-R

B-W

B-W

R-L

L-Y

G-B

R

BR

BR

Y

G- Y

W- L

V

W-L

G-Y

W-B

W-B

Y

G- Y

W- L

V

21

3

2

2

2

1

1

B- O

B

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

EFI MAIN RELAY

7. 5A ST

7. 5A IGN

11

B

2

W- B

120A ALT

30A EFI NO. 1

See Engine ControlSystem<4- 8>

See Engine ControlSystem<4- 7>

From Cruise ControlECU<17- 3>

LG- B

BA

TT

ER

Y

M-R

EL

IGS

WN

SW

+B

BA

TT

ST

AS

P1

STP

OD

1

S2

S1

VC

VTA

1ID

L1

E2

THA

VG

See

En

gine

Con

trol

Sys

tem

<4-

8>

K 4

KIC

K D

OW

NS

W

V11

VE

HIC

LE

SP

EE

D S

EN

SO

R N

O.

2( E

lect

roni

cally

Con

trolle

d T

rans

mis

sion

)

E 2

ELE

CT

RO

NIC

ALL

Y C

ON

TR

OLL

ED

TR

AN

SM

ISS

ION

SO

LEN

OID

To Cruise ControlECU<17- 3>

E 9

B, E

10A

EN

GIN

E C

ON

TRO

L M

OD

ULE

10

30

50

70

1 21

41

61

2 22

42

62

3 23

43

63

4 24

44

64

5 25

45

65

6 26

46

66

7 27

47

67

8 28

48

68

9 29

49

69

11

31

51

71

20

40

60

80

19

39

59

79

18

38

58

78

17

37

57

77

16

36

56

76

15

35

55

75

14

34

54

74

13

33

53

73

12

32

52

72

10

20

30

40

1 11

21

31

2 12

22

32

3 13

23

33

4 14

24

34

5 15

25

35

6 16

26

36

7 17

27

37

8 18

28

38

9 19

29

39

BE

9D

AR

K G

RA

YA

E10

DA

RK

DR

AY

EN

GIN

E C

ON

TR

OL

MO

DU

LE

E1

EO

1E

O2

KD

MM

IO

D2

L2

SL

SP

2+

8E

A1

B- Y

B- W

B- R

B-R

S2

S1

SL

50A AM1

30A AM2

B-

Y

2A

1

EB

Fro

nt s

ide

ofle

ft fe

nder

ED

Re

ar s

ide

ofin

take

man

ifold

NO. 2

NO. 1

SLN

B

W

Y

22W

B- W

BR

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

Ele

ctro

nic

ally

Co

ntr

olle

d T

ran

sm

iss

ion

an

d A

/T I

nd

ica

tor(

2J

Z-

GE

)

B C D E F G

3B

SP

2-

AB

-Y

G

B24

OIL

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 254: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

56

78

16

SU

PR

A (

Co

nt’

d)

78

109

23

4

PR

ND

2L

1 J5

12 1E

7II1

1II1

18II1

27II1

IF31

24

IHIE

A A

12

36II1

BI

BJ

14

10

67

811

17II1

IJ27

IE1

12

132

12

B-Y

L -Y

G-

B

G-R

L-Y

G-

BY

YY

Y

Y

G- R

L- Y

G- B G- B

L- Y

G- R

L

G- W

Y

W- B

W- BW- B

V

W-L

G-

Y

W-

B

V V

W-B

W-B

V

W-L

R- B R- B

R- B

R- B

Y

(A/T)

10A

GA

UG

E

P 2

BA

CK

-UP

LIG

HT

SW

AN

D A

/T IN

DIC

ATO

RL

IGH

T S

W[P

AR

K/N

EU

TR

AL

PO

SIT

ION

SW

]

B 1

BA

CK

-UP

LIG

HT

SW

(M/T)

R-B

( A/T

)

R-B

R-B

R-B

To C

ruis

e C

ontr

ol

EC

U<

17-

2>

VW

-B

43

MA

NU

AL

NO

RM

AL

E 8

ELE

CT

RO

NIC

AL

LY C

ON

TR

OLL

ED

TR

AN

SM

ISS

ION

PA

TTE

RN

SELE

CT

SW

L

O/D OFF

MANU

P

R

N

D

2

C11

A/T

IN

DIC

ATO

R L

IGH

T[C

OM

B.

ME

TE

R]

J 1

JUN

CT

ION

CO

NN

EC

TOR

O 5

O/D

MA

IN S

W5

5

44

W- B

W-

B

R10

RH

R 9

LH

BACK- UP LIGHT[REAR COMB. LIGHT]

Low

er

back

pane

l cen

ter

Left

quar

ter

pilla

rR

ight

kic

k pa

nel

Left

kick

pan

el

( M/T

)

( A/T

)

G- W

R- B

L

(A/T)3

See Combination Meter<26- 8>

23

II1

G-R

W- B W- B

Ele

ctro

nic

ally

Co

ntr

olle

d T

ran

sm

iss

ion

an

d A

/T I

nd

ica

tor

( 2JZ

-G

E)

Ba

ck

-U

p L

igh

t(2

JZ

-G

E)

A B C D E F G

G-R

K

Page 255: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

17

SU

PR

A

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

14

1J4

1J

5

221B

4

1E12

1 H12

1I9

21II1

11I F

14

IF2

21

9A

6B

IE1H

13

1J

1

9IB

615

IB6

8IB

6

17IB

6

43

M

10IJ

21

1IJ

23

IJ1

1 H8

1B2

W W

W- L

P- B(2JZ- GTE) R (2JZ- GE) P- B

R

O

Y O

Y

B- R

W- R

L

R- Y

G- R

LG

B- W

W- B

R

O

G- R

W- B

G- R

LG

R- L

BR- YW- B

W-

B

B

RO

G-

R

W-

B

BR- Y

131

819

11

1210

22

21

3

515

17

87

214

15

4

R- L

92

1R- L

BR- B(2JZ- GTE)LG- B(2JZ- GE)

R (2JZ- GTE)R- B(2JZ- GE)

R- L

LG- B

R- B

W-L

B-Y

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

10A

GA

UG

E10

AE

CU

-IG

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR LIGHT[COMB. METER]

C15CRUISE CONTROLCLUTCH SW(M/T)

TC

PI

DB

BA

TT

GN

DC

CS

CM

SM

CM

OL

60A POWER

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

120A ALT

BA

TTE

RY

RE

SU

ME

/A

CC

EL

SE

T/

CO

AS

T

CA

NC

EL

MA

IN

C1

4C

RU

ISE

CO

NT

RO

LS

W

C 4

CR

UIS

E C

ON

TRO

L A

CT

UA

TOR

10A

EC

U-B

EC

TO

DID

L

S11STOP LIGHT SW

C10 A , C12 B

2A1

From Odo and Trip Meter[Telltale Light RH]<26- 1>

From Stop Light SW<7- 4>

20 SP

DS

TP-

16

P

G- W

139

87

65

43

21

1011

12

1611

109

85

43

21

1213

146

715

BC

12

AC

10B

LUE

CR

UIS

E C

ON

TRO

LIN

DIC

AT

OR

LIG

HT

[CO

MB

. M

ETE

R]

C16

CR

UIS

E C

ON

TR

OL

EC

U

From Engine ControlModule<15- 2><16- 2>

From ThrottlePosition Sensor<3- 8><4- 8>

111

222

To Data LinkConnector 1<3- 3><4- 2>

To Data LinkConnector 2<3- 3><4- 2>

From A/T IndicatorLight SW[Park/NeutralPosition SW]< 15- 5>< 16- 5>

( A/T

)

22 W

2

W

G- R

(M/T) (M/T)

(A/T)

(A/T)

(A/T)

(A/T)To Engine ControlModule<15- 2><16- 2>

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

Cru

ise

Co

ntr

ol

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 256: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

18

SU

PR

A

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

14

1J5

6B

5B

1B

3A

4A

1IB

6

1K

131

E12

13A

2A

7B

1B

10B

3B

14A

3A

16A

11A

21A

10

A1

9A

20A

18A

8A

7A

8B

9B

11B

2B

4B

1B

4

BB

2A

5A

5B

4B

1B

4A

2A

1A

21

IG

21

11

22

W- BW- BW- B

W- B

P

LY

LG- B

B- R

GN

D2

GN

D1

RR

+R

L-

RL

+F

R-

FR+

FL-

FL+

2 4

B- R

8IC

22

IB5

3IC

2

L- W

L

W- B

B

W- B

L- W

L

R

R

4IB

25

IB2

1IB

5

W

BB

W

R R

LL

RR

-

V

LG LG

V

SF

LHS

RH

SF

LR

AS

T

B- R

L

15IJ

121

II1

RR

R

Y Y

B-

Y

L

AA

6B

LAC

KB

A 7

GR

AY

12

34

1 452

3 6

13IB

62

IB6

M

B- Y

P

B- R

Y- G Y- G

B- R

P

B- Y

AA

8G

RA

YB

A 9

GR

AY

AB

S R

EL

AY

AB

S E

CU

AS

TS

FR

RS

RH

SF

LH

V

V- W

L- B L- B

V- W

V

GN

DB

SS

RR

+M

R

AB

S A

CT

UA

TOR

BS

BM

ABS

RE

LAY

P-B

120A ALT

22

EA

A10

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

FR

ON

T L

H

A1

1A

BS

SP

EE

DS

EN

SO

R F

RO

NT

RH

A31

AB

S S

PE

ED

SE

NS

OR

RE

AR

LH

A3

2A

BS

SP

EE

DS

EN

SO

R R

EA

R R

H

AB

S A

CTU

ATO

R

AB

S E

CU

SR

R+

MR

TS

TC

WIG

1D

/G

60A ABS NO. 1

BA

TTE

RY

W

R

WWA

10A

EC

U-

IG10

AG

AU

GE

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

+BS

W

50A AM1

Fron

t sid

e of

right

fen

der

Rig

ht

kick

pa

nel

L

W-B

B-

Y

A 8

A,

A 9

B

IF1

11R

W

A18

B, A

19A

A 6

A,

A 7

B

IF2

12L

T 5ABS WARNING LIGHT[TELLTALE LIGHT LH]

111

22

2

1

BA

18

AA

19

16I J

1

To Data LinkConnector 1<4- 3>

To Data LinkConnector 1<4- 2>

To Data LinkConnector 2<4- 2>

To Data LinkConnector 1<4- 2>

B- R

L

From

Dat

a Li

nkC

onn

ecto

r 1<

4-2

>

To Data LinkConnector 2<4- 2>

L5

IB6

4IB

59

IB5

8IB

5

2A

+B

M

BM

2A

22 W

GN

D

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

AB

S( w

/o T

rac

tio

n C

on

tro

l)

6E

A1

14

41J

12

34

56

78

910

1112

12

34

56

78

910

11

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

22

12BG- W

STPFrom Stop Light

SW< 7- 4>

12

34

5

12

34

56

78

IB6

6

4A

9A

2B

3AMT

SF

RH

G- W

Y Y

G- W

SF

RH

MT

7IB

5

( SH

IELD

ED

)

( SH

IEL

DE

D)

1A

22A

6B

8B

SR

RS

FR

R

P- L

Y- R Y- R

P- L

3IB

55

IB5

SF

LR

SR

R

K

Page 257: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

19

SU

PR

A

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

14

10A

EC

U-

IG10

AG

AU

GE

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

120A

ALT

1J4

2

1J5

22

1E12

1K13

1B

4

2

12I F

21

6IJ

114

IJ1

21II1

13A

11A

18A

8A

24A

5A

6A

19

A7

A20

A

10A

23

A2

2A

9A

8B

2B

3B

9B

12

A25

A17

A4

A1

6A

3A

2A

5B

11B

IF1

11

2A

1

3IC

28

IC2

4IB

25

IB2

1IB

52

IB5

21

21

12

12

IELe

ft k

ick

pane

lIG

Rig

ht k

ick

pan

el

7IB

58

IB5

9IB

5

15A

4B

6B

1A

12B

14A

10B

26A

1B

7B

13IB

62

IB6

1IB

6

34

21

46

31

2

55

55

5

55

55

5

5

1B

2B

4B

3B

5A

6B

5B

8B

7B

3A

2A

4A

10IB

55

IB6

4IB

53

IB5

6E

A1 6

IB5

6IB

6

1A EA

Fro

nt s

ide

right

fen

der

60A ABS NO. 1

1

1

2

2

2

4

RR

+R

R-

RL+

RL-

FL+

FL-

FR+

FR-

GN

D1

GN

D2

GG

ND

GL1

GL

2V

GS

SFR

HS

FLH

SR

RH

RL

B-Y

B- R

Y L L L

Y- R

P- B

L

Y- R

P- B

RR

LG- B

G- W

Y- B

GR- R

LG- B

O

V

P

L

LG

WW W

R

W

B

R

L

W- B

W- B

G

R

W

B

(SHIELDED)

Y

B- Y

P

IG1

WA

EX

OT

CD

/GS

TPR

RO

RLO

FR

OF

LO

2

(SHILEDED)

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

T 5ABS WARNING LIGHT[TELLTALE LIGHT LH]

To

Dat

a L

ink

Con

nect

or 1

<3-

3>

From

Thr

ottle

EC

U<

20-2

>

To Data LinkConnector 2<3- 3>

From Stop LightSW<7- 4>

GG

ND

GL1

GL

2V

GS

W- B

W- B

R

W

V

LG

B

L

Y

B- Y

P

W-

B

1

B

BATTERY

35

12

A32ABS SPEED SENSOR REAR RH

A31ABS SPEED SENSOR REAR LH

A10ABS SPEED SENSOR FRONT LH

A11ABS SPEED SENSOR FRONT RH

SFR

HS

FLH

SR

RH

A23

AB

S D

EC

ELE

RA

TIO

NS

EN

SO

R

RR

V- W

V

L- B

V- WV- W

LR

B- R

V- WL

L- W

W- B

V

L-B

B-R

SR

LH

AS

TS

FLR

SF

RR

SR

RR

SR

LRM

T

P- B

Y- G

B- R

Y- R

P- L

R- L

G- W

R+

MR

SR

A20

A, A

21

B

AB

S E

CU

ABS MOTORRELAY

ABS SOLENOIDRELAY

From Data LinkConnector 1<3- 3>

W- B

GN

D

BS

BM

MT

SR

LR

SR

RR

SF

RR

SFL

RA

ST

SR

LH

P- B

Y- G

B- R

Y- R

P- L

R- L

G- W

A 6

A, A

7B

AB

S A

CT

UA

TOR

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

AB

S( w

/ T

rac

tion

Co

ntr

ol)

12

34

5

12

34

56

78

AA

6B

LAC

KB

A 7

GR

AY

AB

S A

CTU

AT

OR

12

34

56

78

910

1112

13

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223

2425

26

12

34

56

78

910

1112

AA

20

BA

21

AB

S E

CU

15

IJ1

21AYY

TS

From EngineControl Module<3- 7>

To Throttle ECU<20- 3>

L

IB5

5

M

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 258: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

20

SU

PR

A

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

14

7. 5

ATR

AC

120A

AL

T

22

22

1 H8

1J4

1J

5

10A

GA

UG

E

1B2

1B4

22

1E

12 2

IF2

9IF

11

IF2

14IB

5

64

31

55

55

9A

5B

7B

3B

15B

7B

16

B8

B6

B1

4B

10B

11B

2B

1B

9B

2A

121

II1

11I F

1

IELe

ftki

ckpa

nel

IGR

ight

kick

pane

l

12B

4B

11A

12A

24A

25A

23A

6A

19A

16

A17

A9

A8

A2

1A

14A

7A

20A

15

A

12IB

511

IB5

13A

26A

3A

4A

5B

1A

EC

Fron

t sid

eo

f in

take

man

ifold

ED

Rea

r si

deof

inta

kem

anifo

ld

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

10A ECU- B 60A POWER

1

1

84

61

3

2

22

22

Y

R

TC

RR

OR

LOF

RO

FLO

CS

WS

NO

WE

01E

1

WW

W- L

L- Y

W

W- R

W

LG- R

P-G

W

W- R

L- R

L- B

BR- B

R

BR- B

L- B

L- R

W

P- G

LG- RY Y

B- Y

L- Y

BR- B

Y

L

B

R

WT

SIN

DIN

DB

ATT

+BR

LY+

RLY

-A

-A

B-

GE

11

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

SNOW

SLIP

T 5TRAC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT[TELLTALE LIGHT LH]

C10 A , C12 B

COMBINATION METER

TRC

TIO

NSO

LEN

OID

RE

LAY

S1

8S

UB

TH

RO

TT

LE V

ALV

EM

OT

OR

6

48

W- B W- B

W- B

W- B

BR

R- B

LG

P- B P- B

R

LG- R

Y- B

GR- R

LG- B

O

B

T 8

TR

AC

TIO

NC

ON

TRO

LS

W

To Data LinkConnector 1<3- 3>

To Data LinkConnector 2<3- 3>

To A

BS

EC

U<

19-3

>B

AT

TE

RY

I DL2

IDL

1W

AE

FIB

V- Y

G- O

P- L

P

W- L

Y

BR

B

W

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

(SHIELDED)

BG

E01

VTA

1V

TA2

NE

EFI

FF

AIL

ET

C+

ETC

-G

E12

EFI

+E

FI-

To E

ngin

e C

ontro

l Mod

ule

<3

-6>

12

34

56

78

910

1112

13

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223

2425

26

12

34

56

78

910

1112

1314

1516

AT

15B

T16

TH

RO

TTL

E E

CU

GR- R

R

L

B- R

T15

A,

T16

B

TH

RO

TTL

E E

CU

From Throttle PositionSensor<3- 8>

From ABS Warning Light[Talltale Light LH]<19- 1>

From EFI Main Relay<3- 4>

139

87

65

43

21

1011

12 1611

109

85

43

21

1213

146

715

BC

12

AC

10B

LUE

CO

MB

INA

TIO

N M

ET

ER

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

Tra

cti

on

Co

ntr

ol

1 1

A-

AB

-B

OFF

SNOW

From Sub ThrottlePosition Sensor<3- 8>

BR

W- B

K

Page 259: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

21

SU

PR

A

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

1

3 4

1J

51

B2

1J

4

22

2

44

1C7

21

53

5IC

2

1B

O1

8IF

1

1H12

1K

7

44

2A

1

1A

1B

1C

1B

4

R G B-Y

B

W- L

W

R

W

Y

W- LW- L

B

B

O

B B

B

B

GR

B B- W

O

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

30A DEFOG

10A GAUGE

RE

AR

WIN

DO

WD

EFO

GG

ER

RE

LAY

10A

MIR

-H

TR

60A POWER

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

120A ALT

7. 5A DOME

B

BA

TTE

RY

N 2

NO

ISE

FILT

ER

NO

ISE

FIL

TE

R

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

R18 B , R19 C

To A/C Amplifier<27- 5>

NO

ISE

FIL

TE

R

1

N 3

A

6B

M1B

21

35

1E6

1E2

1E11

1E1

71

C6

1K13

1H4

1D1

1B 1J

1J1

IEIH

BI

IG

1D1

0

13

IL1

3IF

1

16

IL1

14II1

4II1

21

21

22

11

12

65

435

2

4

22

11

231

AA

SP

DE

SO

L-

SO

L+

11 1K

32II1

G- O

L- R

R

B- W

W- B

W- L

W- G

LG- R(2JZ- GTE)W- L (2JZ- GE)

LG- B(2JZ- GTE)W- G (2JZ- GE)

B- R

B- R

W- B

W- B

B- W

B- W

W- B

R- Y

G- O

W- B

L- R L- R

W- B

W- B W- BL- R

To EngineControl Module<3- 7><4- 7>

10A EC

U-I

G10

AP

AN

EL

15A

CIG

B

L- R

From Integrat ionRelay<10- 1>

P 4

PP

S E

CU

B- R

C 8

CLO

CK

T12

RH

TENSION REDUCER SOLENOID

T11

LH

D 8DIODE(Idle- Up)

R17

RH

MIRROR HEATER[REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR]

R16

LH

J 1

JUN

CT

ION

CO

NN

EC

TOR

1

11 12

2

22

Rig

ht k

ick

pan

elLe

ft q

uart

erp

illar

Rig

ht k

ick

pane

lLe

ft ki

ck p

anel

See

Ta

illigh

t S

yste

m<

7-1>

TAIL

LIG

HT

RE

LAY

85

1AN

3

NO

ISE

FIL

TER

L- R

R- Y

W- B

W-

B

B 6

LHB

7R

H

P 1PPS SOLENOID

BUCKLE SW

RE

AR

WIN

DO

W D

EFO

GG

ER

BR

18G

RE

EN

CR

19

3 4

11

2

22 W

W

Ele

ctr

ic T

en

sio

nR

ed

uce

rP

PS

Clo

ck

Re

ar

Win

do

w D

efo

gg

er

an

d M

irro

r H

ea

ter

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

12

From ” PANEL” Fuse<8- 4>

P From Odo and Trip Meter[Telltale Light RH]<26- 1>

B- R

1I9

(2JZ- GE)

(2JZ- GTE)

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 260: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

22

SU

PR

A

1J4

1B4

1E2

1I

141I

9

1J

81J

5

2

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

1

3 4

34 1K1

2

1J1

1H

16

IC17

3B

Q1

31

42 21

4B

Q1

31

42 21

6I C

1

2B

Q1

BW

W- B W- B

W- BV W- B

W- B

B- R

B B

B B W- B W- B

W- B

W- BW- B

W- B

L

W- BL

W- B

Y

Y- R

Y

B

Y-

R

L-R

B-Y

G

W

L- R

G- W

C 6

CIG

AR

ETT

ELI

GH

TER

2 A

2

4 1

46

21

5

S12

SE

AT

HE

ATE

R( D

river

’s

Sea

t)

S14

SE

AT

HE

ATE

RR

ELA

Y( D

river

’s

Sea

t)

6

KLS

+E

AC

CIG

STP

BA

TTE

RY

J 1

JUN

CT

ION

CO

NN

EC

TOR

S 7SHIFT LOCK ECU

15A CIG

10A

EC

U-

IG1

5A SE

AT

-HTR

S15SEAT HEATER RELAY(Front Passenger’ s Seat)

From

Sto

p Li

ght S

W<

7-4>

U 1

KE

Y I

NT

ER

LOC

K S

OLE

NO

ID[U

NLO

CK

WA

RN

ING

SW

]

S 6

SE

AT

HE

AT

ER

SW

S13SEAT HEATER(Front Passenger’ s Seat)

A1

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

B

B

Y- R

2A1

22 1 1

120A

AL

T

50A

AM

1( U

SA

)60

A A

M1

( Ca

nada

)

IHIE

BI

Rig

ht k

ick

pane

lL

eft

kick

pan

el

P2

PP1

SLS

-

SLS

+

G-

R

G

G-W

L

L-R

SHIFT LOCKCONTROL SW

SHIFT LOCKSOLENOID

IGL

eft q

uar

ter p

illar

Rig

ht

kick

pan

el

22 W

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

Cig

are

tte

Lig

hte

rS

hif

t L

oc

kS

ea

t H

ea

ter

( Ca

na

da

)

LH

RH

2 1

4 1 3

K

Page 261: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

23

SU

PR

A 2

AC

C

IG1

AM

14

1J

4

1J

5

2

1K

121K

12

1J

1

1B4

1H

5 1IC

2

4B

M1

3B

M1

13IC

24

IC2

BM

1

5

BO

1

4

BO

1

2

BO

1

5

1 1A

2A

1J

1

IE

M

IEE

B

WA

SH

ER

1

OF

F

INT

ON

WA

SH

ER

2

+1R

C1R

EW

R

BA

TTE

RY

C14

RE

AR

WIP

ER

AN

DW

AS

HE

R S

W[C

OM

B.

SW

]

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada) 120A ALT

R1

5R

EA

R W

IPE

R M

OTO

R A

ND

RE

LAY

RE

AR

WIP

ER

RE

LAY

RE

AR

WIP

ER

MO

TOR

W- B

W- B

W- B W- B

BW

LG- R LG- R

LG- BLG- B

W

L L

LL

L

LG-R

LG-

BLG

-B

LG-R

LG

LLL

11

02

3 21

16

+B LM

SM

LS C1

C1

LB

SM

+B

LM

L

L L

B-

Y

20A

WIP

ER

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

L R

1

1 122

Left

kick

pan

el

Lef

t ki

ck p

anel

Fro

nt

side

of

left

fend

er

Y

22 W

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

IB21

M23

1

W 1

WA

SH

ER

MO

TO

R

LG

HIG

H

F2

+2

MIS

T

OFF

INT

LOW

WA

SH

ER

W+B

EW

F1

18

+1

+S

C14

FR

ON

T W

IPE

R A

ND

WA

SH

ER

SW

[CO

MB

. S

W]

WIP

ER

RE

LA

Y

L

7IB

29

IB2

8IB

22

IB2

+2+

1

G- W

B

E

F 9

FRO

NT

WIP

ER

MO

TOR

M

+S

L- R

L- W

23

65

1

813

74

G- W

L- R

L- W

L

L- O

W- B

W- B

L

L-O

16

Re

ar

Wip

er

an

d W

ash

er

Fro

nt

Wip

er

an

d W

as

he

r

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 262: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

K

Page 263: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

25

SU

PR

A

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

1

3

1J4

22

1J

8

1E

10

1B

4

1IF

1

10IE

111

IE1

2I F

33

IF3

4A

3A

2B

6B

1B

3B

7A

2A

6A

1A

5A

8IB

1

8A

9A

2ID

18

ID1

5IL

11

IL1

IF

7. 5

AR

AD

NO

. 2

R13

RE

AR

SP

EA

KE

R L

HR

14R

EA

R S

PE

AK

ER

RH

A30

AU

TO

AN

TE

NN

AC

ON

TR

OL

RE

LAY

RA

DIO

AN

D P

LAY

ER

11

22

2 2

2 211

AN

TA

MP

B

GN

D

AC

C

FL+

FL-

FR

+F

R-

AM

PA

NT

RR

-R

R+

RL-

RL+

F10

FR

ON

T T

WE

ET

ER

(SP

EA

KE

R)

LH

F11

FRO

NT

TW

EE

TE

R(S

PE

AK

ER

) R

H

11

F12

FR

ON

T D

OO

R S

PE

AK

ER

LH

F13

FR

ON

T D

OO

R S

PE

AK

ER

RH

P P

V

P

V

P

BR

V

LG

LG

L

L

V

LG LG

LL

B

L- Y

B

Y

R

W

B- R

P- L

W

R

Y

B

L- Y

WW

L- Y

GR

Left

kic

kpa

nel

BA

TTE

RY

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

G

L- Y

RA

DIO

AN

D P

LAY

ER

12

34

56

78

910

AR

4

12

34

56

BR

5

1

1 1

20A RAD NO. 1

120A ALT50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

2

22

4

1+B

*1 :

w

/ S

tere

o P

ower

Am

plif

ier

54

23

1J5

1E17

7IE

16

IE1

M1

2

IHA A

W- BW- B

6GN

D

P-

L

B-

R

( *1)

( *1)

(*2)

(*2)

AC

CIG

UP

DO

WN

G

R

B- R

GR

R

G

10A

EC

U-

IG

A33

AU

TO

AN

TE

NN

AM

OTO

R

To R

adi

o an

d P

laye

r<

24-

2>

Rig

ht k

ick

pane

l

J 1

JUN

CTI

ON

CO

NN

EC

TO

R

R 4

A, R

5B

L-Y

L- Y

78

B-Y

B-Y

L- Y

GR

*2 :

w

/o S

tere

o P

owe

r A

mpl

ifier

2A

1

GR

2 2W

Po

we

rS

ou

rce

Ra

dio

an

d P

lay

er(

w/o

Ste

reo

Po

we

r A

mp

lifie

r)A

uto

An

ten

na

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 264: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

MEMO

Page 265: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

26

SU

PR

A( C

ont

. n

ext

pag

e)

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

14

1J4

2

1 J5

1E12

1B

4

I F25II1

11

25

II18

II1

2II1

23II1

1

See Theft Deterrentand Door Lock ControlSystem<14- 2>

See Traction ControlSystem<20- 2>

See Engine ControlSystem<3- 4><4- 3>

MA

LFU

NC

TIO

NIN

DIC

ATO

R L

AM

P

OIL

OILLEVEL

TRAC OFF

SECURITY

ABS

V10VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR NO. 1(Combination Meter)

See TheftDeterrent andDoor Lock ControlSystem<14- 2>

See Interior LightSystem<10- 1>

See Unlock and Seat BeltWarning System<10- 1>

See Taillight System<7- 3>

See ChargingSystem<1- 4>

See IlluminationSystem<8- 4>

See

SR

S S

yste

m<

13-3

>

OD

O A

ND

TRIP

CHARGE

REARLIGHT

SEAT BELT

DOOR

SRS

10A

GA

UG

E

50A

AM

1( U

SA

)6

0A A

M1

( Can

ada)

T 6

TE

LLTA

LE

LIG

HT

RH

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

120A

ALT

To P

PS

EC

U<

21-3

>

To

A/C

Am

plifi

er<

27-5

>

To E

ngin

e C

ontr

ol M

odul

e<

3-7

><

4-7

>

To C

ruis

e C

ontr

ol

EC

U<

17-3

>

T 5

TELL

TALE

LIG

HT

LH

BA

TTE

RY

PPP PPP

B-Y

YY

L-R

R-GY

L-WY R

R-

G

R-

Y

L -R

Y

W

Y

Y

W

R- G

L- R

Y

P

BR

B- Y

B

P P

BR

L- W

L- R

Y

L- R

Y R

Y- B Y- B

R- G

R- Y

0 2

OIL

PR

ES

SU

RE

SW

1416

186

74

35

18

9

11

21

3

106

215

24

105

11

312

18

2 2

CO

MB

INA

TIO

N M

ET

ER

139

87

65

43

21

1011

1213

98

76

54

32

110

1112

BC

10B

LUE

CC

11

BR

OW

N

2A

1

IFLe

ft ki

ck p

anel

1611

109

85

43

21

1213

146

715

AC

12

2 2W

Po

we

r S

ou

rce

Co

mb

ina

tion

Me

ter

A B C D E F

See Interior LightSystem<10- 1>

See ABS (w/o Traction ControlSystem <18-4>See ABS (w/Traction Control)System <19-2>

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 266: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

56

78

26

SU

PR

A( C

on

t’d

)

11B

4B

14A

9B

13A

16A

6A

2A

3A

15A

6B

1C

4C

10C

6C

7C

8C

11C

12B

13

B

3C

13C

7B

12C

2C

5A

1A

10B

1B

2B

5B

8A

9A

8B

10A

11A

13IF

2

33

II124

II1

19II

1

5B

P1

3B

P1

1B

P1

21

IF

1

EB

IH

14IB

2

1IE

12

IE1

3IE

1

15IF

1

29II1

EC

See IlluminationSystem<8- 4>

See Turn Signaland Hazard WarningLight System<9- 3>

See HeadlightSystem<5- 3><6- 4>

See Cruise ControlSystem<17- 2>

To Rheostat<8- 4>

L

2

D

N

R

P

MANU

O/D OFF

TURN RH

TURN LH

HIGH BEAM

SNOW

CRUISE

BRAKE

SPEED

FUEL

FUEL

TACHO

MASTER

From

Eng

ine

Con

trol

Mo

dule

<3

-7>

Fro

m I

gnite

r<2-

4>

DE

LAY

BU

LBC

HE

CK

RE

LAY

E 7ENGINE OILLEVEL SENSOR

E 4

EN

GIN

E C

OO

LAN

TT E

MP

. S

END

ER

F14

FU

EL

SE

ND

ER

From Daytime RunningLight Relay(Main)<6- 1>

P 5

PA

RK

ING

BR

AK

ES

W

J 1

JUN

CTI

ON

CO

NN

EC

TO

R

B 2

BR

AK

E F

LU

ID L

EV

EL

WA

RN

ING

SW

BR- W

W- B

BR- W

BB- W

B- W(* 2) B- W

W- B W- B

W- BR- W(*1)BR- W(*2)R- W

BR- W

B- W

BR BR

G

BR

Y- R

Y- G

Y- B

BR BR

Y- B

Y- G Y- G

Y- B

BR

Y- L(*1)Y- R(*2)

G BR

BR

R- G

R- Y

L- R

L- W

Y- G

Y

B-W

Y

L-W

L-R

R

R-G

R-

Y

B-W

( Ca

nada

)

B-W

(Ca

nada

)

BR

-W

BR

-W

B-

W(C

anad

a)

BR

-W

BR

-W

DIO

DE

(*2)

( US

A *

1)

(US

A)

( Can

ada)

(Canada)

(USA)(USA)

(*1)

1

12

ILLUMINATION

*1

:

2J

Z-

GT

E

*2

:

2J

Z-

GE

WAT

ER

TE

MP

.

AA

12

3

CO

MB

INA

TIO

N M

ET

ER

C10

B,

C11

C,

C12

A

Fron

t sid

e of

inta

ke m

anifo

ldLe

ft ki

ck p

ane

lR

ight

kic

k pa

nel

Fro

nt s

ide

ofle

ft fe

nder

G- O

A

1 2

44

Co

mb

ina

tion

Me

ter

A B C D E F

To Generator<1- 4

B-W

( *1)

Fro

m A

/C A

mpl

ifier

<2

7-5>

Fro

m D

aytim

e R

unni

ngL i

ght

Rel

ay( M

ain)

<6-

2>

SLIP

7A

See

Tra

ctio

n C

ontr

olS

yste

m<

20-

2>

See Electronically ControlledTransmission and A/T IndicatorSystem <15-6><16-6>

Fro

m P

ark/

Ne

utra

l P

ositi

onS

W (

A/T

) <1

-3>

Fro

m C

lutc

h S

tart

SW

(M

/T)

<1-

3>

See

Ele

ctro

nic

ally

Co

ntro

lled

Tran

smis

sion

and

A/T

Ind

icat

or

Sys

tem

<

15-6

><

16-6

>

K

Page 267: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

12

34

27

SU

PR

A( C

ont

. n

ext

pag

e)

2

AC

C

IG1

AM

1

3 4

61

52

3

21

35

4

21

53

34

12

12 M

12 M

12

1E

13

1J

4

22

22

22

22

1B

21

B4

22

22

2

1A5

1K

2

1J5

10IF

1

1IB

4

3IB

2

3IK

1

2E

A1

5I F

1

2A

EB

IGE

B

2B

1B

1A

3A

2A

12 M1

IK1

2IK

1

10II1

EA

1

1

4

IG1

16 IG1

13 IG1

15 IG1

14

M

IF3

13

BA

TTE

RY

120A ALT60A POWER

50A AM1(USA)60A AM1(Canada)

30A FAN50A HTR

HEATERRELAY

A/C MAGNETICCLUTCH RELAY

E 5ENGINE COOLANTTEMP. SW

R 1RADIATORFAN MOTOR NO. 1

R20RADIATOR FANMOTOR NO. 2

BLOWER MOTORCONTROL RELAY

B 3BLOWER MOTOR

10A ECU- B

R 3RADIATOR FANRELAY NO. 2

I19

IGN

ITIO

N S

W

7. 5

AH

TR

R 2

RA

DIA

TO

R F

AN

RE

LAY

NO

. 1

To

Eng

ine

Con

trol M

odul

e<

3-8>

<4

-8>

A 4

A/C

MA

GN

ET

ICC

LUT

CH

W- R

W

W- L

W

W- R

B

B

R- LR- LR- LB- Y

L R- L

L- B

L- B

W- B

W- B

W- BL

L

L- R

L- WL- W

L- R

W- G

L

R- L

R- L

W- B

L- R

R- L

W- R(2JZ- GTE)

R- L(2JZ- GTE)

B

BR

BR

W- B

L L

W- B

L

W- B

W- B

W- B

L-W

L

L

L-W L

L

R-L

W-B

W-B

L-B

W-R

( 2JZ

-GTE

)

R-L

( 2JZ

-GT

E)

G B-

Y

R-L

R-

L

G-R G GR

GRG

G-

R

R-LG

W-

RR- L R- L

FR

ES

HR

EC

IRC

A24

AIR

IN

LET

CO

NT

RO

LS

ER

VO

MO

TO

R

L

L -W L

W- B W- B

L- R

W- G

( 2JZ

-GT

E)

R-L

(2JZ- GTE)

22

2

2

2 111

1

1

2 5 3 4

A/C

AM

PLI

FIE

R

12

34

56

7

89

1011

1213

1415

1617

18

AO

RA

NG

E

4 1213

1415

16

12

35

67

8

910

1117

1819

20

BO

RA

NG

E

12

34

56

78

910

1112

1

32

AB

LA

CK

1 2BB

LA

CK

AO

RA

NG

E

BLO

WE

R M

OT

OR

CO

NT

RO

L R

EL

AY

HE

AT

ER

CO

NTR

OL

SW

1314

1516

1718

1920

12

34

5

67

89

1011

1213

14

BO

RA

NG

E

B

+B

M+

M-

GN

DS

I1

Fro

nt s

ide

ofle

ft fe

nder

Rig

ht k

ick

pane

l

12

34

56

78

910

1112

1314

1516

1718

1920

2122

CO

RA

NG

EA

12

A13

A14

B 4

B 5

A/C

DU

AL

PR

ES

SU

RE

SW

12

34

12

AA

3B

LA

CK

BA

3G

RA

Y

B 4 A , B 5 B

H12

H13

22

2W

WW

-B

Fro

nt s

ide

ofle

ft fe

nde

rE

AFr

ont s

ide

ofri

ght

fend

er

W- B

Ra

dia

tor

Fa

n a

nd

Au

tom

atic

Air

Co

nd

itio

nin

gP

ow

er

So

urc

e

3A

2A

A 3 A

A/C SINGLEPRESSURE SW

A B C D E F G H I

W- BL- B

12

M

A 2A/C CONDENSERFAN MOTOR

L-B

K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Page 268: No Section Description - RHD Engineeringracehead.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2015/11/supra-wiring-diagrams.pdf · 3 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B This manual provides information on the

56

78

27

SU

PR

A( C

on

t’d

)

1J

8

1E2 6

IF3

6IG

11

IG1

7IG

111

IG1

3IG

18

IG1

2IG

19

IG1

7IF

3

20

II1

12

12

21

5IG

13

IB6

12

12

13B

9B

2A

17

A5

A6

A22

C9

A3

A1

A18

A7

A1

6A

9A

10

A2

A11

A7

B2

B13

A9

B10

B1

B16

A12

A17

A14

A4

A3

A15

A7

A11

B1

2B

4B

3B

8C

9C

10B

1A

6A

18A

5A

6B

6B

21C

14A

15

B16

B7

C

17B

20B

19

B20

C7

B11

A18

B8

B16

C4

C1

0C

11

C1

C2

C6

C17

C18

C19

C12

C15

C14

C3

C13

C1

B4

B3

B2

B8

A1

0A

4A

11B IH

IG14

26

II1

11IB

6

EA

M

12

IB6

31II

1

8IF

3

To Engine Control Module<3- 7><4- 8>

To Tachometer[Comb. Meter]<26- 5>

A/C DUALPRESSURE SW

A26

AIR

VE

NT

MO

DE

CO

NTR

OL

SE

RV

O M

OTO

R

E11ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR(A/C System)

A15A/C EVAPORATORTEMP. SENSOR

A 4A/C LOCK SENSOR[A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH]

A 1A/C AMBIENTTEMP. SENSOR

A16A/C ROOMTEMP. SENSOR

A17A/C SOLAR SENSOR

A25

AIR

MIX

CO

NT

RO

LS

ER

VO

MO

TOR

J 1

JUN

CT

ION

CO

NN

EC

TO

R

TSE

T

VE

R1

GN

DS

5

SW

1S

W2

TS

SW

3

TR

SW

4

TA

MSW

5S

W6

LOC

K-

INSW

7

SG

L-L

OL-

M1

L-M

2

AM

HA

MC

TPT

E

L-M

3L-

HI

L-A

/CL-

FRS

L-R

EC

L-M

AU

TO

L-F

AC

E

TWAO

DA

OF

TP

O

L-B

/LL-

FOO

TL-

F/D

L-D

EF

L-R

DE

FIG

RD

EFG

RS

PE

ED

+BA

CC

AIR

AIF

AIM

/AM

OU

T

A/C

-IN

HR

BLW

PS

WIG

NM

GC

15A

CIG

From Odo and Trip Meter[Telltale Light RH]<26- 1>

From Rear Window DefoggerRelay<21- 1>

HEATER CONTROL SW

RR

-D

EFO

GD

EF

F/D

FOO

TB

/LFA

CE

AU

TOR

EC

/F

RS

A/C

FAN

D-

FA

ND

+O

FF

WA

RM

CO

OL

M

DEFFACE

COOL WARM

A

54

54

31

23

12

AA

L- YL- YL- Y

L

L- W

L

W- B

L- R

LG

W

Y- L

LG- R

L- Y

G- W

R- Y

V V

R- Y

G- W

L- Y

LG- R

Y- L

W

LG

BR- W

V- W

V- W

V- W

V- W

BR- W

B- W

L- R

L- W

L- WL- WL- WG

G- Y

L- W

G- Y[

G

GR- R

Y- G

BR- W

W- B

W- B W- B W- B W- B

L- W

BR- W

BR- W

BR- W

W- B

BR- W

L- B

L- W

P- B

Y- B

L- R

G- W

R- W

W- L

LG- R

R

P- B

B- W

P

LG

B

GR

LG- B

R- B

G

BR- W

Y

BR

R- Y

V

R- L

O

P

W- R

L- R

GR

W-R G R-L

G-

R

G

R-

L

R-L

V-W

V-W

V-

WV

-W

BR

-W

BR

-W

V-W

L

L-W

L-W

L-W

L-W

L-W

BR

-W

V- W(*1)L- W(*2)

L- W

W- B

G

R- L

L

H12 A , H13 B

A/C

AM

PLI

FIE

R

A12

C,

A13

A,

A14

B

Fron

t si

de o

fri

ght

fend

er

4A

2B

1A

1B

( *2)

( *1)

( *2)

( *1)

A 3 A , B

Rig

ht k

ick

pane

l

*1

:

2J

Z-

GT

E

*2

:

2J

Z-

GE

21

Ra

dia

tor

Fa

n a

nd

Au

tom

atic

Air

Co

nd

itio

nin

g

A B C D E F G H I

K